Wiring Systems

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Where to Find Electrical Schematics and the associated text. For exampl e, the cruise
control schematic will be located in the cruise
Because more than one electrical system is located in
control subsection and the schematic title will begin
each subsection, each e l ectrical system’s schematics
are further broken down into operating systems, or with cell 34.
cells. Each set of electrical system schematics Some subsections may have more than one circuit
will have a cell number that remains common across schematic such as Power Distribution, Interior
all vehicle platforms. Cells are organized by Lights and Air Conditioning.
subsystems with most containing a circuit schematic
Electrical Schematic Locations
Cell No. System Name Section Subsection
Power Distribution
10 Schematics Body and Accessories Wiring Systems
Ground Distribution
14 Schematics Body and Accessories Wiring Systems
Retained Accessory Retained Accessory Power
15 Power Schematics Body and Accessories
17 Auxiliary Battery Schematics Body and Accessories Wiring Systems
Upfitter Provision
18 Body and Accessories Wiring systems
Schematics
Cigar Lighter/Auxiliary
- 19 Outlet Schematics Body and Accessories Wiring Systems
20 Engine Controls Schematics Engine Engine Controls
Starting and Charging
30 Engine Engine Electrical
Schematics
31 Cooling fan Schematics Engine Engine Cooling
32 Radiator Shutter Schematics Engine Engine Cooling
Engine Exhaust Brake
33 Brakes Engine Exhaust
Schematics
34 Cruise Control Schematics Body and Accessories Cruise Control
Manual Transmission
35 Schematics Transmission Transaxle Manual Transmission
Inter-Axle Differential
36 Driveline/Axle Rear Axle Controls
Lock Schematics
Two Speed Rear
37 Axle Schematics Driveline/Axle Rear Axle Controls
Transfer Case
38 Driveline/Axle Transfer Case
Control Schematics
Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission or
39 Controls Schematics Transmission/Transaxle
Automatic Transaxle
40 Horn Schematics Body and Accessories Horns
Brake Warning System Hydraulic Brakes or
41 Schematics Brakes Air Brakes
42 ALC Suspension Schematics Suspension Automatic Level Control
Suspension Controls Road Sensing Suspension -
43 Suspension RSS Rea^ Time Dampening -
Schematics RTD Air Suspension
ABS Schematics
44 ABS/TCS Schematics Brakes ABS Traction Control
45 Steering Control Schematics Steering Variable Effort Steering
 Electrical Schematic Locations (cont’d)
Ceil No. System Name Section Subsection
Park Brake System
46 Schematics Brakes Park Brakes
SIR Schematics SRS
47 Schematics Restraints SIR
Tire Pressure
48 Monitor System Suspension Tire Pressure Monitor
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Steering Wheel and
49 Column Schematics Steering
Column Tilt
Data Link Connector (DLC)
50 Schematics Body and Accessories Data Link Communications
Body Control Module
51 Schematics Body and Accessories Body Control System
Door Control Module
55 Schematics Body and Accessories Doors
Brake Booster Pump
57 Schematics Brakes Hydraulic Brakes
Air Brake System
58 Schematics Brakes Air Brakes
Heater Blower Controls Heater and Ventilation
60 Schematics HVAC
(Non-A/C)
61 Defogger Schematics Body and Accessories Stationary Windows
Heated Windshield
62 Schematics Body and Accessories Stationary Windows
HVAC Blower HVAC Systems with
63 Controls Schematics HVAC
A/C Manual
HVAC Compressor Controls
64 Schematics HVAC HVAC Systems with
Compressor/Condenser Fan HVAC
A/C Manual
Controls Schematics
HVAC Air Delivery Controls HVAC Systems with
65 Schematics HVAC
A/C Manual
HVAC Blower Controls HVAC Systems with
66 HVAC A/C-Automatic (Includes
Schematics
Electronic and Dual Zone)
HVAC Compressor Controls
Schematics HVAC HVAC Systems with
67 HVAC A/C Automatic (Includes
Compressor/Condeners Fan
Electronic and Dual Zone)
Controls Schematics
HVAC Air Delivery HVAC Systems with
68 HVAC A/C-Automatic (Includes
Controls Schematics
Electronic and Dual Zone)
Collision Avoidance
70 Body and Accessories Collision Avoidance
Schematic
Audible Warnings Instrument Panel, Gauges
76 Schematics Body and Accessories
and Console
Backup Alarm
79 System Schematics Body and Accessories Backup Alarm
Instrument Cluster: Instrument Panel, Gauges
81 Analog Schematics Body and Accessories
and Console
Instrument Cluster: Instrument Panel, Gauges
82 Body and Accessories
Digital Schematics and Console
83 Instrument Panel, Gauges
Head Up Display Schematics Body and Accessories and Console
Navigation System Instrument Panel, Gauges
85 Body and Accessories
Schematic and Console
 Electrical Schematic Locations (cont’d)
Cell No. System Name Section Subsection
Driver Information System Instrument Panel, Gauges
86 Body and Accessories
Schematics and Console
Wiper/Washer System
90 Body and Accessories Wiper/Washer Systems
(Standard) Schematics
Wiper/Washer System
91 Body and Accessories Wiper/Washer Systems
(Pulse) Schematics
92 Wiper/Washer System
(Rear) Schematics Body and Accessories Wiper/Washer Systems
Headlamp Washer
93 Body and Accessories Wiper/Washer Systems
Schematics
100 Headlights Schematics Body and Accessories Wiper/Washer Systems
Headlights Twilight Lighting Systems
101 Sentinel/DRL Schematics Body and Accessories
102 Headlights DRL Schematics Body and Accessories Lighting Systems
103 Fog Lights Schematics Body and Accessories Lighting Systems
104 Headlight Doors Schematics Body and Accessories Lighting Systems
Headlight Leveling Lighting Systems
105 Body and Accessories
Schematics
110 Exterior Lights Schematics Body and Accessories Lighting Systems
112 Backup Lights Schematics Body and Accessories Lighting Systems
114 Interior Lights Schematics Body and Accessories Lighting Systems
117 Interior Lights Body and Accessories Lighting Systems
Dimming Schematics
120 Power Windows Schematics Body and Accessories Doors
Power Folding
121 Body and Accessories Roof
Top Schematics
122 Power Sunroof Schematics Body and Accessories Roof
130 Door Locks Schematics Body and Accessories Door Locks
132 Keyless Entry Schematics Body and Accessories Keyless Entry
Theft Deterrent System
133 Body and Accessories Theft Deterrent
Schematics
134 Release System Schematics Body and Accessories Body Rear End
Pull down Systems
135 Body and Accessories Body Rear End
Schematics
Garage Door Opener Garage Door Opener
136 Body and Accessories
Schematics
137 Power Sliding Door (PSD) Doors
Body and Accessories
Schematics
Steering Wheel and Column
138 BTSI Schematics Steering Standard Steering Wheel and
Column Tilt
Steering Wheel and Column
139 Column/Ignition Steering Standard Steering Wheel
and Column Tilt
140 Power Seat Schematics Body and Accessories Seats
141 Memory Seats Schematics Body and Accessories Seats
142 Lumbar Support Schematics Body and Accessories Seats
143 Heated Seats Schematics Body and Accessories Seats
146 Power Seat Schematics Restraints Seat Belts
147 Outside Mirrors Schematics Body and Accessories Doors
148 Automatic Day-Night Mirror Body and Accessories Stationary Windows
 Electrical Schematic Locations (cont’d)
Ceil N o.. System' Name Section Subsection
Radio/Audio Systems
150 Schematics
Body and Accessories Entertainment

151 Power Antenna Schematics Body and Accessories Entertainment

Steering Wheel Controls
152 Body and Accessories Entertainment
Schematics
Cellular Telephone
153 Body and Accessories Cellular Communications
Schematics
154 On Star Schematics . Body and Accessories Cellular Communications

How to Use Electrical Diagnosis

Electrical Diagnosis contains the following types of
diagnostic inform ation. Using these elem ents together
makes the electrical diagnosis of the various vehicle
system s faster and easier:
• How to Use Schematic Reference Tables
• How to Use Schematic Icon Tables
® Where to Find Electrical Schematics
• How to Use Component Location Tables
® How to Use Connector End Views
• How to Use Component Location Views
• How to Use Diagnostic System Checks
® How to Use Diagnostic Tables
• How to Use Circuit Descriptions
 When diagnosing a horn problem use the service
information located in the Horns (cell 40) service
Important: The schematic does not represent the category. The following schematic is a typical example
components and wiring as they physically appear on of a schematic with its supporting text.
the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is
treated no differently in a schematic from one which is
only a few inches long.

[H ot At All Times 1

Steering
Wheel

61199

The wiring schematic is the cornerstone of electrical

diagnosis. Schematics break the entire electrical
system into individual circuits, showing the electrical
current paths when a circuit is operating properly.
Wiring which is not part of the circuit of interest
is referenced to another page where the circuit is
shown complete. Schematics use a top (power)
to bottom (ground) sequence to present electrical
information.
How to Use Schematic Reference Tables
The schematic reference table is used when a
circuit continues into another electrical system’s
schematic. The schematic reference table matches all
references made on schematics to the appropriate
service category type number and service category
where the schematic’s continuation is shown.
How to Use Schematic Icon Tables
The schematic icon table shows all icons on schematic
with their definition or references.
How to Use Component Location Tables
The component location table shows a list of all
the electrical components within a systems electrical
schematics. The table consists of the following
information within a system’s electrical schematic:
• All components
• Grounds
• Pass-through grommets
• Splices
The table consists of 4 columns which describe the
following information:
• The component name
• The component location
• The reference to the component view
• The reference to the connector end view
(if applicable)
Name
The name cells provide the name of the components
that are used on the schematic(s). If a connector
is listed the number of cavities are also provided. This
represents the total number of cavities in the
connector regardless of how many connectors are
actually used.
Location
The location cell provides a written location of where
the component is in the vehicle with respect to
vehicle landmarks. Nearly all of the following
information shown on a schematic can be pinpointed
visually using the component location view
illustrations:
• Components
• Connectors
• Grounds
• Splices
Locator View
This column contains the reference to the appropriate
component view. The reference contains the location
within the subsection and the section. Refer to How to
Use Component Location Views.
Connector End View
This column contains the reference to the appropriate
connector end view. The reference contains the
location within the subsection and the section. Refer
to How to Use Connector End Views.
Component location views are line illustrations
that indicate all of the vehicle’s electrical components
within each electrical system.
RH Front Corner of Vehicle

154362

Legend
(1) Hood Ajar Switch (Export) (3) Right Horn A Note
(2) S114 (4) Right Horn F Note
How to Use Connector End Views
C o n n e c to r e n d v iew s s h o w th e cav ity o r term in al
lo c a tio n s for all th e re la te d 2 -p in o r la rg e r c o n n e c to rs
s h o w n in th e s y s te m s c h e m a tic (s ). T h e d ra w in g s
s h o w th e c o n n e c to r’s fa c e a s s e e n a fte r th e h a r n e s s
c o n n e c to r h a s b e e n d is c o n n e c te d from a c o m p o n e n t o r
m atin g c o n n e c to r. U n u s e d c a v itie s a r e left b lan k in
th e ta b le .
In ad d itio n , th e co lo r a n d p a rt n u m b e r of th e c o n n e c to r
b o d y is p ro v id ed a lo n g w ith th e fa m ily /se rie s n a m e .
B elow is a n e x a m p le of a ty p ical c o n n e c to r e n d view .
RH Horn A Note
How to Use Diagnostic System Checks
Important: M isd ia g n o sis c o u l d o c c u r if th e d ia g n o stic
s y s te m c h e c k is n o t p e rfo rm e d b e fo re u sin g th e
d ia g n o s tic ta b le s .
T h e d ia g n o s tic s y s te m c h e c k d e te rm in e s th e
d ia g n o s tic tro u b le c o d e s (D T C s) p re s e n t, v erifies
p ro p e r c o m m u n ic a tio n , a n d n a v ig a te s to th e
a p p ro p ria te d ia g n o s tic ta b le .
How to Use Diagnostic Tables
D iag n o stic ta b le s p ro v id e a p ro c e d u re th a t will h elp
y o u lo c a te th e co nd itio n in a circuit th a t is c a u s in g
a m alfu n ctio n . All d ia g n o stic p ro c e d u re s a r e s y m p to m
b a s e d , to a s s is t y o u in lo catin g th e con d itio n a s
f a s t a s p o s s ib le . D iag n o stic ta b le s sh o u ld e x is t fo r all
p o s s ib le (realistic) s y m p to m s a n d d ia g n o stic tro u b le
c o d e s (D T C s).

35437

Connector Part 12052644

Information 2 Way F Metri-Pack 150
Series Sealed (GRY)
Wire Circuit
Pin Color No. Function
BLK 250 Ground
DKGRN 29 Horn Feed

Horns Inoperative
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
DEFINITION: Horns will not sound when horn button is pressed.
1 Was the Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to H o r n s
— Go to S te p 2 S y s te m C h e c k
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
2. Remove the horn relay.
2 3. Connect a fused jumper across the horn relay —
terminals 30 and 87.
Do the horns sound? Go to S te p 3 Go to S te p 6
Connect a test lamp between the horn relay terminals 85
3 and ground. — Go to P o w e r
Does the test lamp light? Go to S te p 4 D is trib u tio n
1. Connect a test lamp between the horn relay
terminal 86 and battery (B+).
4 —
2. Press and hold the horn switch.
Does the test lamp light? Go to S t e p 5 Go to S te p 11
Replace the horn relay. Go to H o r n s
5 —- —
Is the repair completed? S y s te m C h e c k
 Horns Inoperative (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Connect a test lamp between the underhood junction block
6 terminal A12 or B12 (CKT 29) and ground. —
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 8 Go to Seep /
Replace the underhood junction block, refer to underhood
7 junction block replacement. — Go to Horns —
Is repair completed? System Check
Connect a test lamp between the Ground Splice
8 Pack G104 (CKT 250) and battery (B+). —
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
Replace horns. Go to Horns
9 — —
Is repair completed? System Check
Inspect G104 ground, if OK replace Ground Splice
10 Pack G104. — Go to Horns —
Is repair completed? System Check
1. Disconnect the underhood junction block
connector C2.
2. Connect a test lamp between the underhood junction
11 —
block terminal D1 and battery (B+).
3. Press and hold the horn switch.
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 12
1. Disconnect the Dash Integration Module (DIM).
2. Connect a test lamp between the underhood junction
12 block terminal D1 and battery (B+). —
3. Press and hold the horn switch.
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14
Replace the Dash Integration Module (DIM), refer to DIM
13 replacement. — Go to Horns —
Is the repair completed? System Check
1. Disconnect C202.
2. Connect a test lamp between connector C202
terminal B12 of the steering column side and
14 —
battery (B+).
3. Press and hold the horn switch.
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 15 Go to Step 16
Repair short to ground in CKT 28 (BLK). Go to Horns
15 — .—
Is repair completed? System Check
Repair open in CKT 28 in the steering column. Go to Horns
16 — —
Is the repair completed? System Check

How to Use Circuit Descriptions
The circuit description describes how the system
works electrically. It details how power, ground, inputs,
and outputs are supplied to the system’s related
components. The circuit description a lso explains the
communication and interaction of all components
that affect the operation of the system.
Battery positive vo ltage is applied at all times to the
horn relay terminals 85 and 30. Pressing the horn
switch grounds the horn relay coil on CKT 28 (BLK).
The relay coil can also be grounded on CKT 28 (BLK)
by the Dash Integration Module (DIM). The horn
relay app lies battery positive voltage to the horns on
CKT 29 (DK GRN) when energized. The horns
sound until the hom switch is released or the DIM
signal is gone.
Truck Zoning
A ll grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through
grommets, and splices have identifying numbers
that corresponds to where they are located in
the vehicle. The following table explains the
numbering system.

900-999
160995

Truck Zoning Table____________ Truck Zoning Table (cont’d)

Callout Numbers Zone Descripti on Callout Numbers tone Description
100-199 Engine compartment (All 400-499 Truck bed (From the
forward of the dash panel) instrument panel to the rear
Note: 001-099 are wheelhouse)
additional for the engine 500-599 Within the left front door
compartment (Only to be
used if all 100-199 items 600-699 Within the right front door
are used)
700-799 Within the left rear door
200-299 Within the instrument
panel area 800-899 Within the right rear door
300-399 Passenger compartment 900-999 Within the endgate door
/truck bed (From instrument
panel to the rear
wheelhouse)
 Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols (cont’d)
Symbol Description Symbol Description

Electrostatic Sensitive
Discharge (ESD) Icon.
r —i Partial Component.
This icon is used to alert
the technician that the 1 1 When a component is
system contains ESD i 1 represented in a dashed
sensitive components that L. _ -1 box, the component or it ’ s
require certain precautions wiring is not shown in it’s
before servicing. Refer to entirety.
ESD Notice in Cautions
and Notices.
106629 106637

Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint (SIR) or
Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Icon.
Entire Component.

A This icon is used to alert

the technician that the
system contains SIR/SRS
components that require
When a component is
represented in a solid box
the component or it’s wiring
certain precautions before is shown in it’s entirety.
servicing. Refer to SIR
Service Precautions
Caution in Cautions and
106630 Notices 106641

On-Board Diagnostic
(OBD II) Icon.
This icon is used to alert
the technician that the
circuit is essential for
proper OBD II emission Fuse
controls circuit operation.
Any circuit which, if it fails,
causes the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL ) to
turn on, is identified as an
OBD II circuit.
106632 106643

Important Icon

A This icon is used to alert

the technician that there is
additional information that
will aid in servicing a
) Circuit Breaker

system.

106633 106642

(H ot AJ All Times|
|Hot In Run)
|Hot In StartJ
I Hot In Acc And Run | Voltage Indicator Boxes.
These boxes are used on
fhlot In Run And Start f

Hot With Headlamp

schematics to indicate
when voltage is present at
a fuse.
I Fusible Link

Switch In Park Or Head

Hot In Retained
Accessory Power (RAP)

106635 106644
Electrical Symbols (cont’d) Electrical Symbols (cont’d)
Symbol Description , Symbol Description

12

□
Connector Attached to ^ pigq : ; Pass Through The
Component Grommet

106650

12

Pigtail Connector Chassis Ground

. j 1G100 .. .

106651

-Q- Bolt On or Screw On

Case Ground
Eyelet Terminal
0

106647 106652

1 2 ic i0 0
T Inline Harness Connector f 0 Single Filament Light Bulbs
' . T

106653

- f S100
Splice 0 - ^ )
Double Filament Light Bulb
r

106654
 Electrical Symbols (cont’d) Electrical Symbols (cont’d)
Symbol Description Symbol Description

I
Light Emitting Diodes •f Variable Resistor

106655 106659

1
■- T Capacitor Position Sensor

106656 106661

T ■' Battery I/O Resistors

1 -f

106657 106662

; 7
¥ Variable Battery
• ; ■ -I
I/O Switches

106660 106663

Resistor Diode

106658 106664
Electrical Symbols (cont’d) Electrical Symbols (cont’d)
Symbol Description Symbol Description

T Crystal Antenna

106665

Heating Elements Shield

106666

0 Motor >
r
}
t ■ Switches

106667 106672

Single Pole Single

Solenoid
Throw Relay

106668

Single Pole Double

Coil
Throw Relay

106669 106674
General Electrical Diagnosis Procedures
Basic Knowledge Required
W ithout a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be
difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in
this section. You should understand the basic
theory of electricity and know the meaning of voltage
(volts), current (amps) and resistance (ohms). You
should understand what happens in a circuit with an
open or a shorted wire. You should be ab le to
read and understand a wiring diagram.
Refer to Strategy Based Diagnosis in General
Information in order to properly diagnose and repair
the customer concern.
Symptom Diagnostic Example
The following is an example of a symptom and the
correct course of action taken by the technician.
Important: Research for possible bulletins, DTCs and
the vehicle’s service history. Also, thoroughly screen
the customer regarding the problem in order to
comp lete the repair of the vehicle and completely
satisfy the customer when a DTC or a symptom
diagnosis is not available.
Verify the Customer Concern, Check the
Problem
Customer complaint is the headlamps are inoperative.
Verify the normal operating procedure of the circuit
and the components that share that circuit. Refer
to Strategy Based Diagnosis.
Review the Headlamps Electrical Schematic
(Preliminary Checks)
Review the schematic, it is essential to understand
how a circuit should work before trying to figure
out why it doesn’t. After understanding how a circuit
should operate, read the schematic again, this
time keeping in mind what has been learned by
operating the circuit. Since both the low beam
headlamps are inoperative, ensure that the following
components are operating properly.
• The headlamp Switch.
• The YEL wire.
• Low contacts of the Headlamp Dimmer Switch.
• C100 terminal 1E.
• The TAN wires.
• Grounds G105 and G109.
Refer to Strategy Based Diagnosis.
Perform the System Check
The system check indicates that the low beam
headlamps operate when the high beam switch is in
high. Also, the high beam indicator illuminates but
neither high beam headlamp operates. Refer to
Strategy Based Diagnosis.
Check for Bulletins
Utilizing a combination of Techline tools and the
information accumulated from the Preliminary Checks,
check for bulletins.
Isolate the Root Cause
At this point analyze and (diagnose the problem), and
develop text. Since the high beam indicator
illuminated when the headlamp dimmer switch was in
the high position, the high contacts of the headlamp
dimmer switch and the LT GRN wire between the
headlamp dimmer switch and C100 are good.
At this point, it is extremely unlikely that the high
beam filaments in the RH and LH headlamps are both
open or that both headlamp connections are bad.
The cause must be a bad connection at C100 or an
open in the LT GRN wire between C100 and the
RH headlamp.
From isolating the root cause, basically the problem
has been diagnosed. Using the Component Location
Table and the corresponding figure, quickly find
C100 and the LT GRN wire, locate the exact trouble
point and make the repair.
Check the thoroughness of the repair by performing a
final system check on the headlamp circuit. This of
course means making sure that both high beams, both
low beams, and the high beam indicator are working.

[Hot At All Times

J" 1 Circuit Breaker n Headlamp
^Switch
I 1
| Head*.
T‘ " ♦ % O ff Head ^ > OOff
ff i
| _ | Park i
_ * L ______________ _ j I p! L _ j

1 YEL 10
•I*
Headlamp
Dimmer
Switch
r - n
B
1 TAN 12
1 LT GRN 11
1E * L :€100 .8 LT GRN 11
1 LT GRN 11 D.
r '
■* Instrument
S.P100 I SCluster
1 TAN 12 i
1 LT GRN I HJgh Beam >

X 12
1 TAN

RH
Headlamp
i
i
i
k ——
M'
® Indicator
India

10
J-

(around
.8 BLK 150
Distribution ----- 4IS205
2 BLK 150 0.5 BLK 151 Cell 14
3 BLK 150
■ MG109 A gios G200
61699

Intermiffenfs and Poor Connections Testing for Proper Terminal Contact

Diagnosis
Most intermittents are caused by faulty electrical
connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items:
• Wiring broken inside the insulation.
• Poor connection between the male and female
terminal at a connector. Refer to Testing for
Proper Terminal Contact below for the specific
procedure.
• Poor terminal to wire connection. Some conditions
which fall under this description are poor crimps,
poor solder joints, crimping over wire the
insulation rather than the wire itself and corrosion
in the wire to terminal contact area, etc.
• Wire insulation which is rubbed through. This
causes an intermittent short as the bare area
touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
• Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test
procedures to detect intermittent open, high
resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage
conditions.
It is important to test terminal contact at the component
and any in-line connectors before replacing a
suspect component. Mating terminals must be
inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor
connection between the make and female terminal at
a connector may be the result of contamination or
deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector
halves being improperly connected. A missing or
damaged connector seal, damage to the connector
itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and
dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination,
usually in the underhood or underbody connectors,
leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or
intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a
connector terminal without the proper adapter,
improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly
separating and joining the connector halves.
Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact
tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing
an open or intermittently open circuit.
Round Wire Connectors
Follow the procedure below to test terminal contact of
Metri-Pack or 56 Series terminals. Refer to J 3 8 1 2 5 -B
Terminal Repair Kit or the J 38125-4 Instruction
Manual for terminal identification.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal
contact.
1. Separate the connector halves.
2. Visually inspect the connector halves for
contamination. Contamination may result in
a white or green build-up within the connector
body or between terminals. This causes high
terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or
an open circuit. An underhood or underbody
connector that shows signs of contamination
should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals,
and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the
J 38125-B , test that the retention force is
significantly different between a good terminal and
a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal
in question.
Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and
lock) connectors on the harness side or the
component side.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal
contact.
1. Remove the component in question.
2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for
signs of contamination. Avoid touching either
side of the connector as oil from your skin may be
a source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of
the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal
contact. Visual ly inspect the component side
connector to ensure that all of the terminals are
uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the J 42675
Flat Wire Probe Adapter Kit on the flat wire
harness connector in order to test the circuit in
question.
Checking Aftermarket Accessories
Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the
following circuits:
Caution: Refer to SIR Service Precautions Caution
in Cautions and Notices.
• SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on
circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol.
Notice: Refer to O B D II Sym bol Description Notice in
Cautions and Notices.
• OBDII circuits, all such circuits are indicated on
circuit diagrams with the OBDII symbol.
Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM)
as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems.
If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to
verify that these add-on accessories are not the
cause of the problems.
Possible causes of vehicle problems related to
aftermarket accessories include:
• Power feeds connected to points other than the
battery.
• Antenna location.
• Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle
electronic modules or wiring.
• Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna
feed line.
• Check for recent service bulletins detailing
installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories.
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Cautions and
Notices.
A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low
impedance circuit for voltage.
The J 3414 2-B Test Lamp is Micro-Pack compatible
and comprised of a 12 volt light bulb with an attached
pair of leads.
To properly operate this tool use the following
procedure.
1. Attach one lead to ground.
2. Touch the other lead to various points along the
circuit where voltage should be present.
3. When the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the
point being tested.
Troubleshooting with a Digital .-Multimeter -
N o tic e ;■ Refer to Test Probe Notice in Cautions
and Notices.
Important; Circuits which include any solid state
control modules, such as the PCM, should only be ■
tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital
multimeter such as the J 39200.
The J 39200 Instruction Manual is a/good.source of
information and should be read thoroughly upon
receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future
reference.
A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order
to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While .
a test lamp shows whether voltage is present, a DMM.;
indicates how much voltage is present.
The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much
resistance exists between two points along a
eireuit Low resistance in a circuit means good
continuity.
Important: Disconnect the power feed from the
suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a
DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply
such a small voltage to measure resistance that
the presence of voltages can upset a resistance
reading.
Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can
cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if
a component is affecting a measurement take a-
reading once, then reverse the leads and take a
second reading. If the readings differ the solid state
component is affecting the measurement.
Following are examples of the various methods of
connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested:
• Backprobe both ends of the connector and either
hold the leads in place while manipulating the
connector or tape the leads to the harness
for continuous monitoring while you perform other
operations or test driving. Refer to Probing
Electrical Connectors.
• Disconnect the harness at both ends of the
suspected circuit where it connects either
to a component or to other harnesses.
• If the system that is being diagnosed has a
specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used
in order to simplify connecting the DMM to
the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly.
Troubleshooting with a Short Finder
The J 8681-A can locate hidden shorts to ground.
The short finder creates a pulsing magnetic field in the
shorted circuit and shows the location of the short
through the body trim or sheet metal.
Probing Electrical Connectors
important: Always be sure to reinstall the Connector
Position Assurance (CPA) and Terminal Position
Assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or
replacing terminals.
Frontprobe
Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals
from the mating side (front) of the connector.
Atof/ce; Do" not insert test equipment probes into any
connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of
the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed
terminal can cause a poor connection, which can
result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-A
Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat
Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe
terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes
as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect
measurements.
Backprobe -
Do not disconnect the connector and probe the
terminals from the harness side (back) of the
connector.
Im p o rta n t:. . -
• Backprobe connector terminals only when
specifically required in diagnostic procedures.
• Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack®)
connector, less than a 280 Series Metri-Pack
connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire
(dock and lock) connector.
• Backprobing can be a source of damage to
connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid
deforming the terminal, either by forcing the
test probe too far into the cavity or by using too
large of a test probe.
• After backprobing any connector, inspect for
terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected,
test for proper terminal-contact.
Using Connector Test Adapters
Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes into any
connector or fuse block termina l . The diameter of
the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed
terminal can cause a poor connection, which can
result in system failures. Always use the J 35616-A
Connector Test Adapter Kit or the J 42675 Flat
Wire Probe Adapter Kit in order to frontprobe
terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes
as they can damage terminals and cause incorrect
measurements.
Using Fused Jumper Wires
Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state
components from being damaged.
The J 36169-A fused jumper includes small clamp
connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors
without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied
with a 20 A fuse which may not be suitable for
some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating
than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested.
Measuring Voltage
Testing for Voltage Drop
This test checks for voltage being lost along a wire, or
through a connection or switch.
1. Connect the positive lead of a DMM to the end of
the wire (or to one side of the connection or
switch) which is closer to the Battery.
2. Connect the negative lead to the other end
of the wire (or the other side of the connection
or switch).
3. Operate the circuit.
Measuring Voltage Drop
Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Cautions and
Notices.
The following procedure determines the difference in
vo ltage potential between two points.
I Hot At All Times|
61704
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC)
position.
2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one
point of the circuit to be tested.
3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the
other point of the circuit.
4. Operate the circuit.
5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage
between the two points.
Testing for Continuity
Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Cautions and
Notices.
The following procedures verify good continuity in a
circuit.
With a DMM
1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the £2 position.
2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control
module) from the suspect circuit.
3. Disconnect the load.
4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM.
5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the
circuit to be tested.
6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other
end of the circuit.
7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance and a
tone is heard, the circuit has good continuity.
With a Test Lamp
Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low
impedance power and ground circuits.
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module)
from the suspect circuit.
2. Disconnect the load.
3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of
the circuit to be tested.
4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery
positive voltage.
5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground.
6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the
circuit has good continuity.
Testing for Short to Ground
Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice in Cautions and
Notices.
The following procedures test for a short to ground in
a circuit.
With a DMM
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module)
from the suspect circuit.
2. Disconnect the load.
3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the £2 position.
4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of
the circuit to be tested.
5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good
ground.
6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance
(OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit.
With a Test Lamp
1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module)
from the suspect circuit.
2. Disconnect the load.
3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery
positive voltage.
4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one
end of the circuit to be tested.
5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to
ground in the circuit.
Fuse Powering Several Loads
1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse
that is open.
2. Open the first connector or switch leading from
the fuse to each load.
3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be
sure that the fuse is powered).
• When the DMM displays voltage the short is in
the wiring leading to the first connector or
switch.
• If the DMM does not display voltage refer to
the next step.
4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM
displays voltage in order to find which circuit is
shorted.
Testing for Electrical Intermittents
Perform the following procedures while wiggling the
hamess from side to side. Continue this at convenient
points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the
test equipment.
• Testing for Short to Ground
• Testing for Continuity
If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure
below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39 2 0 0
DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit
without having to watch the J 39200. The J 3 9 2 0 0
will generate an audible tone when a change is
detected.
Important: The J 3 9 2 0 0 must be used in order to
perform the following procedure since the J 3 9 2 0 0 can
monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording
the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values
measured.
1. Connect the J 3 9 2 0 0 to both sides of a suspected
connector (still connected), or from one end of a
suspected circuit to the other. Refer to
Troubleshooting with a Digital Multim eter for
information on connecting the J 3 9 2 0 0 to
the circuit.
2. Set the rotary dial of the J 3 9 2 0 0 to the V (AC) or
V (DC) position.
3. Press the range button of the J 3 9 2 0 0 in order to
select the desired voltage range.
4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The
J 3 9 2 0 0 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an
audible tone (beep).
Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length
of time an input must stay at a new value in order
to record the full change.
5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing
the intermittent connection, either by wigg ling the
connections or the wiring, test driving, or
performing other operations.
6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which
indicates that a new minimum or maximum value
has been recorded.
7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to
display the MAX value and note the value.
8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to
display the MIN value and note the value.
9. Determine the difference between the MIN and
MAX values.
• If the variation between the recorded MIN and
MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an
intermittent open or high resistance condition
exists. Repair the condition as necessary.
• If the variation between the recorded MIN and
MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an
intermittent open or high resistance condition
does not exist.
W iring Repairs
The Wiring Repairs section contains the following
types of wiring repair information. Using these
elements together will make wiring repair faster and
easier:
• Circuit Protection - Fuses
• Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
• Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
• Repairing D am aged Wire Insulation
• Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips
• Splicing C opper Wire Using Splice Sleeves
• Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
• Splicing Inline H am ess Diodes
• H 0 2 S Wiring Repairs
• S IR Wiring Repairs
• Flat Wire Repairs
Circuit Protection - Fuses C ircuit Protection - Circuit Breakers
A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed
to open the circuit when a current load is in excess
of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short
or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the
excessive current will open the circuit between
the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit
breakers are used.
C ircu it Breaker: This type opens when excessive
current passes through it for a period of time. It closes
again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the
high current is still present, it will open again.
The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and
closed until the condition causing the high current is
removed.
Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit
Breaker: This type greatly increases its resistance
when excessive current passes through it. The
excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device
heats its resistance increases. Eventually the
8786 resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively
open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit
The fuse is the most common method of an automotive will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing
wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage
excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a
the fusible element will melt and create an open second or two.
or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection
device and must be replaced each time the circuit is
overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the
Circuit Protection - Fusible Links
suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break
for an open (break). If not broken, also check for continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often
continuity using a J 39200 DMM or a continuity tester. located between or near the battery and starter or
If the element is open or continuity is suspect, electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a J 39200
replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible
link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken,
Fuse Types it must be replaced with fusible link of the
Current Rating Amperes Color same gage size.
Auto Fuses., Mini Fuses Repairing a Fusible Link
2 Gray Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm
3 Violet (approx. 9 inches) will not provide sufficient
5 Tan overload protection.
7.5 Brown Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips.
10 Red
Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation
15 Blue
If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged,
20 Yellow
locate the problem and apply tape around the
25 White or Natural wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the
30 Green faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper
Maxi Fuses Wire Using Splice Clips and fo llow the instruction
to repair the wire.
20 Yellow
30 Light Green
40 Orange or Amber
60 Blue
50 Red
 Wire Size Conversion Table 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow
Metric Wire Sizes (mm 2) AWG Sizes the instructions in the J 38125-B Terminal Repair
Kit in order to determine the proper clip size
0.22 24
crimp tool and anvil.
0.35 22
6. Overlap the two stripped wire ends and hold them
0.5 20
between thumb and forefinger.
0.8 18
1.0 16
2.0 14
3.0 12
5.0 10
8.0 8
13.0 6
19.0 4
32.0 2
50.0 1/0

Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips

Tools Required
J 38125-B Terminal Repair Kit
1. Open the harness.
• If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
• To avoid wiring insulation damage, use 8787
a sewing ripper in order to cut open the
hamess. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped
wires (1) and hold the clip in p lace.
• If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull
out the desired wire. • Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in
2. Cut the wire. each direction.
• Cut as little wire off the hamess as possible. • Ensure that no insulation is caught under
the clip.
• Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm
(1.5 in) away from other splices, harness
branches and connectors. This helps prevent
moisture from bridging adjacent splices
and causing damage.
3. Select the proper size and type of wire.
• The wire must be of equal or greater size than
the original (except fusible link).
• The wire’s insulation must have the same or
higher temperature rating.
- Use general purpose insulation for areas
that are not subject to high temperatures.
- Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated
wire for areas where high temperatures
are expected.
Important: Use Cross-linked polyethylene wire to
replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked
polyethylene with PVC.
Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do
8788
not use to replace wire where there is the possibility
of fuel contact. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip
4. Strip the insulation. and wires.
• Select the correct size opening in the wire 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes.
stripper or work down from the largest size. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut.
• Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 inches) of
insulation from each wire to be spliced.
 8790 8792

10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to
duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the
existing wires.

11. App ly 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in 8795

the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer’s
13. Additiona l tape can be applied to the wire if the
instructions for the solder equipment.
wire does not belong in a conduit or another
harness covering. Use a winding motion in order
to cover the first piece of tape.
Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice • The wire’s insulation must have the same or
Sleeves higher temperature rating (4).
• - Use general purpose insulation for areas
Use crimp and seal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one
that are not subject to high temperatures.
splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and
coaxial to form a one-to-one splice. Use tefzel and - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated
coaxial where there is special requirements such wire for areas where high temperatures
as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions be low in are expected.
order to splice copper wire using crimp and seal Important: Use Cross-linked polyethylene wire to
splice sleeves. replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked
polyethylene with PVC.
Crimp and Seal Splice Table
Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do
Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool Nest Wire Gauge not use to replace wire where there is the possibility
Color Collor 5 AWG/(Metric) of fuel contact.
Salmon Red 20,18/(0.5, 0.8) 4. Strip the insulation.
Blue Blue 16, 14/ (1.0, 2.0) • Select the correct size opening in the wire
Yellow Yellow 12, 10/(3.0, 5.0) stripper or work down from the largest size.
Tools Required • Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 inches) of
- insulation from each wire to be spliced (1).
J 38125-B Terminal Repair Kit
5. Select the proper splice sleeve (2) and the
1. Open the harness.
required crimp nest tool, refer to the Crimp
• If the harness is taped, remove the tape. and Seal Splice Table.
• To avoid wiring insulation damage, use 6. Place the nest tool in the J 38125 crimp tool.
a sewing ripper in order to cut open the
7. Place the splice sleeve in the crimp tool nest so
harness.
that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice.
• If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull
8. Close the hand crimper handles s lightly in order
out the desired wire.
to hold the splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp
2. Cut the wire. tool nest.
• Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. 9. Insert the wires into the splice sleeve until the
• Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has
(1.5 in) away from other splices, harness a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to
branches and connectors. This helps prevent prevent the wire from passing through the
moisture from bridging adjacent splices splice (3).
and causing damage. 10. Close the handles of the J 38125 until the crimper
handles open when released. The crimper
handles will not open until the proper amount of
pressure is applied to the splice sleeve.
i.
u.L. / ... -
11. Shrink the insulation around the splice.
• Using the heat torch apply heat to the crimped
area of the barrel.
UL_ • Gradually move the heat barrel to the open
end of the tubing.
- The tubing will shrink completely as the
heat is moved along the insulation.
- A small amount of sealant will come out of
the end of the tubing when sufficient
shrinkage is achieved.

8796

3. Select the proper size and type of wire,

• The wire must be of equal or greater size than
the original.
Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable
Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect
wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cab le of
this construction is used between the radio and
the Delco-Bose® speaker/amplifier units and other
app lications where low level, sensitive signals must be 1
carried. Follow the instructions below in order to
repair the twisted/shielded cable.

i g g n z z 3

8800

4. Re-assemble the cable.

8798
1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut
into the drain wire of the mylar tape.
2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use
the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors
after the splice is made.
• Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape.
• Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in
the tape (1).
• Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire
and splice the drain wire.
• Wrap the drain wire around the conductors
and tape with mylar tape.
Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum
side inward. This ensures good electrica l contact with
the drain wire.

8801

5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion

when you apply the tape.
3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and
follow the splicing instructions for copper wire.
Staggering the splices by 65 mm is recommended.
Splicing Inline Harness Diodes
Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate
circuits and protect the components from voltage
spikes. When installing a new diode use the following
procedure.
1. Open the harness.
• If the harness is taped, remove the tape.
• To avoid wiring insulation damage, use
a sewing ripper in order to cut open the
harness.
• If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull
out the diode.
2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of
the tape.
3. Check and record the current flow direction and
orientation of diode.
4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness
with a suitable soldering tool.
Im portant: If the diode is located next to a connector
terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector
to prevent damage from the soldering tool.
5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to
the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not
remove any more than is needed to attach the
new diode.
6. Check current flow direction of the new diode,
being sure to install the diode with correct bias.
Reference the appropriate service manual
wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode
installation position.
7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using
60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach
some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips)
across the diode wire ends to protect the diode
from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer’s
instruction for the soldering equipment.
8. Reinsta ll terminal(s) into the connector body if
previously removed
9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using
electrical tape.
Im portant: To prevent shorts to ground and water
intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode
attachment points with tape.
H 02S Wiring Repairs
Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances
as this could result in the air reference being
obstructed.
If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector,
or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor
assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair
the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the
sensor to function properly it must have a clean
air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by
way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any
attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals
could result in the obstruction of the air reference and
degrade oxygen sensor performance.
The following guidelines should be used when
servicing the heated oxygen sensor:
• Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to
the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These
materials may get into the sensor, causing
poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and
hamess wires must not be damaged in such a way
that the wires Inside are exposed. This could
provide a path for foreign materials to enter the
sensor and cause performance problems.
• Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should
be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks,
etc., could block the reference air path through the
lead wire.
• Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor
ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles
that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on
this ground as the only ground contact to
the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also
cause poor engine performance.
• To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be
sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the
vehicle harness connector.
The engine harness may be repaired using the
J 38125-B.
SIR Wiring Repairs
The supplementa l inflatable restraint (SIR) system
requires special wiring repair procedures due to
the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific
procedures and instructions when working with the
SIR system wiring, and the wiring components (such
as connectors and terminals).
Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order
to replace damaged SIR system terminals unless
specifically indicated by the terminal package.
Tools Required
J 38125-B Terminal Repair Kit
The tool kit J 38125-B contains the following items:
• Special sealed splices - in order to repair the
SIR system wiring
• A wire stripping tool
• A special crimping tool
• A heat torch
• An instruction manual
The sealed splices have the following 2 critical
features:
• A specia l heat shrink sleeve environmenta lly seals
the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a
sealing adhesive inside.
• A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides
necessary contact integrity for the sensitive,
low energy circuits.
The J 38125-B also serves as a generic terminal
repair kit. The kit contains the following items:
• A large sampling of common GM electrical
terminals
• The correct tools in order to attach the terminals
to the wires
• The correct tools in order to remove the terminals
from the connectors
SIR Connector (Plastic Body and
Terminal Metal Pin) Repair
Use the connector repair assembly packs in order to
repair the damaged SIR wire harness connectors
and the terminals. Do not use the connector repair
assembly pack in order to repair the pigtails. These kits
include an instruction sheet and the sealed splices.
Use the sealed splices in order to splice the new wires,
connectors, and terminals to the harness. The splice
crimping tool is color keyed in order to match the
splices from the J 38125-B. You must use the splice
crimping tool in order to apply these splices.
The terminals in the SIR system are made of a special
metal. This metal provides the necessary contact
integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These
terminals are only available in the connector repair
assembly packs. Do not substitute any other terminals
for those in the assembly packs.
If the individual terminals are damaged on the sensing
and diagnostic module (SDM) harness connector,
use 1 of the following 2 components in order to replace
the SDM harness connector:
• The SDM harness connector pigtail assembly
• The SDM harness connector replacement kit
If the individual terminals are damaged on any other
SIR connection, use the appropriate connector
repair assembly pack in order to replace the entire
connection. Replace the entire SIR wiring harness, if
needed, in order to maintain SIR circuit integrity.
SIR Wire Pigtail Repair
Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal
repairs on components with wire pigtails.
A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the
device (not by a connector). If a wiring pigtail is
damaged, you must replace the entire component
(with pigtail). The inflatable restraint steering wheel
module coil is an example of a pigtail component.
SIR Wire Repair
Tools Required
J 38125-B Terminal Repair Kit
Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems
in order to determine the correct wire size for the
circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this
information in order to ensure circuit integrity.
If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the
wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the
same gauge size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.).
Use the sealed splices and splice crimping tool from
the J 38125-B. Use the following wiring repair
procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the
sealed splice.
Im portant: You must perform the following procedures
in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire
strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean
strip with all of the wire strands intact.
Splice Sleeve Crimp Tool Nest Wire Gauge mm2
Color Color / (AWG)
Salmon 0.035-0.8 /
(yellow-pink)
Red (1)
(18-20)
Blue Blue (2) 1.0-2.0/(14-16)
Yellow Yellow (3) 3.0-5.0/(10-12)
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:
• Use a sewing seam ripper (available from
sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the
harness in order to avoid wire insulation
damage.
• Use the crimp and sealed splice sleeves on all
types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial.
• Do not use the crimp and sealed splice sleeve
to form a splice with more than 2 wires
coming together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You
may need the extra length of wire in order to
change the location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at
least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices,
harness branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:
• When adding a length of wire to the existing
harness, use the same size wire as the
original wire.
• Perform one of the following items in order to
find the correct wire size:
- Find the wire on the schematic and convert
the metric size to the equivalent AWG size.
- Use an AWG wire gauge.
- If you are unsure of the wire size, begin
with the largest opening in the wire
stripper and work down until achieving a
clean strip of the insulation.
• Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of
insulation from each wire to be spliced.
• Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect
the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
• If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure
after removing the damaged section.
4. Select the proper sealed splice sleeve according
to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the
beginning of the repair procedure for the color
coding of the splice sleeves and the
crimp tool nests.

5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J 38125-B in
order to position the splice sleeve in the proper
color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool.
6. Place the splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that
the crimp falls midway between the end of the
barrel and the stop. The s leeve has a stop (3) in
the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent
the wire (1) from going further. Close the
hand crimper handles s lightly in order to firm ly
hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest.
9502
7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until
the wire hits the barrel stop.
8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until
the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply
the proper amount of pressure to the splice
sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite .end
of the splice.
9503
9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped
area of the barrel.
10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of
the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is
moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the
end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
SIR System Wire Splice Repair Push to Seat Connectors
Apply a new splice (not sealed) from the J 3 8 1 2 5 -B if
damage occurs to any of the original equipment Terminal Removal
splices (3 wires or more) in the SIR wiring harness. Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat
Carefully follow the instructions included in the connectors.
kit for proper splice clip application.
Connector Position Assurance (CPA)
The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small
plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a ll the
SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures
that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart.
You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure
good contact between the SIR mating terminals.
Terminal Position Assurance (TPA)
The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert
resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal
securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove
the TPA from the connector body unless you remove
a terminal for replacement.

Flat Wire Repairs

N o tic e: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is
not serviceable. If an open or short exists within
the flex wiring harness the complete hamess must 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA)
be replaced. device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
Connector Repairs 2. Separate the connector halves (1).
The Connector Repairs section contains the following
types of connector repair information. Using these
elements together will make connector repair faster
and easier:
• Connector Position Assurance Locks.
• Terminal Position Assurance Locks.
• Push to S eat Connectors.
• Repairing D am aged Wire Insulation.
• Wiring Repairs.
• Splicing C opper Wire Using Splice Clips.
• Splicing C opper W ire Using Splice Clips.
• Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable.

Connector Position Assurance Locks

The Connector Position Assurance (CPA) is a small
plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of all the
SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures
that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart.
You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to
good contact between the SIR mating terminals. release the terminal.

Terminal Position Assurance Locks 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of
the back of the connector.
The Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) insert
resembles the plastic combs used in the control
module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal
securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove
the TPA from the connector body unless you remove
a terminal for replacement.

8804
5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to
reuse the terminal (1).
6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal.
2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possib le.
3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire.
4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire
5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire.
6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder.
7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal.
8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation.
9. If the connector is outside of the passenger
compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Reinstalling Terminal
1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly.
Refer to Wiring Repairs.
2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal
side of the splice.
3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches.
4. Insta ll the TPA, CPA and/or the secondary locks.
Pull to Seat Connectors
Terminal Removal
Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat
connectors.
8805
1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA)
device, the connector position assurance (CPA)
device, and/or the secondary lock.
2. Separate the connector halves.
3. Using the proper pick or removal tool (4) insert
into the front of the connector body.
4. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector
body and gently pull the terminal (1) from the
connector body (3).
5. Inspect the terminal for damage, if damaged refer
to Terminal Repair.
6. Reform the locking tang (2) if the terminal is being
reused.
Terminal Repair
1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal.
2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible.
3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire.
4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire.
5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire.
6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder.
7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal.
8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation.
9. If the connector is outside of the passenger, .
compartment, apply grease to the connector.
Terminal Installation
1. Inspect the terminal for damage. If damaged refer
to Terminal Repair.
2. Reform the locking tang (2) if the terminal is being
reused.
3. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal
side of the splice.
4. Insert the wire into the back of the connector
body. Push until the terminal locking tang locks
into the connector body.
5. Install the TPA, CPA and/or the secondary locks.

Weather Pack Connectors

The following is the proper procedure for the repair of 2
Weather Pack® Connectors.

8803

• Insert the Weather Pack® terminal removal tool

into the front (mating end) of the connector
cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1),
. • Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal
through the back of the connector (2).
Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from
a connector.
• Inspect the terminal and connector for damage.
Repair as necessary. Refer to Repairing
Connector Terminals.
• Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in
connector body.
• Close secondary locks and join connector halves.
• Verify that circuit is complete and working
satisfactorily.
8802 • Perform system check.
• Separate the connector halves (1).
• Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids
in terminal retention and is usually molded to
the connector (1).
• Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the
forward most position. Hold the wire in this
position.
Repairing Connector Terminals
Use the following repair procedures in order to repair
the following:
• Push to Seat terminals
• Pull to Seat terminals
• Weather Pack® terminals
Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown.
Skip the steps that do not apply for your immediate
terminal repair. The J 3 8 1 25 -B Terminal Repair
Kit contains further information.
1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the
insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss.
For Weather Pack® terminals, remove the seal.
2. Apply the correct seal per gauge size of the wire.
For Weather Pack® terminals, slide the seal back
along the wire in order to enable insulation
removal.
3. Remove the insulation.
4. For Weather Pack® terminals only, align the seal
with the end of the cable insulation.
5. Position the strip in the terminal.
For Weather Pack® terminals, position the strip
and seal in the terminal.
6. Hand crimp the core wings.
7
Hand crimp the insulation wings.
For Weather Pack® terminals, hand crimp the
insulation wings around the seal and the cable.
8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals.

Schematic and Routing Diagrams

Power and Grounding Schematic References
Reference on Schematic Section Number - Subsection Name
Ground Distribution Cell - 14 8-Wiring Systems
Headlights Cell - 101 8-Lighting Systems
Headlights Cell - 102 8-Lighting Systems
Power Distribution Cell - 10 8-Wiring Systems
Radio Systems Cell - 150 8-Entertainment

Power and Grounding Schematic Icons

Icor Icon Definition
Refer to ESD Notice in Cautions and Notices.

19384

Refer to Servicing The SIR System Caution in Cautions and Notices.

19386
 Body and A ccessories___________________________________________________________________________
LH Battery <W/Dual Battery Option)

0 — |l)l— S

0
11Underhood
Fuse Relay
Center

0.8 ORN
1 ORN 440
y
.........*-v " .......
\r
/ *...v .
Fuse Block Fuse Block 5 RED 142
Details Details
Cell 11 Cell 11 A7, A6, p o o

5 RED 142 ■■■'

5 RED 42
f S205 ■£ >
5 RED 42 "l IP Fuse
11 Headlamp Block
- | Head” 1And Panel -Js>
F2 L SECURITY/ F8 X CTSY. F6 PARKLPS F4 RADIO
I l S h ! D ' m4m1f r
I } ! Switch
P STRG
G1 VY Fuse 21
p Fuse 3..
n »20A
G7 V
07 ?Fuse 9
G5 S1 20A G3 VI 20A Cl v BATT
Fuse 19
iI * I 10 A 10 A

gT 0.35 ORN 1740 0.8 ORN 240 5 ORN 1140

1 YEL 10 0.8 ORN 40 1 ORN 340
r ir 1r i r
s. -------- v--------
Headlights Fuse Block Fuse Block Fuse Block
DRL Details Details Details
Cell 102 Cell11 Cell 11 Cell 11

259774
8-278 Wiring Systems____________________________________________________________________________
259782
0
0
 Body and Accessories________________________________________________________________________
LH Battery
(W/Dual Battery Option)

W/Ouai
O — l |l|— o Battery!
32 BLK]1 Option I
RH Battery 32 BLK
1 r Starter
19 RED r "
-1— O j
a" 1
19 RED
7 * , Generator
1 'Motor 0
L ___ 1 1Solenoid
Mega
Fuse
Block
Single
Battery
Option
i
1
L _
(
1
J
ft. J

19 RED 0

3 RED 2

iS/ ECM -B
F11

c Fuse
612 ‘ 20 A

1 ORN 440

3 RED 42
C
r
\ 1lamp
f a - I And
j switch 'Panel
/ I Dimmer
Fuse 21 G7 20'A 20 A
1 ®’‘'I I Switch i G1 <35 83 *\2 Q A
10 A
l— -Au ». J
0.8 ORN 40 1 ORN 3 4 0 \ IP Fuse
GI 10
1 YEL 0.35 ORN 1740
r ir 0.8 ORN r 240 f 5|ORN Block
Headlights | FuseBlodk Fuse Block
DRL Details Details
Cell 102 ( Cell 11 Cell 11

259784
 8-280
Underhood Fuse-
Relay Center

Wiring
SEATS
G>- Fuse
40 A

E> 5 RED> 742

7‘

Systems ___________________________________________________________________________
N eiv IGN A N5[ |G N B N4 <L ABS N 3 1 BLOWER M2
N21A STOP rR7
71 L SEO R8k CAMP/TRAIL H5
► V FRONT
p Fuse 6 p Fuse 5 p Fuse 4 p Fuse 3 P Fuse 2
p p^ Fuse Fuse HEATED
<• 40 A C 60A Q 60A 50A X 30A P 7V* 30A P8C
P 8^ 30A c ! SEATS
M6 Stud A Stud B 20 A

5 RED 342 5 RED 542

(W/OC69)
Pickup 1 GRN 1840
5 RED C40 Only
(W/C69)
3 RED 242 5 RED 442 2 RED 642
Fuse Block
V V Details
Cell 11

C100 5 RED
---- » —
3 RED 242 £3r 342
1 3 RED
A8 242

S200 ■$ >
O
5 RED 142 5 RED 142 5 RED 142
i|P
Fuse
PWR ACCY Block
Circuit
Breaker
20 A
nB2 k-----------
RADIO
1—
B4 iv CIG LTR STOP-HAZ 06i I AUX PWR
P\ A6
(Regular/
E7F®
v T• CASE
P BATT P Fuse 13 Fusel P Fuse 7 Extended Cab) P Fuse 2
Fuse 19 S 20 A ► 20 A S> 25 A 30 A > 20 A
C7 C5 A7 D8
10 A 03 (Except
Regular/
Extended Cab)

0.8 ORN 640 1 ORN 140 1 ORN 840 2 ORN 540 1 ORN 1640
5 ORN 1140
7 1

Fuse Block Fuse Block Fuse Block Fuse Block

Details Details Details Details
Cell 11 Cell 11 Cell 11 Cell 11

259786
Body and Accessors - Wiring Systems 8-281
 8-282
Wiring Systems____________________________________________________________________________
W

0
0
3 PNK 3 YEL 5 3 WHT 1390

^ Underhood 11P
I F7 kIGN—E — ^ Lecm- i K7 JLENG- i •1Fuse - Rela} E5’ * CRANK TRANS •Fuse
I Block
I cJ Fuse ■'Fuse J Fuse Center P Fuse 8 Fuse 20
1 G8 ]' 10A J8^ ' 20 A L8^
! 20A I I D6 ' W A gf ' 10 A I
L ——

1 PNK 439 0.35 PNK

0.8 PNK 639 1 PNK 539 0.5 PPL 806 0.35 PNK 1020
r ir
r r r f y -------------.------
Fuse Block Fuse Block Fuse Block Fuse Block Fuse Block
Details Details Details Details Details
Celt 11 Cell 11 Celt 11 Cell 11 Cell 11

259792
 Body and A ccessories___________________________________________________________________________
Y Y y « Y YY IT
9 0
0
5 RED 542 Regular/
Extended
And Crew
Cab Only
S110
5 RED 542
Suburban/
Utility Only
5 RED 442 A1, p
*
oo 3 RED 542 2 RED 642 3 RED 242
5 RED 542
SP101
A C205
; “* Convenience
* •Center C203
V- 1
L. . i ji

5 RED 542
A: ,C400

5 RED 542 3 RED 542

S401

5 RED 442 5 RED 542 5 RED 542

A C3 1 1 A2A E7 A9 1 Underhood
r ^ Electronic r -1Auxiliary r n Auxiliary r Auxiliary r "’ Blower Motor r “i Brake r *— i Starter Relay Fuse- Relay
1 1Brake 1 1Blower Motor * 1Blower Motor 1 1Blower Motor 1 •Relay i | Lamp 1 | Engine Center
1 I Electrical
• Control 1 i Relay i »Relay 1 1Relay ' 'High
L. Module L " J Low a. — J Medium l. - J Hjgh *■ “ JCell 63
(EBCM) Cell 63 Cell 63 Cell 63
ABS L— — — ,
Controls
Suburban
Only
8-284 Wiring System s________________________________________________________________________________
259794
Body and Accessories________________________________________________________________________
8-286 Wiring Systems____________________________________________________________________________
497887
I Hot In RUNj
Body and A ccessories___________________________________________________________________________
8-288 Wiring System s_______________________________________________________________________________
364564
Body and Accessories Wiring Systems 8-289
8-290 Wiring System s_______________________________________________________________________________
 Body and A ccessories___________________________________________________________________________
■* Underhood
Fuse
Block A/C
Compressor
Clutch Clutch

0
l V j Relay
A6

0
0.8 DKGRN 59
0.8 BLK 150
0.8 BLK 150
0.8 BLK 150 0.8 DKGRN 59

<>S185 r 1 Transfer
—cl iCase
0.8 B 150 B L J Shift
0.8 BLK c |20 0.8 BLK Switch
—f>---
[pieseTonlyl^ 150 150
A/C Compressorr 0.5 BLK
Low Cutout I 0.8 B 150 r i Front
150
Switch L - ■ ’’ Park/ —<l I Axle
0.8 BLK C l . !* “ E L j Actuator
Electronic Brake r ■> C1 1 BLK 150 i Neutral
Control Module I l>— D l ----- j Position
J 150 Switch
(EBCM) J
r 1 Brake
0.5 BLK
—<l 1Pressure
150 B L
1 BLK J Warning
Switch
r — ’ Glow
i
Brake r ' r i yjaXQf v aive Plug
0.5 BLK 0.8 BLK —< | Water In r "" 0.8 BLK 'Relay
Pressure I | (Suburban Utility) 0.8 BLK
Warning L ----- J B 150 150 B L ___ J Fuel Filter 1
L— I. — — — — J
Switch
1 A.I.R Pump Lowr 1 ’’ Fuel
S162 | (7.4L Only) Coolant I ■' I Heater
LevCL-.jB j
Sensor

B C3
"* Electronic 3 BLK 150
I 1Brake
5 BLK 150
1 1Control
— J Modue A
(EBCM) ,999 IG 105

364590
8-292 Wiring System s________________________________________________________________________________
0
0
 Body and Accessories________________________________________________________________________
0

T
LH
Battery
r
1
“•Underhood
1Lamp
'' A.I.R,
0
1Pump
I i '(Air)
i. _ j
4=

8 BLK 50 4 Uncoated
Ground
32 BLK 50 Strap

Aj piese|i
A G101 LG102 G108

390801
8-294 Wiring Systems Body and Accessories
Body and A ccessories___________________________________________________________________________
 8-296
Wiring
Roof Marker
Lamps

\ \
j /

Systems
X ,
b1
s
0
0.8 BLK 0.8 BLK 0.8 BLK 0.8 BLK
150 150 150 150 ;
0.8 BLK 150

Body and A ccessories

364578
Body and A ccessories___________________________________________________________________________
0
0
1Convenience
 8-298
r - ■■ Inflatable r “ ■>Inflatable r "l Window r — -I puej pump r — -1pu@|pump r - i Fue|

Wiring
• 1Restraint 1 1Restrai nt 1 1Defogger 1 Jand 1 *and 1 8Pump
• 1Sensing And 1 1Front End » »Grid, 1 1Sender, 1 1
■Sender,*
aw iuot5 » i And
*■ Y "* Diagnostic LY J Discriminating i. - j Beat* k J p r jm a r y ' - y J Secondary t — j gender

0
6 Module B Sensor
An « n r C (Gas) (Gas) (Gas)
A (Diesel) (Diesel) (Diesel)

System s________________________________________________________________________________
A A A
0
0.8 BLK/WHT 1751 0.8 BLK/WHT 1751 3 BLK 150 1 BLK 150 1 BLK 150 1 BLK 150

A2 C232 C110 N w/Dual

Tanks

S319

0.8 BLK/WHT 1751 0.8 BLK/WHT 1751 0.8 BLK 150

I 6201 G300 G404 G404

364645
 Body and Accessories________________________________________________________________________
r - i High r — -i Blower Recirculation r — 1 Blower r - -i Mode r *>Temperature
I * Blower I I Motor, I Door Motor I I Motor 1 IDoor I *Door Motor
1 1Motor 1 I Front 1 l I Relay, 1 I Motor 1 1

s
0

364637
 8-300
\ Selectable 4WD Power Seat "■ Power Power
1Indicator Lamp 1Lumbar I Seat 1Lumbar
I Motor, RH I Adjuster 1 1Support

Wiring
J Switch, LH1- y J Motor, LH
A
0.8 BLK 1

System s_______________________________________________________________________________
"* Power
1Outside
*Rearview
J Mirror Motor, RF
(Luxury)

Headlamp
1Control
1Module
J (Luxury)

C1 laKA
150

S251

S330

0.8
BLK 150
, C215 "* Power
■Lumbar
0.8 8Support
BLK 150 J Motor,
. B RF

0,8
BLK 150
F
11Heated Seat Heated Seat
8Module, LR ' Module, RR
I (Luxury) I (Luxury)

J A J 4
 Body and Accessories________________________________________________________________________
r 11Power Outside 1 Power Window r “* Window Lockout r “■*Power Window r "* Heated
i * Rearview 1Master Switch 1 1Switch, Rear 1 * Switch, LR > • Mirror
1 I Mirror Switch 1 i i I 1Relay
8-302 Wiring System s________________________________________________________________________________
358257
0
0
 Body and A ccessories___________________________________________________________________________
“* Auxiliary r "l Auxiliary
1HVAC 1 'HVAC Control
1Control 1 1Logic Module
J Module, Rear1" — *

2 BLK
150 0.8 BLK
0
Cargo Door r
1Defogger Grid,1
'RR '
(■* -- j
Cargo Door
' Defogger Grid,
'LR
0
BLK 150
A 4*
blk *150
* A
p it s" 7R1 Cargo
i >^ w
f y Door
i. -? ftmmJv.Kj Contactor,
b'
BLK 150

| w/Liftgate |

150

C406

P400

150

"'Liftgate
I Defogger
'Grid
j

■JReading
'Lamp
1Overhead
J Console

364631
8-304 Wiring Systems____________________________________________________________________________
Body and A ccessories___________________________________________________________________________
364625
0
8-306 Wiring Systems____________________________________________________________________________
[ Hot At All Times]
Body and Accessories Wiring Systems 8-307
497260
8-308 Wiring S ystem s_______________________________________________________________________________
Wrapped Up Underneath IP
Body and A c c e s s o r ie s _________________________________________________________________________
0
0
I Hot At All Times |
8-310 Wiring Systems____________________________________________________________________________
497273
Flasher
Co ntrol
o ntrol
C
Control
Grill
Body and A c c e s s o rie s __________________________________________________________________________
497275
0

Of Roof
Center

Panel
Blunt
'Cut
3 DKGRN
Component Locator
Power and Grounding Components
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
On the front of the A/C compressor, in the
A/C Compressor Clutch in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
left front side of the engine
with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
In the underhood fuse-relay center, in the HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
A/C Compressor
left rear side of the engine compartment, in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
Clutch Relay
on the fender with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
On the top right of the A/C accumulator, in HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
A/C Compressor
the right side of the engine compartment, in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
Cycling Switch
on the bulkhead with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
A/C Compressor High On the rear of the A/C compressor, in the
in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
Pressure Cutout Switch left front side of the engine
with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
A/C Compressor Low On the top of the A/C compressor, in the
in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
Pressure Cutout Switch high pressure refrigerant line
with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Air Injection Reaction
LF of Engine Compartment Component Views Connector End Views
(A.I.R.) Pump (5 7L)
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Air Injection Reaction Engine Controls Engine Controls
(A.I.R.) Pump Lower RF of Engine Component Views Connector End Views
Clutch (7.4L) in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Air Injection Reaction In Underhood Fuse-Relay Center, LR of
Component Views Connector End Views
(A.I.R.) Pump Relay Engine Compartment, on Fender
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Ash Tray Lamp In the ash tray housing Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Instrument Cluster
Component Views in
Audio Alarm Module In the convenience center —■
Instrument Panel,
Guages and Console
Stationary Windows Stationary Windows
Automatic Day-Night On the top inside center of the windshield,
Component Views in Connector End Views in
Mirror with Compass part of the inside rearview mirror
Stationary Windows Stationary Windows
Automatic Transfer Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
At the center rear of IP, near Remote
Case Select Switch, Component Views in Connector End Views in
Control Door Lock Receiver
Connector 1 Transfer Case Controls Transfer Case Controls
Automatic Transfer Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
At the center rear of IP, near Remote
Case Select Switch Component Views in Connector End Views in
Control Door Lock Receiver
Connector 2 Transfer Case Controls Transfer Case Controls
Auxiliary Battery In the left front side of the engine Power and Grounding
(Diesel) compartment Component Views —

In the left rear of the engine compartment,

Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Auxiliary Battery Relay on the fender, near the underhood
Component Views Connector End Views
fuse-relay center
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary Blower Motor Behind the right rear wheelhousing in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary Blower Motor On the top of the auxiliary HVAC plenum,
in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Relay, High near the right rear wheelhousing
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary Blower Motor On the top of the auxiliary HVAC plenum,
in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Relay, Low near the right rear wheelhousing
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary Blower Motor On the top of the auxiliary HVAC plenum,
in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Relay, Medium near the right rear wheelhousing
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Cooling System Cooling System
Auxiliary Cooling Fan RH of Engine Compartment, front of Component Views in Connector End Views in
Motor (except 4.3L) Radiator
Engine Cooling Systems Engine Cooling Systems
Cooling System Cooling System
Auxiliary Cooling
LH of Engine Compartment Component Views in Connector End Views in
Fan Relay
Engine Cooling Systems Engine Cooling Systems
Heater Blower Controls Heater Blower Controls
Auxiliary Heater Component Views in Connector End Views in
Center of IP Dash, left of the IP Cluster
Control Switch Heating and Ventilation Heating and Ventilation
(Non-A/C) (Non-A/C)
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary HVAC Control In the rear Overhead Console, behind the
in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Logic Module controls
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary HVAC Control On the front of the overhead console, near
in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Module, Front the windshield
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary HVAC Control On the rear of the overhead console
in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Module, Rear molding, in the headliner
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary HVAC Control Views in HVAC Systems
In the front Overhead Console in HVAC Systems with
Switch, Front
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary Mode In the Auxiliary HVAC plenum, forward of
in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Door Motor the left rear wheelhousing
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
Auxiliary Power Power and Grounding
Center of dash —
Center (Z56) Component Views
Auxiliary Power In the center, lower right side of the IP, to Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Connectors, Front the left of the ash tray Component Views Connector End Views
Auxiliary Power Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Top rear of the Right Rear wheel well
Connector, Rear Component Views Connector End Views
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Auxiliary Temperature In the auxiliary HVAC plenum, near the
in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Door Motor right rear wheelhousing
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Backup Lamp, Left Side
At the rear of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
(Cab Chassis)
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Backup Lamp, Left Side At the rear of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
(Pickup/Utility)
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Backup Lamp, Right
At the rear of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
Side (Cab Chassis) in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Backup Lamp, Right
At the rear of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
Side (Pickup/Utility) in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Backup Lamp On the left side of the transmission, below
Component Views Connector End Views
Switch (MGS) the shift tower
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Backup Lamp
On the left top of the transmission Component Views Connector End Views
Switch (MW3) in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Battery, LH Power and Grounding
In the left front of the engine compartment —
(w/Dual Battery Option) Component Views
In the right front of the engine Power and Grounding
Battery, RH —
compartment Component Views
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
To the right of the IP, behind the IP
Blower Motor, Front in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
compartment box
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Blower Motor Behind the IP compartment box, on the
in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Relay, High HVAC plenum
Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
In the underhood fuse-relay center, in the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Brake Lamp Relay
left rear side of the engine compartment, Component Views Connector End Views
(Pick-up)
on the fender in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Antilock Brakes System Antilock Brakes System
Brake Pressure On rear of EBCM casting, near Brake
Component Views in ABS Connector End Views in
Warning Switch Master Cylinder, at LF Wheelhousing
Systems ABS Systems
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Camshaft Position
Top rear center of the engine Component Views Connector End Views
Sensor
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Cargo Door Contactor, On the rear body opening and the door, on
Component Views Connector End Views
Left Side the upper left side
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Cargo Door Contactor, On the rear body opening and the door, on
Component Views Connector End Views
Right Side the upper right side
‘ in Doors in Doors
Stationary Windows Stationary Windows
Cargo Door Defogger
On the left rear cargo door glass Component Views in Connector End Views
Grid, Left Rear
Stationary Windows in Stationary Windows
Stationary Windows Stationary Windows
Cargo Door Defogger
On the right rear cargo door glass Component Views in Connector End Views
Grid, Right Rear
Stationary Windows in Stationary Windows
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Cargo Door Lock
Left C Pillar Component Views Connector End Views
Relay (Luxury)
in Doors in Doors
At the rear center of the cab, above the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Cargo Lamp
rear window, part of the center high Component Views Connector End Views
(Pickup)
mounted stop lamp in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Cargo Lamp Switch In the center of the IP, to the left of
Component Views Connector End Views
^ (Pickup) the radio
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Center High Mount
Center High Mount Stoplamp (Pickup) Component Views Connector End Views
Stoplamp (Pickup)
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Center High Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Center High Mount Stoplamp
Mount Stoplamp Component Views Connector End Views
(Suburban/Utility)
(Suburban/Utility) in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
In the lower right center of the IP, to the Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Cigar Lighter
left of the ash tray Component Views Connector End Views
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Clearance Lamp,
In the front of the left rear fender Component Views Connector End Views
Left Front
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Clearance Lamp,
In the rear of the left rear fender Component Views Connector End Views
Left Rear
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Clearance Lamp,
In the front of the right rear fender Component Views Connector End Views
Right Front
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Clearance Lamp,
In the rear of the right rear fender Component Views Connector End Views
Right Rear
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Engine Electrical Engine Electrical
Clutch Pedal
At top of Clutch Pedal Component Views Connector End Views
Position Switch
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Under the left side of the IP, on the Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Convenience Center
bulkhead Component Views Connector End Views
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Courtesy Lamp, On the middle left side of the left
Left Front Door front door Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Courtesy Lamp, On the middle left side of the left rear
Left Rear Door door trim Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Courtesy Lamp, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Under the left side of the I P Component Views Connector End Views
Left Side IP
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Courtesy Lamp, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
On the middle right side of the right Component Views
Right Front Door front door Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Courtesy Lamp, On the middle right side of the right rear Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Right Rear Door Component Views Connector End Views
door trim
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Courtesy Lamp,
Right Side IP Under the right side of the IP Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Cruise Control Cruise Control Connector
Cruise Control LR of Engine Compartment, on Bulkhead Component Views
Module (COM)
End Views in Cruise
in Cruise Control Control
Cruise Control Cruise Control Connector
Cruise Control Switch In Turn Signal Lever Component Views End Views in Cruise
in Cruise Control Control
Data Link Under LH of IP, LH of Steering Column, Data Link Data Link
Connector (DLC) mounted to bottom of Knee Bolster Communications Communications
Component Views Connector End Views
Daytime Running Under the left side of the IP, taped to the Lighting Systems -Lighting Systems
Component Views Connector End Views
Lamps (DRL) Module IP harness
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Daytime Running Under the left side of the IP, at the lower Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Lamps (DRL) Relay Component Views Connector End Views
center of the convenience center
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Daytime Running Lamps Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
In the center of the IP, to the left side of
(DRL)/Radio Override the radio Component Views Connector End Views
Switch (Z56) in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Dome Lamp, Front Approximately 22 cm (8.7 in) from the
windshield centerline, in the headliner Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Dome Lamp, Rear Approximately 22 cm (8.7 in) from the
windshield centerline, in the headliner Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Door Jamb Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
At the rear body opening, part of the right
Switch, Cargo rear cargo door contactor Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems

Door Jamb Switch, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems

Liftgate Inside the liftgate door Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Door Jamb Switch, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
At the left end of the IP Component Views Connector End Views
Left Front
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Door Jamb Switch, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
At the right end of the IP Component Views Connector End Views
Right Front
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Door Lock Control Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Module Left C Pillar
Component Views Connector End Views

Door Lock Relay Under the center of the IP, near the Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
remote control door lock receiver Component Views Connector End Views
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End Vb.-;
Door Lock On top of the right D pillar Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Switch, Cargo Component Views Connector End Views
Door Lock Switch, On the left front door trim panel, below the Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Left Front inside door handle Component Views Connector End Views
Door Lock Switch, On the right front door trim panel, below Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Right Front the inside door handle Component Views Connector End Views
Near Brake Master Cylinder, at LF Antilock Brakes System Antilock Brakes System
Electronic Brake Component ViewsIn ABS
Control Module (EBCM) Wheelhousing Connector End Views
Systems n ABS Systems
Electronic Variable Theft Deterrent System Theft Deterrent System
Orifice (EVO)/ Under the center of the IP Component Views in Connector End Views
Passlock Module Theft Detterent in Theft Detterent
On the center and the bottom of the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Endgate Component Views
Identification Lamps Connector End Views
endgate in Lighting Systems ;r. Lighting Systems
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Engine Shutoff Top left center of the engine Component Views
Solenoid Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Evaporative Emissions Engine Controls Engine Controls
Canister Purge At top RH of Engine Component Views Connector End Views
Solenoid in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Evaporative Emissions LF of EBCM, near Brake Master Cylinder, Engine Controls
Component Views — '
Canister Vent at LF Wheelhousing
in Engine Controls
Exhaust Gas Engine Controls Engine Controls
Top LH center of Engine, above
Recirculation (EGR) Valve Cover Component Views Connector End Views
Boost Solenoid (Diesel) in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Exhaust Pressure Engine Controls Engine Controls
Regulator (EGR) Top of Engine Component Views Connector End Views
PWM Valve Solenoid in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Exhaust Pressure Top LH center of engine, above Engine Controls Engine Controls
Regulator (EGR) Component Views Connector End Views
Valve Cover
Solenoid in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
On the center of the IP, to the right of the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Fog Lamp Switch steering column shift lever Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems i.i Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Fog Lamp, Left Side At the left lower edge of the front bumper
and the air deflector Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
At the right lower edge of the front bumper Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Fog Lamp, Right Side and the air deflector Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Front Axle Actuator RF of Front Drive Axle Component Views in Connector End Views in
Transfer Case Controls * Transfer Case Controls
Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster
Fuel Gauge Sender In Fuel Tank Component Views Connector End Views
in Instrument Panel, in Instrument Panel,
Gauges and Console Gauges and Console
Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster
Fuel Gauge Sender, In Auxiliary Fuel Tank Component Views Connector End Views
Secondary in Instrument Panel, in Instrument Panel,
Gauges and Console Gauges and Console
Fuel Heater Top rear of Engine in the fuel filter Engine Controls Engine Controls
(Diesel) assembly Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Fuel Injectors Engine Controls Engine Controls
(5.0L, 5.7L, 7.4L) In Intake Manifold Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Fuel Pump (Diesel) Inside LH Frame Rail, below LF Door Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Fuel Pump, Secondary In Auxiliary Fuel Tank Component Views Connector End Views
(Diesel) in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Fuel Pump and Sender In Fuel Tank Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster
Fuel Pump Inside LH Frame Rail, near Transmission Component Views Connector End Views
Balance Module Crossmember in Instrument Panel, in Instrument Panel,
Gauges and Console Gauges and Console
Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster
On Fuel Pump Balance Module, inside LH
Fuel Pump Component Views in Connector End Views
Frame Rail, near Transmission Instrument Panel,
Balance .Relay Crossmember in Instrument Panel,
Gauges and Console Gauges and Console
Engine Controls Engine Controls
In Underhood Fuse-Relay Center, LR of Component Views Connector End Views
Fuel Pump Relay Engine Compartment, on Fender
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Fuel Solenoid — Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Fusible Link Molded into the battery positive connector Component Views Connector End Views
Garage Door Opener Garage Door Opener
Garage Door Opener In the overhead console Component Views in Connector End Views
Garage Door Opener in Garage Door Opener
Engine Electrical Engine Electrical
Generator LH Front of Engine Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Electrical in Engine Electrical
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Glow Plug Controller LR of Engine, near Bulkhead Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Glow Plug Relay LR of Engine, near Bulkhead Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Headlamp and Panel Lower Left side of the IP Component Views Connector End Views
Dimmer Switch in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Headlamp, High Beam On the left front of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
(Composite), Left Side in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Headlamp, High Beam On the right front of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
(Composite), Right Side in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Headlamp, High/Low On the left front of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
Beam, Left Side in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Headlamp, High/Low Component Views
On the right front of the vehicle Connector End Views
Beam, Right Side in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Headlamp, Low Beam Component Views
On the left front of the vehicle Connector End Views
(Composite), Left Side in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Headlamp, Low Beam On the right front of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
(Composite), Right Side in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Left side of the IP, Inside the IP Support Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Heated Mirror Relay Bracket Component Views Connector End Views
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Heated Oxygen Exhaust pipe, after Catalytic Converter Component Views Connector End Views
Sensor (5.0L) in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Heated Oxygen Engine Controls Engine Controls
Sensor, LH Bank Left Exhaust Manifold Component Views Connector End Views
(5.7L/7.4L) in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Heated Oxygen Engine Controls Engine Controls
Sensor, RH Bank Right Exhaust Manifold Component Views Connector End Views
(5.7L/7.4L) in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Heated Seat Inside the Left Front Seat Cushion Component Views Connector End
Element, LF in Seats Views in Seats
Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Heated Seat Inside the Right Front Seat Cushion Component Views Connector End
Element, RF
in Seats Views in Seats
Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Heated Seat1 Under the LF power seat Component Views Connector End
Module LF in Seats Views in Seats
Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Heated Seat • Under the RF power seat Component Views Connector End
Module, RF
in Seats Views in Seats
Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Heated Seat At the LF of the LF power seat Component Views Connector End
Switch, LF
in Seats Views in Seats
Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Heated Seat At the RF of the RF power seat Component Views Connector End
Switch, RF
in Seats Views in Seats
■ Heated Seat Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Temperature Inside the Left Front Seat Cushion Component Views Connector End
Sensor, LF in Seats Views in Seats
Heated Seat Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Temperature Inside the Right Front Seat Cushion Component Views Connector End
Sensor, RF in Seats Views in Seats
Horns Component Horns Connector End
Horn Relay In the Underhood Fuse Relay Center
Views in Horns Views in Horns
Horns Component Horns Connector End
Horn, Left At the front of the vehicle Views in Horns Views in Horns
Horns Component Horns Connector End
Horn, Right At the front of the vehicle Views in Horns Views in Horns
HVAC Component HVAC Connector End
Part of the heater controls, in the center of
HVAC Control Lamp Views in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
the IP, under the radio
with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component HVAC Connector End
HVAC Control Module Part of the heater controls, in the center of
the IP, under the radio Views in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
HVAC Component HVAC Connector End
HVAC Control Switch Right of the IP on the dash Views in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Ignition Coil RR of Engine Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Ignition Control Module RR of Engine Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Standard Wheel/Column Standard Wheel/Column
Ignition Switch IP Steering Column, under Lock Cylinder Component Views in Connector End Views in
Steering Systems Steering Systems
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Inflatable Restraint SIR Component SIR Connector End
Front End Discriminating Under front outside center of Radiator Views in SIR Views (SDM Connector
Sensor View) in SIR
SIR Component SIR Connector End
Inflatable Restraint RH of IP, above IP Compartment Box
IP Module Views (SDM Connector
Views in SIR View) in SIR
Inflatable Restraint IP Center of IP SIR Connector End
SIR Component
Module Switch (Pickup) Views (SDM Connector
Views in SIR View) in SIR
Inflatable Restraint SIR Connector End
SIR Component
Sensing and Diagnostic Under Carpet Beneath Drivers Seat Views (SDM Connector
Module (SDM) Views in SIR View) in SIR
Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster On the upper left end of the IP, above the Component Views Connector End Views
steering column in Instrument Panel, in Instrument Panel,
Guages and Console Guages and Console
Interior Lamp Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Under the center of the IP Component Views Connector End Views
Control Module
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
IP Compartment Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Box Lamp In the IP compartment box Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
IP Fuse Block To the left of the IP, near the left front Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
door jamb switch Component Views Connector End Views
Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster
Key-In Warning Component Views Connector End Views
In the steering column
Buzzer Switch in Instrument Panel, in Instrument Panel,
Guages and Console Guages and Console
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
License Lamps, At the rear of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
Left and Right Side
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Stationary Windows Stationary Windows
Liftgate Defogger Grid On the liftgate glass Component Views in Connector End Views
Stationary Windows in Stationary Windows
Right center of liftgate Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Liftgate Release Relay
Component Views Connector End Views
In the center of the IP, to the left of Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Liftgate Release Switch the radio Component Views Connector End Views
Low Coolant Level Engine Controls Engine Controls
Indicator Module Under center of IP Component Views Connector End Views
(Diesel) in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Low Coolant Level In Coolant Reservoir, RH of Engine Engine Controls Engine Controls
Compartment Component Views Connector End Views
Sensor (Diesel)
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Manifold Absolute Engine Controls Engine Controls
Pressure (MAP) On Bulkhead, RH of Steering Column Component Views Connector End Views
Sensor (Diesel) in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Marker Lamps, Roof Across the top front of the roof Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems

Mass Air Flow At Air Intake Duct, near Air Filter, RH of Engine Controls Engine Controls
Component Views Connector End Views
(MAF) Sensor Engine
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Mega Fuse Block In the RF of the vehicle
Component Views Connector End Views
HVAC Component HVAC Connector End
Under the IP, on the left side of the HVAC
Mode Door Motor plenum Views in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
' Park/Turn Lamp, LF At the LF corner of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Park /Turn Lamp, RF At the LF corner of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Automatic Transmission
Park/Neutral Position Electronic Component AT Internal Connector
(PNP) Switch At LH center of Transmission End Views in
Views (Internal)
in Transmissions Transmissions
Entertainment Entertainment Connector
Power Amplifier Under the left of the IP, right of the brake Component Views
pedal bracket End Views in
in Entertainment Entertainment
Entertainment Entertainment Connector
Power Amplifier Relay Under the left of the IP, right of the brake
pedal bracket Component Views End Views in
in Entertainment Entertainment
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Power Outside Outside Left Front Door Component Views
Rearview Mirror, LH Connector End Views
in Doors in Doors
Power Outside Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Rearview Mirror On the LF door, near the center of
the A Pillar Component Views Connector End Views
Motor, LH in Doors in Doors
.Power Outside Drivers Door Panel, below the inside door Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Component Views Connector End Views
Rearview Mirror Switch handle
in Doors in Doors
Power Seat Adjuster In the LF seat, on the bottom, mounted to Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Component Views Connector End Views
Switch LH the frame
in Seats in Seats
Power Seat Adjuster In the RF seat, on the bottom, mounted to Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Component Views Connector End Views
Switch, RH the frame
in Seats in Seats
Power Seat Lumbar Under the left front seat, mounted to the Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Motor, Left Front Component Views Connector End Views
seat frame
in Seats in Seats
Power Seat Lumbar Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Under the right front seat, mounted to the
Motor, Right Front Component Views Connector End Views
seat frame
in Seats in Seats

Power Seat Lumbar Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems

Switch, Left Front On the lower left front of the left front seat Component Views Connector End Views
in Seats in Seats
Power Seat Lumbar On the lower right front of the right Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Switch, Right Front front seat Component Views Connector End Views
in Seats in Seats
Powertrain Control Under RH end of IP, above Blower Motor, Engine Controls
PCM Connector End
Module (PCM) (Diesel) behind IP Compartment Box Component Views
in Engine Controls Views in Engine Controls

Power Window Power Door Systems Power Door Systems

On the left front door, below the inside
Master Switch Component Views Connector End Views
doorhandle
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Power Window Switch, On the left front door trim panel, below the
Left Rear inside door handle Component Views Connector End Views
in Doors in Doors
Power Window Switch, Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
On the right front door trim panel, below
Right Front the inside door handle Component Views Connector End Views
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Power Window Switch, On the right rear door, below the inside
Right Rear door handle Component Views Connector End Views
in Doors in Doors
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Entertainment Entertainment Connector
Radio In the center of the IP Component Views in End Views in
Entertainment Entertainment
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Reading Lamps,
Near the windshield centerline Component Views in Connector End Views in
Overhead Console Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
HVAC Component Views HVAC Connector End
Recirculation Under the IP, on the HVAC plenum in HVAC Systems with Views in HVAC Systems
Door Motor with Manual-A/C
Manual-A/C
Part of the underhood fuse-relay center, in
Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Remote Battery Stud the left rear side of the engine Connector End Views
Component Views
compartment, on the fender
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Remote Control Door Under the IP, inside the right of the right
steering column support bracket Component Views Connector End Views
Lock Receiver
in Doors in Doors
Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Seat Belt Switch, LF Inside the Left Front Seat Belt Buckle Component Views Connector End Views
in Seats in Seats
Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Seat Belt Switch, LR Inside the Left Rear Seat Belt Buckle Component Views Connector End Views
in Seats in Seats
Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Seat Belt Switch, RF Inside the Right Front Seat Belt Buckle Component Views Connector End Views
in Seats in Seats
Power Seat Systems Power Seat Systems
Seat Belt Switch, RR Inside the Right Rear Seat Belt Buckle Component Views Connector End Views
in Seats in Seats
Transfer Case Control
Selectable Four-Wheel Connector End Views
Drive (S4WD) Part of the transfer case selector lever —
Indicator Lamp (Automatic 4WD) in
Transfer Case Controls
Spare Power Source Under the left side of the IP, on the Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
(Convenience Center) bulkhead Component Views Connector End Views
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Spotlamp Relay Behind the IP, near the convenience Connector End Views
center Component Views in
(Z56) in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Spotlamp (Z56), Mounted in the left side A pillar, near the Connector End Views
Component Views
Left Side windshield in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Spotlamp (Z56), Mounted in the right side A pillar, near the Connector End Views
Right Side Component Views
windshield in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Engine Electrical Engine Electrical
Starter Motor Lower RR of Engine Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Electrical in Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical Engine Electrical
Starter Motor Solenoid On Starter Motor Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Electrical in Engine Electrical

In Underhood Fuse-Relay Center, LR of Engine Electrical Engine Electrical

Starter Relay Component Views Connector End Views
Engine Compartment, on Fender
in Engine Electrical in Engine Electrical
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Stoplamp Switch On the top of the brake pedal Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Sunshade Mirror Lamp, Part of the left side sunvisor Component Views Connector End Views
Left Side in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Sunshade Mirror Lamp, Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Part of the right side sunvisor Component Views Connector End Views
Right Side
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Tail/Stop Turn Lamp Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
(Cab Chassis), On the left rear corner of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
Left Rear in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Tail/Stop Turn Lamp Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
(Pickup/Utility), On the right rear corner of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
Left Rear in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Tail/Stop Turn Lamp Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
(Cab Chassis), On the right rear corner of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
Right Rear in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Tail/Stop Turn Lamp Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
(Pickup/Utility), On the left rear corner of the vehicle Component Views Connector End Views
Right Rear in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Temperature Under the IP, on the center of the HVAC HVAC Component HVAC Connector End
Door Motor plenum Views in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Module (TCCM) Under IP, near the convenience center Connector End Views
— (Automatic 4WD) in
(Selectable 4WD)
Transfer Case Controls
Transfer Case Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Mode Selector In Transfer Case Select Switch Component Views in Connector End Views
Illumination Lamp Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Transfer Case Control
Transfer Case Relay RR of Engine Compartment, near center of Connector End Views
Bulkhead — (Automatic 4WD) in
Transfer Case Controls
Transfer Case Control
Transfer Case Center of IP, RH of Steering Column Connector End Views
Select Switch Shift Lever — (Automatic 4WD) in
Transfer Case Controls
Transfer Case Shift
Control Module, Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Under LH of IP, near Convenience Center Component Views in Connector End Views in
Connector C1
(Auto 4WD) Transfer Case Controls Transfer Case Controls

Transfer Case Shift

Control Module, Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Connector C2 Under LH of IP, near Convenience Center Component Views in Connector End Views in
(Auto 4WD) Transfer Case Controls Transfer Case Controls

Part of the multifunction switch, on the Lighting Systems Lighting Systems

Turn/Hazard Switch Component Views Connector End Views
upper left side of the steering column
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
In the left rear side of the engine Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Underhood Fuse Block
compartment on the fender Component Views Connector End Views
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Underhood Lamp Under the right side of the hood Component Views Connector End Views
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems

Vehicle Control Module Engine Controls VCM Connector End

(VCM) (Gas) Engine Compartment, near EBCM ■ Component Views Views in Engine Controls
in Engine Controls

Water-in-Fue! Sensor Engine Controls Engine Controls

(Diesel) Top near of Engine Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls

Water Valve (4-Door In the engine compartment, right rear of HVAC Component HVAC Connector End
Utility/Suburban) the inner fender Views in HVAC Systems Views in HVAC Systems
with Manual-A/C with Manual-A/C
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End Ymw
Window Defogger
Stationary Windows Stationary Windows
On the rear window Component Views in Connector End Views in
Grid, Rear Stationary Windows Stationary Windows
On the left front door, below the inside Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Window Lockout door handle, part of the power window Component Views Connector End Views
Switch, Rear
master switch in Doors in Doors
WiperAA/asher System WiperAA/asher System
Window Washer Pump In the washer reservoir, right front of the Component Views in
Motor, Rear vehicle, behind the support Connector End Views in
Wiper/Washer Systems WiperAA/asher Systems
WiperAA/asher System WiperAA/asher System
Window Wiper Motor
On the lower liftgate glass Component Views in Connector End Views in
Module, Rear Wiper/Washer Systems WiperAA/asher Systems
WiperAA/asher System WiperAA/asher System
Windshield Washer At the washer reservoir, left rear of the Component Views in
radiator support bracket Connector End Views in
Pump Motor, Front WiperAA/asher Systems WiperAA/asher Systems
WiperAA/asher System WiperAA/asher System
Window Wiper/Washer
Center of the IP, right of the radio Component Views in Connector End Views in
Switch, Rear Wiper/Washer Systems WiperAA/asher Systems
WiperAA/asher System WiperAA/asher System
Windshield Wiper Motor At the center and rear of the engine Component Views in
compartment, at the bulkhead Connector End Views in
Module, Front WiperAA/asher Systems WiperAA/asher Systems
WiperAA/asher System WiperAA/asher System
Windshield At the steering column, part of the
WiperA/Vasher Switch multifunction lever Component Views in Connector End Views in
WiperAA/asher Systems Wiper/Washer Systems
Part of the engine harness to IP harness,
C100 in the left rear side of the engine Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
compartment, at the bulkhead End Views
Part of the engine harness to fuel pump
motor, in the left rear side of the engine Inline Harness Connector
C103 Harness Routing Views
compartment, under the brake master End Views
cylinder
C105 Part of the engine hamess to fuel Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
(7.4L) injectors, at the rear of the intake manifold End Views
Part of engine harness to oxygen sensors
Inline Harness Connector
C107 harness, on the left front of the Harness Routing Views
transmission End Views
Part of the auxiliary power center harness
C109 to fused battery harness, in the left side of Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
the engine compartment, near C100 End Views
IP harness to FWA lamps harness, LR of Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C110 engine compartment, near C102 ' End Views
C112 Part of the engine harness to engine Inline Hamess Connector
(Diesel) sensors, center rear of the engine Harness Routing Views
End Views
In the left rear of the vehicle, near the core Inline Harness Connector
C116
support Harness Routing Views
End Views
Part of the engine harness to front axle
actuator, in the rear of the engine, near Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C120
the transmission End Views
C122
On the right side of the transmission Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
(M30) End Views
G122 Inline Harness Connector
On the left side of the transmission Harness Routing Views
(MT1) End Views
IP harness, Inline to Active Transfer Case Inline Harness Connector
C131
Control harness Harness Routing Views
End Views
Behind the right side of the IP, near the Inline Harness Connector
C200
heater motor, in foam wrap Harness Routing Views
End Views
Behind the right side of the IP, near the Inline Harness Connector
C203
heater motor, in foam wrap Harness Routing Views
End Views
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
At the convenience center Hamess Routing Views Inline Hamess Connector
C205
End Views
Inside the lower left side A pillar Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C206 End Views
Inside the lower left side A pillar Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C207
End Views
Inside the lower left side A pillar Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C208
End Views
Inside the lower left side A pillar Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C209
End Views
C210 At the convenience center Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
End Views
Under the left front seat Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C21.1 End Views
Under the left front seat Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C212
End Views
Inside the lower right side A pillar Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C213
End Views
Inside the lower right side A pillar Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C215
End Views
Inside the lower right side A pillar Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C216
End Views
0227
IP harness, Inline to the Stoplamp Switch Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
(Stoplamp Switch) End Views
Part of the crossbody harness to the right
front seat belt switch, under the right Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C228
front seat End Views
Part of the crossbody harness to the right Inline Harness Connector
C229 front power seat, under the right front seat Hamess Routing Views
End Views
Behind the right side of the IP, above the Inline Harness Connector
C230 HVAC evaporator housing Hamess Routing Views
End Views
Part of the IP harness to SIR harness, Inline Harness Connector
C232 Hamess Routing Views
behind the right side of the IP End Views
Part of the auxiliary power center harness
to fused battery harness, on the left side of Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C235
the IP, near P100 End Views
In the left front seat harness, approx. Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C236 30 cm (12 in) End Views
In the right front seat harness, approx. Inline Harness Connector
C237 Hamess Routing Views
30 cm (12 in) End Views
Inline to roof harness Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C238 (Z56)
End Views
Behind RH of l/P, near heater motor Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C239
End Views
Inline to Right Hand Power Seat harness Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C240
End Views
Part of the crossbody harness Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C243
End Views
IP harness to Auxiliary Fuse Panel
harness, breaks out from the Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C245 (Z56)
EVO/Passlock breakout End Views
Part of the IP harness to steering column
hamess, to the left side of the steering Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
C266
column, near the bulkhead End Views

In the Right Front Seat harness Inline Harness Connector

C267 Hamess Routing Views
End Views
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
C271 IP harness to Roof Lamp & Mirror harness Harness Routing Views Inline Hamess Connector
End Views
C272 (Z56 Police Inline to spotlamps Hamess Routing Views Inline Hamess Connector
Package) End Views
0280 At the convenience center Hamess Routing Views Inline Hamess Connector
End Views
0298 Behind the left side of the IP, near the Hamess Routing Views Inline Hamess Connector
convenience center End Views
Behind RH of IP, above HVAC evaporator, Hamess Routing Views Inline Hamess Connector
0299 housing End Views
Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
0300 In the overhead console
End Views
Harness Routing Views Inline Hamess Connector
0301 At the left front kick panel End Views
0302 At the LF kick panel Hamess Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
End Views

0307 Front to Rear harness, Inline to the Inline Harness Connector

Harness Routing Views
Overhead Console harness End Views
RH heated seat harness to Crossbody Inline Harness Connector
0310 Harness Routing Views
harness End Views

0311 LH heated seat harness to Crossbody Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
harness End Views
At the right rear of the vehicle, above the Inline Harness Connector
0400 auxiliary blower motor Harness Routing Views
End Views
At the right rear of the vehicle, above the Inline Harness Connector
0401 auxiliary blower motor Harness Routing Views End Views

0402 At the top, center rear of the vehicle Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views End Views
0404 Inside the endgate near the liftgate Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
release motor End Views

0405 Top of the right side D pillar Harness Routing Views Inline Harness Connector
End Views
Inline Harness Connector
0406 Top of the right side D pillar Harness Routing Views
End Views
0407 Inline Harness Connector
(Pickup) Below the left rear edge of the bed Harness Routing Views End Views
0407 Inline Harness Connector
Lower center outside of the endgate Harness Routing Views
(Suburban/Utility) End Views
0408 Inline Harness Connector
Below the center rear edge of the bed Harness Routing Views
(Pickup/Cab) End Views
0411 Crossbody harness, Inline to Rear Cargo Inline Harness Connector
(Pickup) Lamp harness Harness Routing Views End Views
Inline Harness Connector
0496 In the right side B pillar Harness Routing Views End Views
Inline Harness Connector
0498 In the left side B pillar Harness Routing Views End Views
D104 Part of the engine harness, approximately
(4.3L, 5.0L, 5.7L) 20 cm (8 in) from the A/C compressor — ■ —
clutch connector
D104 Part of the engine harness, approximately
28 cm (11 in) from the A/C compressor — —
(6.5L) clutch connector

D104 Part of the engine harness, approximately

17 cm (6.5 in) from the A/C compressor .— —
(7.4L)
clutch connector
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Part of the IP harness, at the right side of ■
D203 the steering column support
_ —
On the sheet metal at the right front Power and Grounding
G101 —
wheelhousing Component Views
G102 Power and Grounding ■
On the left front side of the intake manifold C o m p o n e n t Views
— .
(Diesel)
G103 On the right front side of the engine, near Power and Grounding
(Gas) the thermostat housing Component Views
G104 Power and Grounding
(5.0L/5.7L) Backside of the right cylinder head Component Views
G104 Power and Grounding
Top rear of the right cylinder head Component Views —-
(6.5L)
G104 Backside of the engine block, below the Power and Grounding
(7.4L) right cylinder head Component Views —
G105 Power and Grounding
On the right front side of the engine block —
(Gas) Component Views
G105 Right Rear of the cylinder head, Power and Grounding
(Diesel) cylinder #7 intake bolt C o m p o n e n t Views
—
P o w e r and Grounding
G108 Top Center of the bulkhead Component Views ..
In the right rear of the engine Power and Grounding
G110 . compartment, below the heater lines C o m p o n e n t Views
—
Power and Grounding
G111 On the right rear side of the engine —
C o m p o n e n t Views
On the radiator support, near the left side P o w e r and Grounding
G113 headlamp C o m p o n e n t Views
—
G115 At the AIR pump ground, mounted on the Power and Grounding
(NC1) frame rail Component Views —
Behind the left side of the IP, below the Power and Grounding
G200 —
fuse block, on the tie bar Component Views
Behind the left side of the IP, below the Power and Grounding
G201 —
fuse block, on the tie bar Component Views
G202
On the right side of the instrument panel, Power and Grounding
mounted to the HVAC plenum bracket Component Views —
G300 Power and Grounding
Halfway up the right side of the C pillar —
(Extended/Crew Cab) Component Views
G400 On the right side B pillar, near the door Power and Grounding
(Utility/Suburban) striker Component Views —
At the rear of the left side frame rail, Power and Grounding
G401
behind the bumper Component Views —

G404
Inside the left side frame rail, near the rear Power and Grounding
crossmember Component Views —
In the left rear side of the engine
P100 compartment, at the bulkhead, Harness Routing Views —
above C100
In the right rear side of the engine
P101 Harness Routing Views —
compartment, at the bulkhead
On the top rear of the body, at the right
P400
side liftgate hinge Harness Routing Views —
P500 At the left front door Harness Routing Views —
P600 At the right front door Harness Routing Views —
Engine harness approx. 12 cm (5.5 in)
S101 from EBCM harness breakout, in the
(Gas) Underhood Fuse Relay Center harness — ■—
breakout
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Engine harness approx. 6.5 cm (2.5 in)
S101 from EBCM harness breakout into the — —
(Diesel) PCM harness
Engine harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S103
EGR valve breakout, toward taillamp —■ —
(5.0L, 5.7L)
harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 12 cm (4.7 in)
S103 '
from starter solenoid breakout, towards the 9 — _
(6.5L) Underhood Lamp harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S103
the EGR Valve harness breakout, towards ' — —
(7.4L--A/T) the Ignition Coil harness breakout
Engine Harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in)
S103
from the Fuel Injector harness breakout, — —
(7.4L - M/T)
towards the Taillamp harness breakout
S104 Engine Harness, approx. 12 cm (4.7 in)
— —
(5.0L - A/T, 5.7L - M/T) into the fuel Injector breakout
S104 Engine harness, approx. 30 cm (11.8 in) —
from EBCM breakout, towards C200 ■ — . ..
(7.4L)
Engine harness, approx. 20 cm (8 in) from
S107
EGR valve breakout, toward taillamp — —
(4.3L, 5.0L, 5.7L)
harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 40 cm (15 in)
S107 from EBCM breakout, toward Transmission : — —
(6.5L, HD)
harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 18 cm (7 in) from
S107 . __
EBCM breakout, toward tthe EGR harness ' —
(7.4L)
breakout
Engine harness, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in)
S108 from ignition coil breakout, toward starter — — '■
(Gas) solenoid
Engine harness, approx. 6 cm (2.5 in) from
S108 Transmission harness breakout, towards
(Diesel) —
the PCM
S110 Engine harness, approx. 23 cm (9 in) from
(5.0L, 5.7L) EBCM breakout, toward taillamp harness
— —
Engine harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
S110
the EBCM breakout, towards the Taillamp — —
(6.5L) harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 26 cm (10 in)
S110 from EBCM breakout, near taillamp . — : — _
(7.4L-A/T)
harness breakout
Engine jumper harness, approx. 9 cm
S112 ■ __
(3.5 in) from oil pressure sensor breakout, —
(6.5L) towards C112
Engine harness, approx. 19 cm (7.5 in)
S113 from EBCM breakout, into the Underhood — _
Fuse Relay Center harness
S115 Engine jumper harness, approx. 5 cm — — .
(6.5L) (2 in) from oil pressure sensor breakout
Forward lamps harness, approx. 23 cm
S123 (9 in) from LH park lamp breakout, toward —
windshield washer pump
Forward lamps harness, approx. 5 cm
S128 (2 in) from RH headlamp breakout, —
toward G112
Engine jumper harness, approx. 43 cm — —
S129 (17 in) from oil pressure sensor breakout
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Nam© Location Locator View Connector End View
Engine harness, approx. 22 cm (8.5 in)
S146 into the Underhood Fuse Relay Center —
(7.4L) —
harness
Engine harness, approx. 5 cm (2 in) from
S147 EGR valve breakout, toward taillamp —
(Gas) harness breakout
S147 Engine harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
(Diesel) starter motor solenoid breakout — — ■
Oxygen Sensor Harness, approx. 7 cm
S148 (2.5 in) from RH bank oxygen sensor — . —
(w/LeadedFuel) breakout, toward engine harness
S148 Approx. 19 cm (7.5 in) into oxygen sensor — —
(w/o Leaded Fuel) harness
Oxygen sensor harness, approx. 7 cm
S149 (2.5 in) from RH bank oxygen sensor —
(w/o Leaded Fuel) breakout, toward LH bank oxygen sensor
Engine Harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in) —
S151 inside EBCM harness breakout
S154 Left Bank Fuel Injector harness —' —
(7-4L)
SI 55 Right Bank Fuel Injector harness
(7.4L) — —
S156 (4.3L, 5.0L - M/T, Engine harness, approx. 16 cm (6 in) from
5.7L - M/T, 7.4L - M/T) VSS connector ■;— —:
S156 Engine harness, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in) . _
(5.0L, 5.7L - A/T, HD) from VSS connector —
S156 Engine harness, approx. 20 cm (8 in) from
(5.0L, 5.7L - A/T, LD) VSS connector — —
S156 Engine harness, approx. 13 cm (5 in) from
(7.4L - A/T) VSS connector — —
S158 In washer pump jumper hamess — —
Engine harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S161 EGR valve breakout, toward fuel injector — —
harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 17 cm (6.5 in)
S162
from starter solenoid breakout, toward LH —~ ■ —
(4.3L, 5.0L, 5.7L ) oxygen sensor breakout
S162 Engine harness, approx. 15 cm (6 in) from
RH bank oxygen sensor breakout, toward '— —
(7.4L)
starter solenoid breakout
S167 (All Except Z56, Engine harness, approx. 18 cm (7 in)
Police Package) from G115 — —
S167 (Z56 Police Battery harness, approx. 35 cm (13.5 in)
Package Only) from C121 — —
S168 (Z56, Police Battery harness, approx. 25 cm (10 in)
Package Only) from C121 —
S185 At Diode D104 — —
S186 At Diode D104 — —
4WD Indicator harness, approx.
Si 92 10 cm (4 in) from the ABS harness — ■ —-
breakout, towards the Front-Axle Acuator
IP harness, approx. 10 cm (4 in) from
S200 steering column harness breakout — —
IP hamess, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S201 steering column hamess breakout, toward — —
the Steering Column
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connecter End View
S204
IP harness, approx. 10 cm (4 in) from
C100, towards Data Link Connector (DLC) — ;—
IP hamess, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in) from —
S205 steering column harness breakout
. . - ■ -—
IP harness, approx. 6 cm (2.5 in) from
S206 steering column harness breakout, toward ■—
the Steering Column
IP hamess, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in) from
S207 steering column harness breakout, toward — — ''
the Steering Column
IP harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S212
inflatable restraint switch breakout —
IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
S213 steering column harness breakout, towards ’ — . . — "
the DLC
IP harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S21.5 instrument cluster breakout, toward radio — . . . —
connectors breakout
IP harness, approx. 16 cm (6 in) from
S217 instrument cluster harness breakout, —
toward radio connectors breakout
IP harness, approx. 16 cm (6 in) from
S218 inflatable restraint switch breakout — • —

Crossbody harness, approx. 25 cm (10 in)

S233 from LH Power Seat hamess breakout
IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
S235 — — '
steering column harness breakout, C100
IP harness, approx. 10 cm (4 in) into
S236 steering column harness towards the "— ' — -

Steering Column
S237 RF seat harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in)
from power seat lumbar switch breakout ■ ■ — —
Crossbody harness, approx. 26 cm (10 in)
S238 —
into the LH Seat harness breakout
IP harness, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in) from
S242 inflatable restraint switch breakout, — — ■ ■
towards the Auxiliary Power Connectors
HVAC Harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
S243 recirculation door breakout, toward blower — — ■
motor relay
HVAC Harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S244 recirculation door breakout, toward high —
blower motor relay
Crossbody harness, approx. 35 cm (13 in)
S248 before the LF door harness breakout, —
from C301
Crossbody harness, approx. 13 cm (5 in)
S251 from LF Door harness breakout, toward IP — : . — . ..
harness breakout
S254
Crossbody harness, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in)
from C2T0 breakout, toward power —
(Suburban/Utility) amplifier breakout
Crossbody Harness, approx. 20 cm (8 in)
S255 from C210 breakout, toward the LH Seat — —
harness breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in)
S256
(Pickup/Extended Cab) from C210 breakout, toward LH Seat — ■
harness breakout
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name L ocation Locator View Connector End View
Crossbody harness, approx. 11 cm (4 in)
S256 from C210 breakout, toward the LH Seat
(Utility/ Suburban) — —
harness breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 1 cm (0.5 in)
S256 before door lock relay breakout, toward the —- '
(Crew Cab) —
LH Seat harness breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in)
S259 into seat belt switch harness, toward C212 — —

IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from

S264 instrument cluster breakout, toward radio — —
connectors breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in)
S266 (Utility/Pickup/ from C210 breakout, toward the LH Seat
Extended Cab) — —
harness breakout
IP harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in) into the
S268 HVAC Control Switch harness breakout — —

IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from

S272 — —
auxiliary power outlet breakout
Crossbody harness approx. 70 cm
S281 ■ (24.5 in) from RH heated seat breakout ■—

Spotlamp Extension harness, approx.

S283 35 cm (13.5 in) from C272 harness
(Z56) — —
breakout, towards the RH Spotlight
S288 Auxiliary Power harness
(9L4) — —

S289 Auxiliary Power harness —

(9L4) —

IP harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) before the

S290 radio harness breakout, from C304 — —

S292 IP harness, approx. 22 cm (8.5 in) before

the radio harness breakout, from C304 — —

IP harness, approx. 24 cm (9.5 in) from

S298 instrument cluster breakout, toward radio — —
breakout
IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) into the
S299 steering column harness breakout, — —
toward C266
S300 (w/Bench Seat) Lumbar Seat harness — —
Selectable 4WD harness, approx.
S302 10 cm (4 in) from the Tranfer Case Relay — —
breakout, toward the Front Axle Switch
Power lumbar seat jumper, approx. 20 cm
S303 (8 in) from RH power seat breakout, — —
toward C299
Rear HVAC control harness, approx.
S304 (4-Door 31 cm (12 in) from auxiliary HVAC control
Utility/Suburban) logic module breakout, toward front — —
auxiliary HVAC control module
Rear HVAC control harness, approx.
S307 (4-Door 10 cm (4 in) from auxiliary HVAC control
Utility/Suburban) logic module breakout, toward front — —
auxiliary HVAC control module
Rear HVAC control harness, approx. 5 cm
S308 (4-Door (2 in) from auxiliary HVAC control logic
Utility/Suburban) module breakout, toward rear auxiliary — —
HVAC control module
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Illuminated Vanity mirror jumper harness,
approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from inside rearview —
S312 —
mirror breakout, toward LH Illuminated
vanity mirror
Taillamp extension harness, approx. 40 cm
S315 (15 in) from fuel pump balance module —
breakout, toward engine harness
Illuminated vanity mirror jumper harness,
S316 approx. 8 cm (3 in) toward LH illuminated — —
vanity mirror
Taillamp extension harness, approx. 10 cm
S317 (4 in) from fuel pump and sender breakout, —
toward engine hamess
Taillamp extension harness, approx. 10 cm
S318 (4 in) from fuel pump balance module — —
breakout, toward engine harness
Taillamp extension harness, approx.
S319 7 cm (2.5 in) from fuel pump and sender
— —
(Gas) breakout, toward balance fuel pump
balance module breakout
Taillamp extension harness, approx. 10 cm
S324 (4 in) from G404 breakout, toward engine — —
harness
Floor console harness apprdx. 13 cm (5 in)
S330 — —
from LH heated seat switch breakout
Floor console harness approx. 22 cm
S331 (8.5 in) from LH heated seat switch — —
breakout
Floor console harness approx 28 cm
S332 (11 in) from LH heated seat switch — —
breakout
Floor console harness approx. 5 cm (2 in)
S335 from C304 harness breakout, towards — —
the BCM
Floor console harness approx. 5 cm (2 in)
S336 from cross body incline connector hamess — —
breakout
S337 LH rear heated 150 — —
S358 — — —
Auxiliary A/C harness, approx. 17 cm
S400 —
(6.5 in) from blower motor Relays, toward —
(w/Auxiliary A/C)
blower motor
Auxiliary A/C harness, approx. 40 cm
S401
(15 in) from blower motor relays, toward — —
(w/Auxiliary A/C)
blower motor
Auxiliary HVAC harness, approx. 13 cm
S401 (5 in) from blower motor relays breakout, — —
(w/Auxiliary HVAC)
toward blower motor
Auxiliary HVAC harness, approx. 7 cm
S403 (2.5 in) from blower motor resistor — —
(w/Auxiliary HVAC)
breakout, toward blower motor
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 37 cm
S410 (14.5 in) from RR doorjamb switch
— —
(2-door Utility) breakout, toward RH door speaker
breakout
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 12 cm
S410 (4-Door
(4.5 in) from RR door speaker breakout, — —
Utility/Suburban)
toward RR door jamb breakout
 Power and Grounding Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Taillamp harness, approx. 33 cm (13 in)
S411 from taillamp extension harness breakout,
towards the RH Tail & Stoplamp — —
(Chassis Cab)
Connector
Taillamp harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in)
S411
from taillamp extension harness breakout, — —
(Fleetside) toward LH taillamp
Taillamp harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in)
S411 (Suburban/
from tailamp trailer tow harness breakout, — —
Utility/Stepside) toward RH taillamp
License lamps harness, approx. 4 cm
S416 (1.5 in) from taillamp harness breakout, —
toward RH license lamp
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 13 cm
S419 (5 in) from CHMSL breakout — —
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 13 cm
S424 (5 in) from CHMSL breakout — —
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 13 cm
S426 (Utility/Surburban
(5 in) from front dome lamp breakout, '— —
w/o C36/C69) toward rear dome lamp breakout
S426 (Pickup/Extended
Dome lamp harness, approx. 13 cm (5 in)
Cab w/Overhead from CHMSL breakout, toward C411 — —
Console)
Dome Lamp harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in)
S426 from Front Dome Lamp harness breakout,
(CrewCab) — —
toward C301
S426 (4-Door Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 62 cm
Utility/Suburban (24.5 in) from rear dome lamp breakout, — —
W/ZW9/C69 & C36) toward front dome lamp breakout
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 7 cm
S434 (2-Door Utility) (2.5 in) from front dome lamp breakout, '— —
toward crossbody harness breakout
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 20 cm
S434 (4-Door (8 in) before the Rear Dome Lamp
Utility/Suburban) harness breakout, towards the HVAC — —
Module
S434 (4-Door Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 25 cm
Utility/Suburban (10 in) into crossbody harness breakout, - — —
w/o C69 towards C301
In the Overhead Console harness,
S443 between the Garage Door Opener and —- —
Reading Lamps
Inside LF door harness, approx. 8 cm
S500 (3 in) from tweeter speaker breakout, — —
toward LF window regulator
Inside LF door harness, at breakout to
S501 window motor regulator — —
Body and Accessories__________ _______________
Power and Grounding Component Views
Auxiliary Power Outlet Rear

Legend
(1) Front to Rear Harness (3) Auxiliary Power Outlet, Rear
(2) Auxiliary Power, Rear Connector
 Underhood Lamp

Legend
(1) Underhood Lamp (4) Engine Harness
(2) G108 (5) P101
(3) Underhood Lamp Connector
Ground G113

405727
 405724

Legend
(1) G401 (4) Tail/Stop Lamp Connector, LH
(2) Auxiliary Fuel Tank (Dual Tanks Only) (5) Tail/Stop Lamp Assembly, LH
(3) Tail/Stop Lamp Harness
 Taillamp Harness (w/Trailier Harness, Except Cab Chassis)

Legend
(1) Ground Harness (8) Tail/Stop Lamp Harness
(2) G401 (9) C409
(3) Tail/Stop Lamp Harness (10) License Plate Lamp Harness
(4) Tail/Stop Lamp Connector, RH (11) C407
(5) License Plate Lamp Harness (12) License Plate Lamp, LH
(6) Rear Extension Lamp Harness (13) Tail/Stop Lamp Connector, LH
(7) License Plate Lamp, RH
 Grounds G104 and G105 (Diesel)

Legend

(1) G105 (3) Ground Strap

(2) G104 (4) Engine Harness
 Engine Harness, Right Rear (5.0L/5.7L)

Legend
(1) Transmission Filler Tube (5) Engine Harness
(2) Engine Manifold, RH (6) G110
(3) C107 (7) Ground Strap
(4) 4WD Harness (8) G104
8-340 Wiring Systems ____ _ Body and Accessories
Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Pump, G115 (L31)

276736
 Engine Harness, Front (7.4L)

461193

Legend
(1) G104 (6) Generator
(2) A/C Low Pressure Cutout Switch (7) Manifold Air Pressure Sensor
(3) A/C Compressor Clutch (8) Throttle Position Sensor
(4) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (9) Intake Air Temperature Sensor
(5) G103 (10) Engine Harness
 Mega Fuse

461185

Legend
(1) Fan Shroud (4) Heater Hose
(2) Battery, RH (5) Generator Harness
(3) Engine Harness (6) Mega Fuse
Ground G105 (Gas)
 Underhood Fuse Block

374115

Legend
(1) Battery Cable (4) EBCM
(2) Underhood Fuse Block (5) Remote Battery Stud
(3) Engine Harness
 Fuse A and Fuse B (Police Package)

Legend
(1) Fuse A (4) Positive Battery Cable
(2) Fuse B (5) Battery Cable Harness
(3) Negative Battery Cable
 IP Harness, Left Rear View

376140

Legend
(1) Headlamp and Panel Dimmer Switch (6) G201
(2) Door Jamb Switch, LH (7) C100
(3) IP Fuse Block (8) DRL Module
(4) Courtesy Lamp, LH (9) C227
(5) G200 (10) IP C luster Connector
 Ground G103 (Gas, Except 7.4L)

405860

(1) EGR Valve Electrica l Harness (2) G103

 Grounds G101, G102, and G103 (Diesel)

405858

Legend
(1) G101 (3) G103
(2) G102
 HVAC Hamess, Bulkhead, Right Side

Legend
(1) Crossbody Harness (4) Right Door Harness Connectors
(2) G202 (5) HVAC Plenum
(3) C299 (6) Crossbody Hamess
 372228

Legend

(1) CHMSL Connector (10) C406 (Cargo Doors)

(2) C402 (11) Door Lock Switch Connector, Rear
(3) C303 (12) Door Lock Actuator Connector, Rear
(4) Speaker Connector, LR (13) G400
(5) Front to Rear Body Harness (14) Auxiliary Power Connector, Rear
(6) C314 (Liftgate) (15) Door Jamb Switch Connector, Rear (Liftgate)
(7) C405 (Cargo Doors) (16) C406 (Cargo Doors)
(8) C406 (Liftgate) (17) Door Jamb Switch Connector, RR
0) Speaker Connector, RR (Cargo Doors)
 Fuel Pump and Sender (Single Tank)

Legend
(1) G404 (5) G404
(2) Fuel Tank (6) Fuel Pump and Sender connector (Diesel)
(3) Fuel Tank Sender connector (7) Rear Lamp Extension Harness
(4) Fuel Pump connector (8) Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly
Power and Grounding Connector Convenience Center
End Views
f *
Auxiliary Power Outlet, Rear M M N il k*I
M M IM! 4 .
/
IJ E 01 M
h is
------- LJi EQ L□GO p
1
I— 1 l 0 j
I■■ |3] 1 P1 n
m i I- -i? =5
EEI e i

I E] [3
c D mm | I 1i i
3
I Ji
: IC EH 5 b 0i 1
IS S3

nn Connector Part
• 12146452
257957

Information • Convenience Center

320518 PRTD (GRY)
Circuit
• 12176446 Pin Wire Color No. Function
Connector Part
Information • 3F M/P 280 FLXLK
Series (BLK) A RED Fuse Output - Battery -
542 Type II Fuse
Circuit Fuse Output - Ignition 3
Pin Wire Color No. Function B BRN 341
Type III Fuse
Fuse Output - Battery - C1-C8 — — Not Used
A ORN 840 Type III Fuse
Vehicle Speed Signal -
B — — Not Used C9 DKGRN 389 4000 Pulses Per Mile
C BLK 150 Ground 4SWD Front Wheel-lock
D1 BLK/WHT 1695
Telltale - Feed
Auxiliary Power, Rear Console Connector D2 ORN Fuse Output - Battery -
640 Type III Fuse
Fuse Output - Battery -
D3 ORN 540 Type III Fuse
Fuse Output -
D4 YEL 343 Accessory -
Type III Fuse
BLK Liftgate Release Switch
D5 1576 Output
Fuse Output - Battery -
D6 BLK 28
Type III Fuse
D7
— — Not Used
- D8
PPL Rear Defogger
D9 293 Element Feed.
Auxiliary HVAC Switch
E1 DKBLU 1926 Output-Low
Connector Part • 12047699
Information • 2F (GRY) Auxiliary HVAC Switch
" E2 REd 1925 Output-Medium
Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Auxiliary HVAC Switch
E3 WHT 1924
Output-High
Fuse Output - Battery
ORN 840 Type III Fuse Windshield Wiper
E4 LT BLU 97 Switch Signal-
BLK 150 Ground Mist/Off/Low
8-354 Wiring Systems ____ ______________ ______ Body and Accessories
Convenience Center (cont’d) Convenience Center (cont’d)
( >u ■
1Ml stl Twin®II HI
i-dbs II *1 M N ii *11
/ /
rJ m !i 1 m JH Ii 1 111
i mm (
1 E9H
m g□EH i 0 □ urn
i1 l
J H m fl j j
19 c: S3EH Q m . ■11
M m -i L?i Hi n s i ==^
EE]EH m 1 1 Ena f
mm 1 M
■' l
1 I i H
I
K H I 1
I 1 i 1
I 0® M 2 (i h 1 13 3
00 ^ 9

257957 257957

• 12146452 • 12146452
Connector Part Connector Part
Information • Convenience Center Information • Convenience Center
PRTD (GRY) PRTD (GRY)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color No. Function
GRA 391 Rear Window Wiper Key Reminder Switch
E5 Switch Output J3 LT GRN 80
Signal
Rear Window Wiper
E6 DKGRN 392 J4 — — ■ Not Used
Pump Motor-Feed
F1 BLK 150 Ground K1 BLK/WHT 238 Seat Belt Switch Signal
Fuse Ouput- K2 BLK 150 Ground
F2 ORN 40 Battery-Type III Fuse Seat Belt Indicator
K3 YEL 234
Fuse Output- Lamp Output
F3 BRN 241
Ignition 3-Type III Fuse Fuse Output - Ignition -
K4 PNK 39
F5 GRA 8 Instrument Lamp Feed Type II Fuse
F6 WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch
Output
F7-F11 _ — Not Used
Cigar Lighter Connector
G1-G3 — — Not Used
G4 PNK Fuse Ouput - Ignition 1 -
39
Type III Fuse
Headlamp
G5 PPL 359 Feed-Daytime
Running Lamps
G6 YEL 634 Daytime Running Lamp
Diode Feed
G8 BLK 150 Ground
H1-H3 — — Not Used
H4 TAN 12 Low Beam
Headlamp Feed
LT GRN/ Daytime Running Lamp
H5 BLK 592
Relay Output-Coil
Turn/Hazard Module Connector Part 12047699
H7 PPL 1697 Information 2F (GRY)
Output
Turn/Hazard Module Circuit
H8 GRA 1696 Pin Wire Color No. Function
Feed-Secondary
Turn/Hazard ORN Fuse Output - Battery ■
H9 LT BLU 1508 840
Module Feed Type III Fuse
J1 GRA Instrument Panel BLK 150 Ground
8 Lamp Feed
J2 ORN 140 Fuse Ouput-
Battery-Type III Fuse
Body and Accessories_______ Wiring Systems 8-355
IP Fuse Block, Front View

291946
 Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuse/Circuit Breaker Rating Description
Audio Alarm Module, Center High-Mounted Stoplamp, Flasher, Hazard
STOP/HAZ Fuse #1 20A
Lamps, Stoplamps, TCC/Stoplamp Switch
T CASE Fuse #2 20A Electric Transfer Case Feed/ATC
Cargo Lamp, Courtesy Lamps, Dome/Reading Lamps, IP Compartment
CTYS Fuse #3 20A
Lamp, Power Mirrors, Vanity Mirrors
Audio Alarm Module, DRL Module and Relay, EVO/Passlock™ Module,
GAUGES Fuse #4 10A Headlamps Switch, IP Cluster, I/S Mirror, Low Coolant Module, Remote
Control Door Lock Receiver, Transfer Case Control Module
RR HVAC Fuse #5 10A RR HVAC Controls (Suburban and Utility)
CRUISE Fuse #6 10A Cruise Control Module and Switch
AUX PWR Fuse #7 25A Auxiliary Power Outlets, DLC
CRANK Fuse #8 10A Diesel Fuel Pump, Inflatable Restraint Control Module, PCM/VCM
Ashtray Lamp, Door Switch Illumination, Fender Lamps, Fog Lamp
20A
Relay, Front Side Markers, Headlamps Switch Illumination, License
PARK LPS Fuse #9
Lamp, Panel Lamps, Park Lamp, Roof Marker, Taillamp, Tailgate Lamp,
Trailer Taillamps

10A
Inflatable Restraint Control Module (SIR), Inflatable Restraint IP Module
AIR BAG Fuse #10
Enable Switch
WIPER Fuse #11 25A Washer Pump, Wiper Motor
A/C Compressor; HVAC Indicator Lamp; L, M1, M2 Blower;
HTR-A/C Fuse #12 25A
MODE/TEMP/AIR in ACT

CIG LTR Fuse #13 20A Cigar Lighter, Door Lock Switch and Relay, Power Amplifier, Power
Lumbar Seat, Rear Liftgate

10A
Audio Alarm Module, Cluster, HVAC Controls, IP Switches, Radio
ILLUM Fuse #14
Illumination, RR HVAC Controls, S4WD
DRL/FOG Fuse #15 20A DRL Relay, Fog Lamps

20A
Back-up Lamps, Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Solenoid, Front
TURN-B/U Fuse #16
Turn Lamps, Right Rear Turn Lamps, Trailer Turn Lamps
RADIO Fuse #17 10A Radio (IGN)
BRAKE Fuse #18 10A Antilock Brake System, Four-wheel ABS, Cruise, DRAC
RADIO, BATT Fuse #19 10A Radio (Battery)

10A
Automatic Transmission, CHECK GAUGES, PRNDL, SPEEDO,
TRANS Fuse #20
Tell Tale
SECURITY/STRG Fuse #21 10A EVO/Passlock™ Module Feed
AUX Fuse #22 20A Spot Lamp
RR WIPER Fuse #23 25A Rear Washer Pump, Rear Wiper (Suburban and Utility)

20A
Auxiliary Battery Relay, 4WD Indicator Lamp, Front Axle ACT, Spare
4WD Fuse #24
Power Source
PWR ACC Circuit Breaker A 30A Keyless Entry Module, Power Door Locks, 6-Way Power ST
PWR WINDOWS
Circuit Breaker B
30A Power Windows
 Underhood Fuse Block Underhood Fuse Block (cont’d)

f. — ........ ——■... &---------------------- — —

BUIS E3E3

F IF I RF1FIF1RF1
E 300E J000E I
mm mm E | E m 0
m m Q i E3n @d m @ I i Q q I i
i i mm 0 10 0 ®a s h mm ® ®i ®a | 0
Hf] til my GJ la a Ugtel g 0 0
i i mm m nO^EI q mm .mm B m I i i a
I BLK © m mg| mp HI g m B 1 0
mm mm E SB IS IB 1 0
HQ Bill r-i r-i 3 0
Bs 0 El m m Lll LLJ 1 0
< 9 , ■■ 0 0 <su ^ BO g Q 3 0
^ 2 ^

68800 68800

Connector Part • 12146281 Connector Part • 12146281

Information • Electrical Center (BLK) Information • Electrical Center (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color No, Function
Engine Control Module Fuse Output - Battery -
A1 BLK/WHT 451 D3 ORN 740 Type III Fuse
Ground
(7.4L Only)
A3 GRY 120 Fuel Pump Motor Feed
Air Injection Reaction
Fuse Output - IGN 1 - D4 RED 78 Pump Motor Feed
A4 PNK 639 Type III Fuse D5 — — Not Used
A/C Compressor Clutch Fuse Output-
A6 DK GRN 59 Solenoid Feed D6 PNK 639 Ignition 1-Type III Fuse
A7 BLK 150 Ground Stop Lamp Switch
D7 WHT 17 Output
Fuse Output - Battery -
A9 RED 242
Type II Fuse (7.4L Only) D9 LT BLU 20 Stop Lamp Feed
Fuse Output - Battery - Fuse Output - Battery
B1 ORN 440 E7 RED 642
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Fuel Pump Relay Feed - E8 — __ Not Used
B2 RED 490
Primer
E9 BLK 150 Ground
DK GRN/ Fuel Pump Relay ■ __
B3 WHT 465 F1-F11 — Not Used
Feed (Coil)
Fuse Output - Battery - G2-G6 — — Not Used
B4 ORN 1240 Fuse Output -
Type III Fuse PNK 639
G8 IGN 1-Type III Fuse
B5 — — Not Used
Fuse Output - Battery -
DK GRN/ A/C Compressor Control G 10 ORN 1440 Type III Fuse
B6 WHT 459 Relay Output -Coil
Fuse Output - Battery -
B7 PPL 6 Starter Solenoid Feed G12 ORN 440 Type III Fuse
B8 — — Not Used H1-H5 —- - - Not Used
Starter Relay Feed - Ignition Swith Output -
B9 ORN 1035 H7 PNK 3
Coil (7.4L Only) Ignition 1
Horn Relay Fuse Output - Battery -
C1 BLK 28 H9 RED 2
Output-(Coil) Type 1 Fuse
Fuse Output - Battery - Fuse Output - Battery -
C3 ORN 740 Type III Fuse H11 RED 2 ■
Type 1 Fuse
Air Injection Reaction J2 . . — — Not Used
04 BRN 436 Pump Motor Relay
Output-Coil (7.4L Only) J4 — — Not Used
Fuse Output - Battery
Fuse Output - IGN 1 -
06 PNK 639 J6 ORN 1840 -Type III Fuse
Type III Fuse
(5.0L, 5.7L Only)
D1 DKGRN 29 Horn Feed Fuse Output - IGN 1 -
J8 PNK 439 Type III Fuse
D2 — — Not Used
 Underhood Fuse Block (cont’d) Underhood Fuse Block (cont’d)

jam mm BgmgBg-
a i I d Qd B |
a □ nra
HO
sue | i | S | B
Si 1 | 1 1 1 1
□ 0
GUB IS 8 b ®H®H 3 0 B® 1 1 | 0
s i i i l|D iD |
if.a 3 0 a | 0
n
I BLK B H ITh lig til a 3 0 I BLK
ID
m
i i l l B l l l
m i | H f l] m | 0
i i QS 3 0 M M (53B 3 0
i i QBI r~l nn 3 0 3 0
9 a n Ld LLI 3 0 HH
m
HE
s
i—i rri
Lil 111 1 0
(o 11 B1 |—I i—
| 3 0 S i 'H r—1 r—i
Bi: 0 0. ( 9 ^ □ □ i 0

H T — n r -

88800 68800

Connector Part • 12146281 Connector Part •12146281

Information • Electrical Center (BLK) Information • Electrical Center (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color No. Function
Fuse Output - Battery - Fuse Output - Battery -
J10 ORN 1540 L12 ORN 1240
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Fuse Output - Battery - Fuse Output - Battery -
J12 ORN 740
Type III Fuse Ml RED 742 Type II Fuse
ABS pressure (5.0L, 5.7L Only)
K1 PPL 680 Differential Sensor Fuse Output - Battery -
Signal (7.4L Only) M2 RED 642
Type II Fuse
K3 __ ' — Not Used Fuse Output - Battery -
M3 RED 542
Fuse Output - Battery - Type I I Fuse
K5 RED 742
Type II Fuse Fuse Output - Battery -
M4 RED 442
K7-K11 — — .. Not Used Type II Fuse
Brake Warning Indicator Fuse Output - Battery -
L2 TAN/WHT 33 M5 RED 342
Lamp Output Type II Fuse
L4 — — Not Used Fuse Output - Battery -
M6 RED 242
Fuse Output - Battery - Type II Fuse
L6 ORN 1940 Type III Fuse Fuse Output - Battery -
(5..0L, 5.7L Only) M7 RED 142
Type II Fuse
Fuse Output - IGN 1 - Fuse Output - Battery -
L8 PNK 539
Type II Fuse M8 RED 42
Type II Fuse
Fuse Output - Battery -
L10 ORN 1040 Type III Fuse
(5.0L, 5.7L Only)

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Cigar Lighter/Auxiliary Outlets System Check
Step Action Normal Resulf(s) Abnormal Result(s)*
Push in the Cigar Lighter insert into The insert should pop out of the C ig a r L ig h te r In o p e ra tiv e
1
the Cigar Lighter receptacle. receptacle once the filament is hot
Using the Cigar Lighter insert. The insert should pop out of the A u x ilia r y O u tle ts In o p e r a tiv e
2 Push the insert into the Auxiliary receptacle once the filament is hot
outlet(s).
* Refer to the appropriate symptom diagnostic table for the applicable abnormal result.
 Cigar Lighter Inoperative
Step .ction Value(s) Yes No
Has the Cigar/Lighter/Auxiliary Outlets System Check been Go to Cigar
performed? Lighter/Auxiliary
1 — Outlets
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the cigar lighter connector.
2 2. Connect a test lamp from the cigar lighter connector, —
cavity A, to ground.
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 5
Connect a test lamp between cavity B of the cigar lighter
3 connector and B+. —
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6
Replace the cigar lighter. Go to Cigar
Is the repair complete? Lighter/Auxiliary
4 — Outlets —
System Check
Locate and repair the open in CKT 640 (ORN) between Go to Cigar
the instrument panel fuse block and the cigar lighter. Refer Lighter/Auxiliary
5 to Wiring Repairs — _
Outlets
Is the repair complete? System Check
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the Go to Cigar
cigar lighter and ground G202. Refer to Wiring Repairs Lighter/Auxiliary
6 — Outlets —
Is the repair complete?
System Check

Auxiliary Outlets Inoperative

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Has the Cigar/Lighter/Auxiliary Outlets System Check been Go to Cigar
performed? Lighter/Auxiliary
1 — Outlets
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the auxiliary power connector.
2 2. Connect a test lamp between the auxiliary power —
connector, cavity A, and ground.
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 6
Connect test lamp between auxiliary power connector,
3• cavity B and B+ —
Does test lamp light? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Replace auxiliary power connector assembly. Go to Cigar
4 Is the repair complete? — Lighter/Auxiliary
Outlets
System Check
Locate and repair open CKT 150 BLK between auxiliary Go to Cigar
power connector and ground G200 (front), G202 (console) Lighter/Auxiliary
5 or G400 (rear). — —
Outlets
Is the repair complete? System Check
Locate and repair open in CKT 840 (ORN) between Go to Cigar
auxiliary power connector and instrument panel fuse block. Lighter/Auxiliary
6 — Outlets —
Is the repair complete?
System Check
Schematic and Routing Diagrams
Data Link Communications Schematic References
Section Number - Subsection
Reference on Schematic ft!sime
Ground Distribution Cell - 14 8-Wiring Systems
Power Distribution Cell - 10 8-Wiring Systems

Data Link Communications Schematic Icons

Icon Icon Definition
Refer to ESD Notice

J # 9
19384

Refer to SIR Service Precautions Caution

J k

19386
 Body and Accessories___________________________________________________________________
r ~ Transfer Case IHot At All Times!
I Serial | 3 h j-ft C o n tro l “1Vehicle
i IP
I SS, I Module 1Interface ^ Power Fuse
i 2 i Transfer Case i i Unit PWR Distribution
L. — J 1AUX P\ Block
l. j Controls C Fuse 7 Cell 10
B7 I 25 A
ES Cl
0.5 PPL *1807
C239
— «— \ L. —

B 1 ORN 840
0.5
PPL 1807
0.5 2 12 0.35 14 0.35 °
13 9 16 Data Link
PPL 1807 DKGRN 835 0.5 :ORN 1588 0.5 TAN 800 Connector
BLK/WHT 1455
0.5 Luxury | (DLC)
r - Except 0.5 BLK/WHT 451
PPL 1807
4S294 0.5 BLK 150
Luxury
i S> G C231
|Luxury|
L — — J V 0.5 TAN 800
Vehicle Ground
K, C298 r
S280 Distribution 1 .V 0.5 TAN
Interface Unit Cell 14 0.35 i !> •8245 1 ORN 840
0.5 TAN/WHT 799 BLK/WHT 1455 L ___ _ J A7 BOO
0.5 Vehicle
PPL 1807 B7, D1, .C100 ► S204 0.5 TAN 800
Interface
B4 ' 0.35 DK GRN 835 5J
Unit
Serial !EVO 15„C2 ['program'! Remote Inflatable
J Data j PaSSlOCk “ 8=1Radio .Enable 'Control 1 Data 1Restraint
Lc!!sL j Module i i 1 : 1Door Lock D3 loan: i Sensing and
t j p|e c e jv e r .. l, — -"Diagnostic S272
0.5 PPL 1807 I. transfer
nn cj Module
1 Enable 1Case Control

S150 0.5 TAN/WHT 799

1
L — — — J
1Module (TCCM)
A I Power
Distribution
Cell 10
0.5 PPL 1807 r ' 1S215
0.5 PPL 1807 3 BLK 150 1 BLK/WHT 451
1
15,000 (Gas) F .0200
GVW Ground Ground (Diesel) K
Only Distribution Distribution
£P101 Cell 14 Cell 14 1 BLK/WHT 451
0.5 0.5 PPL 1807 Cl T
PPL 1807 5P101
Serial “i Electronic I
C8 C3 Data 8Brake I
I Class 2 1Control
r “ .J ^ Powertrain I
8 Data 8Control 10 Module I 1 BLK/WHT 451 1 BLK/WHT 451
8 class 2 sModule (EBCM) „C1 S103 Ground
(around Distribution S103
J (PCM) 11 C4 !" serS "1Electronic Distribution Cell 14
1 Data 1Brake Cell 14 1 BLK/WHT 451 1 BLK/WHT 451
I" Serial l) { e h ic t e
Control 0.8 1 BLK/WHT 451
Data 8 1Control
1 Class 2 1Module L - " J Module BLK/WHT 551
u - - J (VCM) (EBCM) G200 G103 .0104 G104

259795
Component Locator
Data Link Communications Components
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Under LH of IP, LH of Steering Column, Data Link Data Link
Data Link Communications
Connector (DLC) mounted to bottom of Knee Bolster Communications
- Component Views Connector End Views
Electronic Brake Near Brake Master Cylinder, at LF Antilock Brakes System Antilock Brakes System
Control Module (EBCM) Wheelhousing Component Views Connector End Views
Electronic Variable Theft Deterrent System
Theft Deterrent System
Orifice (EVO)/ Under the center of the IP Connector End Views
Passlock Module Component Views
Inflatable Restraint SIR Connector End
Sensing and Diagnostic Under Carpet Beneath Drivers Seat SIR Component Views Views (SDM
Module (SDM) Connector View)
To the left of the IP, near the left front Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
IP Fuse Block door jamb switch Component Views Connector End Views
Engine Controls
Component ViewsEngine PCM Connector
Powertrain Control Under RH end of IP, above Blower Motor,
behind IP Compartment Box Controls Component
Module (PCM)
Views Engine Controls End Views
Component Views
Entertainment Entertainment Connector
Radio In the center of the IP
Component Views End Views
Remote Control Door Under the center of the IP, to the right of Keyless Entry Keyless Entry Connector
Lock Receiver the knee bolster Com ponent Views End Views
Engine Controls
Component ViewsEngine VCM Connector
Vehicle Control Engine Compartment, near EBCM Controls Component
Module (VCM) End Views
Views Engine Controls
Component Views
Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Component Views Connector End Views
Transfer Case Control Under IP, on Steering Column Support
(Selectable 4WD) (Automatic 4WD)
Module (TCCM) Bracket
Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Component Views Connector End Views
Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Component Views Connector End Views
Transfer Case Shift Under LH of IP, near Convenience Center (Automatic 4WD)
(Selectable 4WD)
Control Module Transfer Case Control Transfer Case Control
Component Views Connector End Views
Part of the engine harness to IP harness, Power and Grounding
in the left rear side of the engine Power and Grounding
C100
Component Views Connector End Views
compartment, at the bulkhead
Behind the right side of the IP, near the Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
C200 Connector End Views
heater motor, in foam wrap Component Views
Power and Grounding
C231 Part of the IP harness to SIR harness —
Component Views
Behind the left side of the IP, near the Power and Grounding
C298 —
convenience center Component Views
G103 On the top front center of the engine, near Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
(Gas) the thermostat housing Component Views Connector End Views
G1G4 Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Back side of the right cylinder head Connector End Views
(4.3L, 5.0L/5.7L) Component Views
G104 Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Top rear of the right cylinder Component Views Connector End Views
(6.5L)
G104 Backside of the engine block, below below Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
(7-4L) the right cylinder head Component Views Connector End Views
 Data Link Communications Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Behind the left side of the IP, below the Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
G200 fuse block, on the tie bar Component Views Connector End Views
Engine harness, approx. 13 cm (5 in) from
S150 EBCM breakout ■ —■ —

S204 IP harness, approx. 10 cm (4 in) from

C100, towards Data Link Connector (DLC) — —
IP harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S215 instrument cluster breakout, toward radio — —
connectors breakout
S272 IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
auxiliary power outlet breakout — —
IP harness, approx. 5 cm (2 in) from DLC
S280 breakout —- —

Data Link Communications Component Views

Data Link Connector (DLC)

373048

Legend
(1) Data Link Connector (DLC)
Visual Identification
Data Link Communications Connector
End Views

Data Link Connector

m
rri m m i t i m m
ii .Q J O .Q .O .Q
©
O O ii
LU EJEl

12110250
Connector Part
Information 16 Way Metri-pack 150
Series (BLK)
Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function
Not Used

PPL 1807 Serial Data Signal-

Class B
Not Used
BLK 150 Ground
BLK/WHT 451 VCM Ground
6-7 Not Used
BLK/WHT Keyless Entry Program
1455 Enable Signal
TAN 800 SIR Serial Data
10-11 Not Used
TAN/WHT Diagnostic Signal (ABS)/
12 799 (15,000 GVW Only)
Diagnostic
13 ORN 1568 Signal-Transfer Case
Control Module
Diagnostic
14 GRN DK 835 Signal-Entertainment
and Comfort
15 Not Used

16 ORN Fuse Output - Battery ■

1840 Type III Fuse_______
Diagnostic Information and Procedures
A Diagnostic System Check - Data Link Communications
Step Ac/mn Normal Result(s) Abnormal Result(s)*
With scan tool connected make Scan Tools main menu. • Blank Screen
contact with any of the modules
1 applicable to the vehicle ® No power to the scan tool
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with Components
Select Diagnostics Circuit Check, "No" located in the DTCs present "Yes" located in the DTCs present
Class 2 DTC Check from the scan column. column.
tools menu. The modules below No Communication with the vehicle,
should be listed: or Diagnostic Link Connector. Refer
« PCM/VCM to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
2 w/Class 2 Data Line
• ABS/TCS
• VTD/EVO
• ATCM (Automatic Transfer
Case Only)
1. Select Body Diagnostics from No DTCs. Data Only No communication with the vehicle,
the scan tools menu. or Diagnostic Link Connector. Refer
to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
3 2. Select SIR UART Data Line with UART Data Line
information.
3. Access DTC’s using the
scan tool.
1. Select Body Diagnostics from No DTCs. Data Only No communication with the vehicle,
the scan tools menu. or Diagnostic Link Connector. Refer
4 to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
2. Access E and C Data Line from w/E and C Data Line
the scan tools menu.
1. Establish communication with No DTCs. Data Only No communication with the vehicle,
the Electronic Brake Control or Diagnostic Link Connector. Refer
Module (EBCM) to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
5 with EBCM
2. Access DTC’s using the scan
tool. (Vehicles 15,000 GVW
and over.)
1. Establish communication with No DTCs. Data Only No communication with the vehicle,
the Powertrain Control or Diagnostic Link Connector. Refer
System(s). to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
with VCM/PCM (Vehicle Control
2. Access DTC’s using the Module) and Scan Tool Does Not
scan tool. Communicate with VCM/PCM
6 (Powertrain Control Module).
U1026. Refer to DTC U1026 L o s s of
ATC Class 2 Communication.
U1041. Refer to DTC U1041 Loss of
EBCM Communication.
U1192. Refer to DTC U1192 Loss of
VTD Class 2 Serial Data Com.
1. Establish communication with No DTCs. Data Only U1016. Refer to DTC U1016 L o s s o f
the ATCM. Communications with PCM
7 U1041. Refer to DTC U1041 Loss of
2. Access DTC’s using the
scan tool. EBCM Communication.

1. Establish communication with No DTCs. Data Only U1016. Refer to DTC U1016 L o s s o f
the EVO/Passlock Control Communications with PCM
8 Module. U1255. Refer to DTC U1255 Serial
2. Access DTC’s using the Data Line Malfunction.
scan tool.
* Refer to the appropriate symptom diagnostic table for the applicable abnormal result.
 Data Link Communications System Check
Step Action
With scan tool connected make
contact with any of the modules
1 applicable to the vehicle
Select Diagnostics Circuit Check,
Class 2 DTC Check from the scan
tools menu. The modules below
should be listed:
• PCM/VCM
2 w/Class 2 Data Line
• ABS/TCS
• VTD/EVO
• ATCM
(Automatic Transfer Case Only)
1. Select Body Diagnostics from
the scan tools menu.
3 2. Select SIR UART Data Line
information.
3. Access DTC’s using the
scan tool.
1. Select Body Diagnostics from
the scan tools menu.
4 to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
2. Access E and C Data Line from
the scan tools menu.
1. Establish communication with
the Electronic Brake Control
Module (EBCM)
5 or Diagnostic Link Connector. Refer
2. Access DTC’s using the
scan tool.
1. Establish communication with
the Powertrain Control
System(s).
2. Access DTC’s using the
scan tool.
6
1. Establish communication with
the ATCM.
7 U1041. Refer to DTC U1041 Loss of
2. Access DTC’s using the
scan tool.
Normal Result(s) Abnormal Result(s)*
Scan Tools main menu. • Blank Screen
• No power to the scan tool
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with Components
"No" located in the DTCs present "Yes" located in the DTCs present
column. column.
No Communication with the vehicle,
or Diagnostic Link Connector. Refer
to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
No DTCs. Data Only No communication with the vehicle,
or Diagnostic Link Connector. Refer
to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
with UART Data Line
No DTCs. Data Only No communication with the vehicle,
or Diagnostic Link Connector, Refer
w/E and C Data Line
No DTCs. Data Only U1041. Refer to DTC U1041 Loss of
EBCM Communication.
No communication with the vehicle,
to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
with EBC M (Vehicles 15,000 GVW
and over.)
No DTCs. Data Only No communication with the vehicle,
or Diagnostic Link Connector. Refer
to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate
with VCM/PCM (Vehicle Control
Module) and Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with VCM/PCM
(Powertrain Control Module).
U1026. Refer to DTC U1026 Loss of
ATC Class 2 Communication.
U1192. Refer to DTC U1192 Loss of
VTD Class 2 Serial Data Com.
No DTCs. Data Only U1016. Refer to DTC U1016 Loss of
Communications with PCM
EBCM Communication.

1. Establish communication with No DTCs. Data Only U1016. Refer to DTC U1016 Loss of
the EVO/Passlock Control Communications with PCM
8 Module. U1255. Refer to DTC U1255 Serial
2. Access DTC’s using the Data Line Malfunction
scan tool.
* Refer to the appropriate symptom diagnostic table for the applicable abnormal result.
DTC SJ1016 Loss of Communications with PCM

Data Link

owwi r u w c i iian I ■"serial Electronic r sefiaT "* Transfer Case

| Data IControl I Data i Brake Control | Data I Shift Control
J2?s£.2)j Module (PCM) t (gaM^| Module (EBCM) ^ l 2h Module

429304

Circuit Description Action Taken When the DTC Sets

The Class II Serial Data Circuit is used communicate • Stores Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) U1016 in
between systems. Each system connected to the the Passlock™ Module memory.
Class II Serial Data line is assigned its own recognition • If the ignition was OFF at the time, the vehicle will
code (address). This code is used to identify which not start.
module or systems are communicating. The Node
Alive or State of Health (SOH) messages are • If the engine was running at the time, the vehicle
will start again but the SECURITY indicator will
broadcast on the bus every 2 seconds. If a module is
monitoring Node Alive messages for that module, remain illuminated.
it will reset its 5 second timer for that particular module. Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC
Any system that communicate properly will also
• The Passlock™ Module continuously monitors the
store the appropriate communication Diagnostic
signal and moves the DTC from the current to
Trouble Codes (DTCs) that are assigned to the
history on the next ignition cycle when the
system(s) it could not communicate with.
condition causing the fault no longer exists.
Conditions for Setting the DTC • All of the Passlock™ Module history codes will
All of the following conditions must be met: be cleared after 100 ignition cycles (from OFF
to RUN) with no current codes active during the
® Ignition is active.
100 ignition cycles.
• Communication between the Passlock™ Module
and the PCM was present for at least 1 second, • Using a scan tool.
then lost for more than 5 seconds (usually
due to intermittent connection).
• The PCM has not received a valid state of health
message from the Passlock™ Module.
Diagnostic Aids
• When the diagnostics direct you to take electrical
measurement at the Wiring Harness Junction
Blocks, refer to Inline Hamess Connector End
Views in Wiring Systems for termina l assignments
of the Wiring Harness Junction Blocks.
• If the DTC is a history DTC, the problem may be
intermittent. Try performing the tests shown while
wiggling wiring and connectors, this can often
cause the malfunction to appear.
Test Description
1. The Data Link Communications System Check
should be performed before any diagnostics
are performed on the system.
2. This step is to determine if communications
through CKT 1807 (PPL) are good.
3. This step is to determine if CKT 1807 (PPL) is at
fault or if the problem is within the Powertrain
Contro l Module (PCM).
6. This step is to check CKT 1807 (PPL) and the
Transfer Case Shift Control Module for circuit
connections.
7. This step is to check CKT 1807 (PPL) and the
EVO/Passlock™ Module for circuit connections.
8. th is step is to determine if CKT 1807 (PPL) is at
fault or if the problem is within the Transfer
Case Shift Control Module.
11. This step is to determine if CKT 1807 (PPL) is at
fault or if the problem is within the
EVO/Passlock™ Module.

DTC U1016 Loss of Communications with PCM

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Was the Data Link Communications System Check Go to A
performed? Diagnostic
1 — System Chec!
Data Link
Go to Step 2 Communications
Establish communications with the Powertrain Control
2 Module (PCM). —
Can communications be established? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 3
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Remove the scan tool from the Data Link
Connector (DLC).
3. Disconnect connector C1 from the PCM.
3 4. Connect a Digital Multimeter (DMM) (continuity) —
between terminal 11 of the VCM connector or
terminal 59 of the PCM connector and terminal 2 of
the DLC.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Replace the PCM. Refer to PCM Go to A
Replacement/Programming in Engine Controls. Diagnostic
4 Is the repair complete? — System Check - —
Data Link
Communications
Locate and repair the open in CKT 1807 (PPL) between Go to A
the PCM and the DLC. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Diagnostic
5 Systems. — System Check - —
Is the repair complete? Data Link
Communications
Establish communications with the Transfer Case Shift
6 Control Module. —
Can communications be established? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
Establish communications with the EVO/Passlock™ Go to A
Module. Diagnostic
7 Can communications be established? — System Check -
Data Link
Communications Go to Step 11
 DTC U1016 Loss of Communications with PCM (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
2. Remove the scan tool from the DLC.
3. Disconnect C1 from the Transfer Case Shift Control
8 Module. —
4. Connect a DMM (continuity) between terminal E9 of
the Transfer Case Shift Control Module and
terminal 2 of the DLC.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
Replace the Transfer Case Shift Control Module. Refer to Go to A
Transfer Case Control Module Replacement (Auto Diagnostic
9 Transfer Case) or Transfer Case Control Module — System Check - —■
Replacement (Automatic 4WD) in Driveline and Axles. Data Link
Is the repair complete? Communications
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in Go to A
CKT 1807 (PPL) between the Transfer Case Shift Control Diagnostic
10 Module and splice S280. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring — . System Check - —
Systems. Data Link
Is the repair complete? Communications
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
2. Remove the scan tool from the DLC.
3. Disconnect the EVO/Passlock™ Module connector.
11 4. Connect a DMM (continuity) between terminal B4 of —
the Passlock™ Module connector and terminal 2 of
the DLC.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 13
Replace the EVO/Passlock™ Module. Refer to Theft Go to A
Deterrent Module Replacement in Theft Deterrent. Diagnostic
12 Is the repair complete? — System Check - —-
Data Link
Communications
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in Go to A
CKT 1807 (PPL) between the EVO/Passlock™ Module and Diagnostic
13 splice S280. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — System Check - —
Is the repair complete? Data Link
Communications
DTC U1016 Loss of Class 2 Communication with VCM

Data Link

r ssriaT 1 Vehicle r ^3riJ"1 Electronic r s” riaT 1 Transfer Case

I Data I Control I I Brake Control | Data | Shift Control
L(Cfass_2)j M0C)U|e (VCM) L(C]ass2)j Modute (EBCM) Module

429306

Circuit Description Action Taken When the DTC Sets

The C lass II Seria l Data Circuit is used communicate • Stores Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) U1016 in
between systems. Each system connected to the the Passlock™ Module memory.
Class II Serial Data line is assigned its own recognition • If the ignition was OFF at the time, the vehicle will
code (address). This code is used to identify which not start.
module or systems are communicating. The Node
• If the engine was running at the time, the vehicle
Alive or State of Health (SOH) messages are
will start again but the SECURITY indicator will
broadcast on the bus every 2 seconds. If a module is
remain illuminated.
monitoring Node Alive messages for that module,
it will reset its 5 second timer for that particular module. Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC
Any system that communicate properly will a lso
• The Passlock™ Module continuously monitors the
store the appropriate communication Diagnostic
signal and moves the DTC from the current to
Trouble Codes (DTCs) that are assigned to the
history on the next ignition cycle when the
system(s) it could not communicate with.
condition causing the fault no longer exists.
Conditions for Setting the DTC • All of the Passlock™ Module history codes will be
All of the following conditions must be met: cleared after 100 ignition cyc les (from OFF to
• Ignition is active. RUN) with no current codes active during the
100 ignition cycles.
• Communication between the Passlock™ Module
• Using a scan tool.
and the VCM was present for at least 1 second,
then lost for more than 5 seconds (usually
due to intermittent connection).
• The VCM has not received a valid state of health
message from the Passlock™ Module.
Diagnostic Aids
• When the diagnostics direct you to take electrical
measurement at the Wiring Harness Junction
Blocks, refer to Inline Hamess Connector End
Views in Wiring Systems for termina l assignments
of the Wiring Harness Junction Blocks.
• If the DTC is a history DTC, the problem may be
intermittent. Try performing the tests shown while
wiggling wiring and connectors, this can often
cause the malfunction to appear.
Test Description
1. The Data Link Communications System Check
should be performed before any diagnostics
are performed on the system.
2. This step is to determine if communications
through CKT 1807 (PPL) are good.
3. This step is to determine if CKT 1807 (PPL) is at
fault or if the problem is within the Vehicle
Contro l Module (VCM).
6. This step is to check CKT 1807 (PPL) and the
Transfer Case Shift Control Module for circuit
connections.
7. This step is to check CKT 1807 (PPL) and the
EVO/Passlock™ Module for circuit connections.
8. This step is to determine if CKT 1807 (PPL) is at
fault or if the problem is within the Transfer
Case Shift Control Module.
11. This step is to determine if CKT 1807 (PPL) is at
fault or if the problem is within the
EVO/Passlock™ Module.

DTC U1016 Loss of Class 2 Communication with VCM

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Was the Data Link Communications System Check Go to A
performed? Diagnostic
1 — System Check -
Data Link
Go to Step 2 Communications
Establish communications with the Vehicle Control
2 Module (VCM).
Can communications be established? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 3
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Remove the scan tool from the Data Link
Connector (DLC).
3. Disconnect connector C1 from the PCM.
3 4. Connect a Digital Multimeter (DMM) (continuity) — :
between terminal 11 of the VCM connector or
terminal 59 of the PCM connector and terminal 2 of
the DLC.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Replace the VCM. Refer to VCM Go to A
Replacement/Programming (5.0L/5.7L)/ VCM Diagnostic
4 Replacement/Programming (7.4L) in Engine Controls. System Check - —
Is the repair complete? Data Link
Communications
Locate and repair the open in CKT 1807 (PPL) between Go to A
the VCM and the DLC. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Diagnostic
5 Systems. — System Check - —
Is the repair complete? Data Link
Communications
Establish communications with the Transfer Case Shift
6 Control Module. —
Can communications be established? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
Establish communications with the EVO/Passlock™ Go to A
Module. Diagnostic
7 Can communications be established? — System Check -
Data Link
Communications Go to Step 11
 PTC 01016 Loss of Class 2 Communication with VCM (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
2. Remove the scan tool from the DLC.
3. Disconnect C1 from the Transfer Case Shift Control
8 Module. —
4. Connect a DMM (continuity) between terminal E9 of
the Transfer Case Shift Control Module and
terminal 2 of the DLC.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
Replace the Transfer Case Shift Control Module. Refer to Go to A
T r a n s f e r C a s e C o n t r o l M o d u l e Replacement (Auto Diagnostic
9 T r a n s f e r C a s e ) or T r a n s f e r C a s e Control Module — System Check - —
R e p l a c e m e n t (Automatic 4WD) in Driveline and Axles. Data Link
Is the repair complete? Communications
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in Go to A
CKT 1807 (PPL) between the Transfer Case Shift Control Diagnostic
10 Module and splice S280. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring — System Check - —
Systems. Data Link
Is the repair complete? Communications
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
2. Remove the scan tool from the DLC.
3. Disconnect the EVO/Passlock™ Module connector.
11 4. Connect a DMM (continuity) between terminal B4 of —
the Passlock™ Module connector and terminal 2 of
the DLC.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 13
Replace the EVO/Passlock™ Module. Refer to Theft Go to A
D e t e r r e n t M o d u l e Replacement in Theft Deterrent. Diagnostic
12 Is the repair complete? System Check - —
Data Link
Communications
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in Go to A
CKT 1807 (PPL) between the EVO/Passlock™ Module and Diagnostic
13 splice S280, Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — System Check - —
Is the repair complete? . Data Link
Communications
DTC U1192 Loss of VTD Class 2 Serial Data Com

Data Link
Connector (DLC)

0,5 PPL 1807

if l A
S280

0.5 PPL 1807 0.5 PPL 1807

B4^ B 8. C100.
r sifiaT 1 EVO/Passlock
I Data I Module
L(Class2), . S150 <

0.5 PPL 1807 0.5 PPL 1807

0.5 PPL 1807

Cl E9 C l
rSefiaT 1 Electronic r s“ria“ i Transfer Case
I Data | Brake Control I Data | Shift Control
0.5 PPL 1807 0.5 PPL 1807 ,,(08882), Modu|e (EBCM) Module
C8JC8 111 C4
r serial” 1 Powertrain rs”riaT n Vehicle
I Data I Control I Da's I Control
JS reft Module d&m 2), Module
(PCM) (VCM)

393986

Circuit Description
The Class II Serial Data Circuit is used to
communicate between systems. Each system
connected to the C lass II Serial Data line is assigned
its own recognition code (ID / address). This code
is used to identify which module or systems are
communicating. The Node Alive or State of Health
(SOH) messages are broadcast on the bus every
two seconds. If a module is monitoring Node Alive
messages for that module, it will reset its 5 second
time for that particular module. Any system that cannot
communicate properly will also store the appropriate
communication DTCs that are assigned to the
system(s) it could not communicate with.
The VTD sends a Vehicle Security Password when its
ignition 1 input becomes active and includes its
source I D. The Vehicle Security Password includes
either a Fuel Continue Password or a Fuel Disable '
Password. The Vehicle Control Module (VCM)/
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) learns the source
ID, Monitors for the Node Alive messages, and
responds with a Vehicle Security Status message
including its VCM/PCM ID. The VTD learns the VCM
ID, monitors for Node Alive messages from the
VCM/PCM ID, and responds with a Vehicle Security
Status acknowledge message. This tells the VCM,
I heard you so you can stop sending the message.
Lost Communications DTCs (U-Codes) are equal
to U1000 plus the ID. This is U1016 and
U1192 for VTD.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• The VCM/PCM has estab lished communications
and received the Vehicle Security Password
during this ignition cycle from the VTD (Passlock)
Control Module.
• The VCM/PCM communications, no Node
A live/SOH messages received, from the VTD
(Passlock) Control Module for 5 seconds.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
When a failure occurs after the VCM/PCM enables
fuel due to receipt of a Vehicle Security Password
containing the Fuel Continue Password:
• The vehicle starts
• The VCM/PCM continues to enable fuel delivery
(Fuel Enabled after Security Fault mode), until
the fault is corrected and a valid password
is received from the VTD (Passlock) Control
Module. If the fault is corrected and a valid
password is received, fuel delivery is enabled.
The difference is that the Fail Enable Active bit in
the Vehicle Security Status message will now
be false while the Fuel Continue State bit
will be true.
• A DTC U1192 is stored in the VCM/PCM memory
• The VCM/PCM will not illuminate the MIL
When the failure occurs with the ignition OFF, or
before the VCM/PCM received a valid Passlock
password during engine cranking:
• The vehicle does not start or it starts and stalls
• The VCM/PCM disables fuel delivery until the fault
is corrected and a valid password is received
from the VTD (Passlock) Control Module.
Fuel delivery is disabled for the current
ignition cycle.
• A DTC U1192 is stored in the VCM/PCM memory
• The VCM/PCM will not illuminate the MIL
Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC
• This DTC requires an ignition cycle in order to
change from Current to History
• The VCM establishes communication with the
VTD (Passlock) Control Module
• A history DTC will clear after 40 consecutive
ignition cycles if the condition for the malfunction is
no longer present
• The DTCs can be cleared using a scan tool
Diagnostic Aids
Important: Do not clear the DTCs unless directed by
a diagnostic procedure. Clearing the DTCs will
also clear valuable Freeze Frame and Failure Records
information.
• Check for published service bulletins relating to
the exhibited symptoms or component operation.
• Inspect all related wiring and connections,
including the connections at the VCM and the VTD
(Passlock) Control Module. These connections
may cause an intermittent malfunction.
• Thoroughly check any circuit that can cause an
intermittent complaint for the listed items:
- Backed out terminals
- Improper mating of connectors
- Broken connector locks
- Improperly formed or damaged terminals
- Poor terminal to wiring connections
- Physical damage to the wiring hamess
- Corroded terminals or connections
• If the Class II Serial Data line is shorted to ground
or shorted to voltage, all the modules or systems
connected to the Class II Serial Data line will
not be able to communicate properly. These
systems or modules are capable of storing loss of
communications DTC’s (DTCs with the letter U
as a prefix) in their memory. After repairing
the cause of a DTC U1192, clear all DTCs from
all systems capable of storing this DTC.
• The scan tools Diagnostic Circuit Check can be
used to:
- Monitor the Class II Serial Data circuit for
modules which have been or are
communicating
- Monitor for the presence of loss of
communications DTCs (U1001-U1199)
- Clear the loss of communication DTCs.
When a Clear Codes command is issued, all
codes, Freeze Frame, and Failure Records
information is cleared.
• The scan tools Diagnostic Circuit Check status of
Active indicates that the module is communicating
with the scan too l . An Inactive status indicates
that the modu le previously communicated with the
scan tool, but is not communicating currently. If
a module is not listed at all, the module never
successfully established communications with the
scan tool. Refer to Electrical Diagnosis for the
complete Class II data link to determine if
there are any unlisted modules.
Test Description
The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on
the diagnostic table.
1. If the scan tool indicates No Data Communication
with Vehicle, inspect the Diagnostic Link
Connector. Inspect Ignition (On/Off?), then no
communication with any control module Is
possible. This problem will be diagnosed properly
by following the Diagnostic Table Scan Tool
Does Not Communicate with any Class II Modules,
found in this section.
2. If the engine cranks but does not start, or the
engine starts and immediately stalls, a problem
with the EVO/Passlock Module’s power and/or
ground circuits could be the problem. Refer to A
Diagnostic System Check - Theft Deterrent.
3. This step verifies that a prob lem communicating
with the EVO/Passlock Module exists.
4. If communication can be estab lished with the
VCM/PCM, continuity exists in CKT 1807 from the
Data Link Connector terminal 2 through
Splice S280.

DTC U1192 Loss of VTD Class 2 Serial Data Com

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Tools Required
® J 39200 DMM
• J 34142-B Test Light
• Scan Tool
Did you perform the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) Go to A
System Check? Powertrain On
1 — Board Diagnostic
(OBD)
Go to Step 2 System Check
With the scan tool connected to the Data Link
Connector (DLC).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. Go to A
2 — Diagnostic
2. Establish communications with the Vehicle Control System Check -
Module (VCM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Data Link
Can communications be established with the VCM/PCM? Go to Step 3 Communications
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Disconnect the Passlock™ Module connector and the
scan tool from the DLC.
3 3. Connect a J 39200 DMM between terminal B4 of the 0-50
Passlock™ Module connector and terminal 2 of
the DLC
Is the resistance below the specified value? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Replace the EVO/Passlock™ Module. Refer to Theft Go to A
Deterrent Module Replacement in Theft Deterrent. Diagnostic
4 Is the repair complete? — System Check - —
Data Link
Communications
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in Go to A
CKT 1807 (PPL) between the Passlock™ Module and Diagnostic
5 splice S280. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — System Check - —■
Is the repair complete? Data Link
Communications
DTC U1255 Serial Data Line Malfunction

Data Link
Connector (DLC)
2~

0.5 PPL 1807

S280
A
0.5 PPL 1807 0.5 PPL 1807
B4 68 C10Q
r Serial” ** EVO/PaSSlOCk
| Data 1Module
L (Class 2>i S150 <

0.5 PPL 1807 0.5 PPL 1807

0.5 PPL 1807

~Diesel| Qm €1 E9 Cl
r seriaT 1 Electronic r s¥risf 1 Transfer Case
1Data i Brake Control I Data | Shift Control
0,5 PPL 1807 0.5 PPL 1807 Module (EBCM) L & s l 2 h Module'
C8 C8 11 C4
r seriaT 1 Powertrain rs_i_ 1 Veh|c|e
I Date I Control ! Data I Control
JS ? * 1% Module Module
(PCM) (VCM)

500717

Circuit Description Conditions for Clearing the DTC

This circuit supplies the Passlock data to the Vehicle
Control Module (VCM )/Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) from the Passlock™ Module, as well as
com m unicating all of the Class 2 m essages among
all of the m odules and the tool, CKT 1807 (PPL).
Conditions for Setting the DTC
All of the follow ing conditions must be met:
• The ignition is active.
• Com m unication with the Data Link Connector
and other m odules is lost or at least has been lost
at one tim e due to interm ittent connection
(this is usually a DTC).
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
• Stores DTC U 1125 in the Passlock™ Module
memory.
• If the ignition was OFF at the time, the vehicle will
not start again.
• If the engine was running at the tim e, the vehicle
will start again but the SECURITY indicator will
remain illuminated.
• The Passlock™ Module continuously monitors the
signal and moves the DTC from current to history
on the next ignition cycle when the condition
causing the fault no longer exists.
All Passlock™ Module history codes will be
cleared after 100 ignition cycles (from OFF to
RUN) with no current codes active during the
100 ignition cycles.
• Using a scan tool.
Diagnostic Aids
• When the diagnostics direct you to take electrical
m easurem ents at the W iring Harness Junction
Blocks, refer to I n lin e H a m e s s C o n n e c t o r E n d
V ie w s in W iring System s for term inal assignm ents
of the Wiring Harness Junction Blocks.
• If the DTC is a history DTC, the problem may be
intermittent. Try perform ing the test shown while
w iggling wiring and connectors, this can often
cause the malfunction to appear.
Test Description 2. This step is to determine if the scan tool can use
The number(s) below refer to the step number(s) on CKT 1807 (PPL) to communicate with the
the diagnostic table, VCM/PCM.
1. The VTD Diagnostic System Check wil l test the 3. This step is to determine the problem with
scan tool’s ability to communicate with the CKT 1807 (PPL). Whether it is fault of the circuit
EVO/Passlock Module and the Vehicle Control or fault of the Passlock™ Module.
Module VCM/Powertrain Control Module (PCM). If
4. In this step be sure to connect all connectors
communications are unable to be established
removed during the diagnosis and perform
with either module a CURRENT fault exists. This
the reprogramming of the Passlock™ Module.
fault could be caused by a faulty power or
ground circuit to the affected module, a faulty
CKT 1807 (PPL), or a faulty control module. The
VTD Diagnostic System Check table will
determine if power or ground circuits are faulty. If
the power and grounds test OK, you are
referred to A D ia g n o stic S yste m C h e ck - D ata
L in k C o m m u n ica tio n s to diagnose
CKT 1807 (PPL) or a faulty EVO/Passlock
Modul e.

DTC U1255 Serial Data Line Malfunction

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Was the VTD Diagnostic System Check performed? Go to A
D ia g n o s tic
S y s te m C h e c k -
1 — T h e ft D e te rre n t
in Theft
Go to S te p 2 Deterrent
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Connect a scan tool to the Data Link
Connector (DLC). Go to A
2 — D ia g n o s tic
3. Establish communication with the Vehicle Control S y s te m C h e c k -
Module (VCM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM). D a ta L in k
Does the scan tool communicate with the VCM/PCM? Go to S te p 3 C o m m u n ic a tio n s

1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.

2. Disconnect the Passlock™ Module.
3 3. Connect a Digital Multimeter (DMM) between the 0-50
terminal B4 of the Passlock™ Module and terminal 2
of the DLC.
Is the resistance below the specified value? Go to S te p 4 Go to S te p S
Replace the Passlock™ Module. Refer to T h e ft D e te rre n t Go to A
M o d u le Replacement in Theft Deterrent. D ia g n o s tic
4 Is the repair complete? — S y s te m C h e c k - ■—
D a ta L in k
C o m m u n ic a tio n s
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in Go to A
CKT 1807 (PPL) between the Passlock™ Module and the D ia g n o s tic
5 DLC. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — S y s te m C h e c k - —
Is the repair complete? D a ta L in k
C o m m u n ic a tio n s
 Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with VCM/PCM (Vehicle Control Module)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Data Link Communications Diagnostic Go to A
System Check? D ia g n o s tic
1 — S y s te m C h e c k -
D a ta L in k
Go to S te p 2 C o m m u n ic a tio n s
Turn the Ignition Switch to the RUN position. Go to A
Does the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminate? Powertrain O n
B o a rd D ia g n o s tic
(O B D ) S y s te m
C heck
2 — (5.0U5JL);A
P o w e rtra in O n
B o a rd D ia g n o s tic
(O B D ) S y s te m
C h e c k (7.4L) in
Go to S te p 3 Engine Controls
1. From the scan tool’s main menu, select Powertrain
Diagnostics.
Go to A
3 2. Establish communications with the Vehicle Control — D ia g n o s tic
Module (VCM). S y s te m C h e c k -
Does the scan tool indicate No Data Communication with D a ta L in k
Vehicle? Go to S te p 4 C o m m u n ic a tio n s

1. From the scan tool’s main menu, select Chassis

Diagnostics. Go to A
D ia g n o s tic
4 2, Establish communications with the Electronic Brake — S y s te m C h e c k -
Control Module (EBCM). D a ta L in k
Is the scan tool able to communicate with the EBCM? Go to S te p 5 C o m m u n ic a tio n s

1. Turn the Ignition Switch to the OFF position.

2. Disconnect connector C4 from the VCM
5 3. Connect a J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM between terminal 11 of —
connector C4 of the VCM and splice S150.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 7 Go to S te p 6
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in Go to A
CKT 1807 (PPL) between splice S150 and terminal 11, D ia g n o s tic
6 connector C4 of the VCM. Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in — S y s te m Check - —
Wiring Systems. D a ta L in k
Is the repair complete? C o m m u n ic a tio n s
Replace the VCM. Refer to VCM Go to A
R e p la c e m e n t/P ro g ra m m in g (5.0L/5.7L); VCM D ia g n o s tic
7 R e p la c e m e n t/P ro g ra m m in g (7.4L) in Engine Controls. — S y s te m C h e c k - —
Is the repair complete? D a ta L in k
C o m m u n ic a tio n s
 Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with VCM/PCM (Poweritrain Control Module)
Step ction Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Data Link Communications Diagnostic Go to A
System Check? D ia g n o s tic
1 — S y s te m C h e c k -
D a ta L in k
Go to S te p 2 C o m m u n ic a tio n s
Turn the Ignition Switch to the RUN postion. Go to A
2 Does the ABS Indicator Lamp illuminate? — D ia g n o s tic
Go to S te p 3 S y s te m C h e c k

1. From the scan tool’s main menu, select the Chassis

Diagnostics.
Go to A
:3 2. Establish communication with the Electronic Brake — D ia g n o s tic
Control Module (EBCM). S y s te m C h e c k -
Does the scan tool inidicate No Communication with D a ta L in k
Vehicle? Go to S te p 4 C o m m u n ic a tio n s

1. From the scan tool’s main menu, select Powertrain

Diagnostics. Go to A
D ia g n o s tic
4 2. Establish communication with the Powertrain Control — S y s te m C h e c k -
Module (PCM). D a ta L in k
Is the scan tool able to communicate with the VCM? Go to S te p 5 C o m m u n ic a tio n s

1. Turn the ignition Switch to the OFF position.

2. Disconnect connector C3 from the PCM.
5 —
3. Connect a J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM between cavity C8 of
connector C3 of the PCM and splice S150.
Is continuity present? Go to S te p 6 Go to S te p 7
Replace the PCM.'".Refer to PCM Go to A
R e p la c e m e n t/P ro g ra m m in g in Engine Controls. D ia g n o s tic
6 Is the repair complete? — S y ste m C h e c k - —
D a ta L in k
C o m m u n ic a tio n s
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in Go to A
CKT 1807 (PPL) between splice Si 07 and the EBCM. D ia g n o s tic
7 Refer to W irin g R e p a irs in Wiring Systems. — S y ste m C h e c k - __
Is the repair complete? D a ta L in k
C o m m u n ic a tio n s

Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with EBCM

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Data Link Communications Go to A
System Check? D ia g n o s tic
1 — S y s te m C h e c k -
D a ta L in k
Go to S te p 2 C o m m u n ic a tio n s

1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.

2. Disconnect the scan tool from the Data Link
Connector (DLC).
2 3. Disconnect C1 from the Electronic Brake Control —
Module (EBCM).
4. Connect a J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM between terminal F of the
EBCM and terminal 12 of the DLC.
Is continuity present? Go to S te fo 3 Go to S te p 4
Replace the EBCM. Refer to E le c tro n ic B ra k e C o n tro l Go to A
M o d u le (E B C M ) R e p la c e m e n t Electronic Brake Control D ia g n o s tic
3 Module Replacement. — S y s te m C h e c k - —
Is the repair complete? D a ta L in k
C o m m u n ic a tio n s
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in Go to A
CKT 799 (TAN/WHT) between the EBCM and the DLC. D ia g n o s tic
4 Refer to W irin g R e p a irs. — S y s te m C h e c k - —
Is the repair complete? D a ta L in k
C o m m u n ic a tio n s
 Sean. Tool Does Not.. Communicate with Com ponents
step Action VaBue(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Data Link Communications Go to A
System Check? Diagnostic
1 — System Check -
Data Link
Go to Step 2 Communications
1. Locate an identical vehicle with the same systems.
2. Connect the scan tool to the second vehicles DLC. —
2
3. Establish communications with the second vehicle. Go to scan tools
Can coomunications be established? Go to Step 3 owners manual.
1. Disconnect the scan tool from the secondary vehicle.
2. Ensure the ignition switch is in the OFF position on
the original vehicle.
3 . .. .—
3. Connect a testlamp between terminals 16 of the DLC
and ground on the original vehicle.
Does the testlamp light? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6
Connect the testlamp between terminals 16 and 4, and
4 then 16 and 5 of the DLC.
Does the testlamp light? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7
Inspect the power and ground circuits of the DLC for Go to A
intermittents and poor connections. Refer to Intermittents Diagnostic
5 and Poor Connections Diagnosis System Check -
Is the repair complete? Data Link
Communications
Locate and repair the open in CKT 840 (ORN) between Go to A
the AUX PWR fuse and the DLC. Refer to Wiring Repairs Diagnostic
6 Is the repair complete? — System Check - —
Data Link
Communications
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) or Go to A
CKT 451 (BLK/WHT) between the DLC and ground. Refer Diagnostic
7 to Wiring Repairs — System Check - —
Is the repair complete? Data Link
Communications
 Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with UART Data Line
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the SIR Diagnostic System Check? SIR Diagnostic
1 — Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.

2 2. Connect a J 39200 4-5 volts
Is the voltage less than the specified value? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Is the voltage greater than the specified value? SIR Diagnostic
3 4-5 volts
Go to Step 6 System Check

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4 2. Connect a J 39200 — .
Is continuity present? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 8
Locate and repair the short to ground in CKT 800 (TAN)
between the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) and
5 the DLC. Refer to SIR Wiring Repairs — —
SIR Diagnostic
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Disconnect the SDM connector. Refer to Inflatable

Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Replacement
6 2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. 0 volts
3. Connect a J 39200
Is the voltage greater than the specified value? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7
Locate and repair the short to voltage in CKT 800 (TAN)
between the Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) and
7 — —
the DLC. Refer to SIR Wiring Repairs SIR Diagnostic
Is the repair complete? System Check
Perform the SDM Intergrity Check. Refer to SDM
8 Integrity Check ■— SIR Diagnostic
Did the SDM pass the check? System Check Go to Step 9
Replace the SDM. Refer to Inflatable Restraint Sensing
9 and Diagnostic Module Replacement — SIR Diagnostic —
Is the repair complete? System Check

Scan Tool Does Not Communicate w/Class 2 Data Line

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Data Link Communications Go to A
System Check? Diagnostic
1 — System Check -
Data Link
Go to Step 2 Communications

1. Disconnect the scan tool from the Data Link

Connector (DLC).
2 2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. 7 volts
3. Connect a J 39200
Is the voltage reading greater than the specified value? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 10
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Disconnect connector C100.
3 3. Take the same reading between terminals 2 and 4 of 7 volts
the DLC as in step 3.
Is the voltage reading greater than the specified value? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4
 Scan Tool Does Not Communicate w/Class 2 Data Line (cont’d)
Step Action Vaiue(s) Yes m

1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.

2. Reconnect connector C100.
3. Disconnect connector C1 of the Electronic Brake
4 Control Module (EBCM). 7 volts
4. Take the same reading between terminals 2 and 4 of
the DLC as in step 3.
Is the voltage reading greater than the specified value? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 18 \
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Disconnect the Vehicle Control Module (VCM) or
Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
5 7 volts
3. Take the same reading between terminals 2 and 4 of
the DLC as in step 3.
Is the voltage reading greater than the specified value? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 18
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Disconnect the EVO/Passlock Module (VTD).
6 3. Take the same reading between terminals 2 and 4 of 7 volts
the DLC as in step 3.
Is the voltage reading greater than the specified value? Go to.Step 7 Go to Step 18
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Disconnect the Transfer Case Shift Control Module
connector C1.
7 7 volts
3. Take the same reading between terminals 2 and 4 of
the DLC as in step 3.
Is the voltage reading greater than the specified value? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 18
Locate and repair the short to voltage in CKT 1807 (PPL) Go to A
between C100 and the EBCM, VCM/PCM. Refer to Diagnostic
8 Wiring Repairs — System Check - —
Is the repair complete? Data Link
Communications

1. Locate and repair the short to voltage in

CKT 1807 (PPL) between the DLC and the VTD,
C100 and the Transfer Case Shift Control Module. Go to A
9 Refer to Wiring Repairs —■ Diagnostic —
System Check -
2. Reconnect C100. Data Link
Is the repair complete? Communications

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Go to A

Diagnostic
10 2. Connect a J 39200 — System Check -
Is continuity present? Data Link
Go to Step 11 Communications

1. Disconnect connector C100.

11 2. Take the same reading between terminals 2 of the —
DLC and ground as in step 10.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 12
1. Reconnect connector C100.
2. Disconnect connector C1 of the Electronic Brake
Control Module (EBCM).
12 —
3. Take the same reading between terminals 2 of the
DLC and ground as in step 10.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 18
 Scan Tool Does Not Communicate w/Class 2 Data Line (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
1. Disconnect the Vehicle Control Module (VCM) or
Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
13 2. Take the same reading between terminals 2 of the —
DLC and ground as in step 10.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 18
1. Disconnect the EVO/Passlock Module (VTD).
14 2. Take the same reading between terminals 2 of the —
DLC and ground as in step 10.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 15 Go to Step 18
1. Disconnect the Transfer Case Shift Control Module
connector C1.
15 2. Take the same reading between terminals 2 of the —
DLC and ground as in step 10.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 17 Go to Step 18
Locate and repair the short to voltage in CKT 1807 (PPL) Go to A
between C100 and the EBCM, VCM/PCM. Refer to Diagnostic
16 Wiring Repairs — System Check - —
Is the repair complete? Data Link
Communications
1. Locate and repair the short to voltage in
CKT 1807 (PPL) between the DLC and the VTD,
C100 and the Transfer Case Shift Control Module. Go to A
17 Refer to Wiring Repairs — Diagnostic —
System Check -
2. Reconnect C100. Data Link
Is the repair complete? Communications
Replace the control module that you disconnected last. Go to A
Is the repair complete? Diagnostic
18 — System Check -
Data Link
Communications
________

Scan Tool Does Not Communicate w/E and C Data Line

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Radio/Audio Diagnostic Radio/Audio
1 System Check? — Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Turn ignition to the OFF position.
2. Disconnect the scan tool, if connected.
2 3. Disconnect connector C2 from the Radio. —
4. Connect a J 39200
Is continuity present? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the Radio. Refer to Radio Replacement Radio/Audio
3 — —
Is the repair complete? System Check
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in
CKT 835 (DK GRN) between the Radio and the DLC.
4 Refer to Wiring Repairs — —

Radio/Audio
Is the repair complete? System Check
Repair Instructions
Camper and Trailer Wiring Description
Two trailer harnesses are availab le: the heavy-duty
trailer towing (UY7) harness and the camper
(UY1) harness.
Pickup Trailer Harness Routing
Suburban/Utility Trailer Harness Routing
The option UY7 trailer harness is for heavy-duty
towing applications. A 30-amp fused battery feed wire
and auxiliary circuit routes from the cowl -mounted
junction block, along the body side rail, to the
rear bumper crossmember. The harness for the
brake/parking lamps is spliced from the rear lamp
harness. The hamess is at the rear bumper
crossmember. A plastic strap binds the hamess. Tape
wrapped around the harness prevents short circuits.
The 8 wires have the following functions:
• Orange — The 30-amp fused battery feed
• Blue — An auxiliary circuit for electric trailer
brakes
• Brown — The taillamps and the license lamps
• Light green — The backup lamps
• Dark green — The right turn signal and the
stoplamp
• Yellow — The left turn signal and the stoplamp
• White (heavy gage) — Ground
• White (light gage) — The center high-mounted
stop lamp
The UY7 option does not include a connector at the
end of the harness. A qualified technician must
wire the connector following production.
1. Attach the trailer harness wiring to the trailer
2. Strap the hamess wiring to the vehicle in
a manner that allows slack in order to prevent the
following conditions:
• Bending
• Binding
• Breaking
• The hamess drags on the ground.
3. Secure with tape or straps the trailer portion of
the hamess to the trailer tongue in order to
prevent the harness from dragging on the ground.
4. Secure the harness when the hamess is
not in use.
4.1. Wrap the harness together.
4.2. Bind the harness with a tie strap in order to
avoid damage.
4.3. Store the harness behind the rear bumper
on the fuel tank.
4.4. Strap the harness with a band or a
tie strap.
The second wiring harness option is the UY1 camper
wiring harness. The UY1 harness is under the
vehicle. The harness is inside the frame rail. The
hamess is even with the front of the pickup box on the
driver’s side.
The UY1 harness is for the brake/parking lamps. The
harness has an auxiliary power feed.
The wires have the following functions:
• Dark blue — A 30-amp fused auxiliary power
circuit. The other end of the wire is taped to
the wiring near the junction block On the cowl.
• Dark green — The right turn signal and the
stoplamp
• Light green — The backup lamps
• Yellow — The left turn signal and the stoplamp
• Brown — The taillamps
• White — Ground
 1. Route the trailer hamess wiring between the
frame and the bumper, or the camper and the
body, in such a manner that slack remains in the
harness in order to prevent the following
conditings:
• Bending
• Binding
• Breaking : ;
• The harness drags on the ground.
2. Tape or strap the trailer portion of the harness
(if used) to the vehicle in order to prevent the
harness from dragging. ■
3. Secure the harness when the wiring is not in use/
3.1. Wrap the harness together. -
3.2. Bind the harness with a tie strap in order ■to:
prevent damage.
Description and Operation
Power and Grounding Circuit Description
Power Distribution
Power supply for the vehicle originates from the
battery(s). From the battery(s), voltage is supplied to
the Generator, Starter Motor Solenoid, Mega Fuse
Block (Police Package), Underhood Fuse Block
and Auxiliary Fuse Block (Police Package) through
CKT 2 (RED).
The Underhood Fuse Block supplies power to various
components within the vehicle. From the Underhood
Fuse Block, power is sent to the IP Fuse Block through
either CKT 42, 142, or 242 (RED). The Underhood
Fuse Block along with the IP Fuse Block distribute
power to all the major and minor electrical systems
within the vehicle. See the Power Distribution
Schematics for other components.
Ground Distribution
Circuitry for grounding is used to complete the path for
current flow. Grounding circuits are primarily 150 or
451 circuit numbers. See Ground Distribution
Schematics for component grounding breakdown.
Auxiliary Battery
The auxiliary battery circuit uses a relay to complete
the connection between the Auxiliary Battery and
the Remote Battery Stud located on the Underhood
Fuse Block.
Power to activate the Auxiliary Battery Relay comes
from the 4WD Fuse 24, through CKT 241 (BRN) when
the ignition switch is in the RUN position. The relay
is case grounded to complete the path for current flow.
With the relay activated, power from the Auxiliary
Battery runs through CKT 2 (BLK/RED) onto the
Remote Battery Stud.
Data Link Communications Circuit
Description
The Data Link Connector DLC connection is used as
an access point for different vehicle di agnostic ;
and programming functions, including those involving
the use of a scan tool. Three different types of
Serial Data Communications are accessibl e through 9
the DLC.
UART -9.. . . : .
The UART Serial Data communication relies on a
5 volt di gital signal for the exchange of data between
different control modules and to provide scan tool
diagnostic data. When the ignition switch is in the ■
RUN position and the UART line is at rest, i.e.
no communication taking place, the voltage'remains
HIGH at approximatel y 5 volts. When data,is
transmitted the voltage is pulled to ground,
approximately 0 volts.
The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System’s
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) utilizes UART
communications. The SDM uses UART serial data .
to allow communication with a scan tool for diagnostic
purposes. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s) stored
by the SDM can be retrieved, viewed and cleared with
the use a scan too l. A loss of UART communications
would prevent the scan tool from communicating
with the SDM during SIR system diagnosis.
Class 2
Modules on the Class 2 Data Line use State of Health
communication messages to control and monitor
other modules. Some control modules on the Class 2
communication system have the ability to recognize
other modules that are no longer communicating.
When this problem occurs, the module(s) that
recognize the problem may store one or more DTC’s
identifying the failed module. From the beginning
of a power mode, communications between modules
continues every 2 seconds. If the communication
time between modules passes 5 seconds a State of
Health DTC will set.
Failure to communicate with the Class 2 data circuit
could be anyone of the following faults:
• A faulty Class 2 data line, CKT 1807 (PPL)
®A fault in the modules power circuit
• A fault in modules ground circuits
• A faulty control module
Communication failure DTC’s are identified as 5 digit
codes, with the first digit being U. The remaining
digits are numeric and refer to the specific system that
has failed.
E&C Bus
The Entertainment and Comfort (E&C) Bus has limited
function capability. By connecting a scan tool, the
radio receiver can be requested to transmit it’s
hardware, software, and calibration values through the
E&C Bus to the scan tool.
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
(Remote Keyless Entry) Programming
The DLC provides a connection to the Remote Control
door Lock Receiver to a ll ow the programming of the
receiver to recognize the specific Remote Control Door
Lock Transmitters used. If the Remote Control Door
Lock Receiver will not respond to programming
input, refer to Unable to Reprogram Remote Keyless
Entry Control Module diagnostic table.
Selectable Transfer Case Control Module
(TCCM) Diagnostics
The Selectable Transfer Case Control Module has
l imited self-diagnostic capabilities. If the TCCM
diagnostics are not functioning properly follow
Obtaining Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Refer to
O b ta in in g D ia g n o stic T rouble C odes.
Cigar Lighter/Auxiliary Outlet Circuit
Description
The Cigar Lighter/Auxiliary Power Circuit allows for
one cigar lighter for the front passengers, and
four auxiliary power connectors to supply power for
accessory equipment.
The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel and is supplied power through
CKT 640 (ORN). The first two auxiliary power
connectors are mounted underneath the cigar lighter,
and powered through CKT 840 (ORN). Next auxiliary
power connector is located in the center floor
console for rear passenger use, also powered through
CKT 840 (ORN). Last auxiliary power connector is
located in the rear cargo area, passenger side,
powered through CKT 840 (ORN), connected through
the convenience center, connector C280.
Inline Harness Connector End Views

C100 (Inline to l/P Harness)

J -trrin a X
A1[ m ■ GSS3
- C BB |e i
S § § B ^ A1
U hH e x i
■ a i
i
* M-Jb b
□ n ? ■ .Do
□ CCSIl □
^ n n n o n ■
£r □
I-' a ■ ■
E >\ B B ffl □ AS mm
0 / ac=aa
■
-------------- , A8[| n
.0 * - a b jnu- E8
/

62441

• 12146331 . • 12176348
Connector Part • 36 Way F Metri-Pack 150, 180, Connector Part * 36 Way M Metri-Pack 150, 180,
Information 630 Series (LT GRY) Information 630 Series (LT GRY)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Stoplamp Switch Output Stoplamp Switch Output
A1 WHT 17 A1 WHT 17
(Pickup) (Pickup)
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
A1 RED 542 Type II Fuse A1 RED 542 Type II Fuse
(Suburban/Utility) (Suburban/Utility)
Ignition Feed - Ignition Feed -
A2 PNK 1020 Off, Run, Crank A2 PNK 1020 Off, Run, Crank
(Automatic Transmission) (Automatic Transmission)
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
A3 ORN 1440 A3 ORN 1440
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
A4 DKGRN 29 Horn Feed A4 DKGRN 29 Horn Feed
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
A6 RED 42 A6 RED 42
Type II Fuse Type II Fuse
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
A7 RED 142 A7 RED 142
Type II Fuse Type II Fuse
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
A8 RED 242 A8 RED 242
Type II Fuse Type II Fuse
B1 LT BLU 20 Stop Lamp Feed B1 LT BLU 20 Stop Lamp Feed
B2 WHT 1294 EVO Solenoid Feed B2 WHT 1294. EVO Solenoid Feed
B3 BRN 1295 EVO Solenoid Output B3 BRN 1295 EVO Solenoid Output
Vehicle Speed
B5 DKGRN 389 Vehicle Speed Signal (Gas) B5 DK GRN 399 Signal (Gas)
B6 — __ Not Used B6 __ ■ Not Used
B7 PPL 1807 Serial Data Class 2 B7 PPL 1807 Serial Data Class 2
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
B8 ORN 1040 Type III Fuse B8 ORN 1040 Type III Fuse
(Suburban/Utility) (Suburban/Utility)
C1 BLK 28 Horn Relay Output Goil C1 BLK 28 Horn Relay Output Coil
Fuel Gauge Sensor Fuel Gauge Sensor
C2 PPL 30 C2 PPL 30
Signal (Gas) Signal (Gas)
Transmission Mounted
Transmission Mounted
Neutral Safety Switch
C2 YEL 1737 Neutral Safety Switch C2 YEL 1737
Output-Park/Neutral
Output-Park/Neutral (Diesel)
(Diesel)
 C100 (Inline to l/P Harness) (cont’d)

T------------— ----- ^
*U“ a b
□H B m V A11 "■ £ ■ m csa l i
■jf ■ ■ B
m | ei
RHrBB ■ aff l
0a ° nu i S
a I
1
“0
K> □ O Q □ I Srij3
^ □ □ □ □ n @ m
a 0 □
b|
i
E> BBaa □ as B B
mb M
------------- \ A 8| .0..T
- nfS ■T JlJs
r
| E8
&

62441

• 12146331 • 12176348
Connector Part • 36 Way F Metri-Pack 150, 180, Connector Part ® 36 Way M Metri-Pack 150, 180,
Information 630 Series (LT GRY) Information 630 Series (LT GRY)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No, Function
Charge Indicator Charge Indicator Lamp
C3 BRN 25 Lamp Output C3 BRN 25 Output
Water Heater Control Water Heater Control
C4 GRY/BLK 1596 Solenoid Output C4 GRY/BLK 1596 Solenoid Output
(Suburban/Utility) (Gas) (Suburban/Utility) (Gas)
Vehicle Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor
C4 PPL/WHT 821 C4 PPL/WHT 821
Signal (Diesel) Signal (Diesel)
Transmission Mounted Transmission Mounted
Neutral Safety Switch Neutral Safety Switch
C5 DKGRN 822 C5 DK GRN 1737
Output, Park/Neutral Output, Park/Neutral
(Diesel) (Diesel)
Brake Warning Indicator Brake Warning Indicator
C6 TAN/WHT 33 C6 TAN/WHT 33
Lamp Output Lamp Output
Fuse Output Ignition I, Fuse Output Ignition 1,
C7 PNK 139 C7 PNK 139
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
ABS Failure Indicator Lamp ABS Failure Indicator Lamp
C8 LT GRN 867 C8 LT GRN 867
Output Output

D1 Diagnostic Signal, ABS Diagnostic Signal, ABS

TAN/WHT 799 D1 TAN/WHT 799
(Diesel) (Diesel)
Cruise Control Cruise Control
D2 LT BLU/ LT BLU/
396 Signal, Engaged D2 396 Signal, Engaged
BLK BLK
(Automatic Transmission) (Automatic Transmission)
Cruise Control, Clutch Cruise Control, Clutch
D2 BRN/WHT 379 Pedal Switch Output D2 BRN/WHT 379 Pedal Switch Output
(Manual Transmission) (Manual Transmission)
Vehicle Speed Signal, Vehicle Speed Signal,
D2 YEL/BLK 1827 128,000 Pulses Per Mile D2 YEL/BLK 1827 128,000 Pulses Per Mile
(Diesel) (Diesel)
D3 LT GRN 24 Backup Lamp Feed D3 LT GRN 24 Backup Lamp Feed
Vehicle Speed Signal,
DK GRN/ Vehicle Speed Signal, DK GRN/
D4 817 D4 817 4000 Pulses Per
WHT 4000 Pulses Per Mile (Gas) WHT
Mile (Gas)
Glow Plug Indicator Lamp Glow Plug Indicator Lamp
D4 DKBLU 507 D4 DK BLU 507
Signal (Diesel) Signal (Diesel)
S4WD Front Wheel Lock S4WD Front Wheel Lock
D6 BLK/WHT 1695 D6 BLK/WHT 1695
Telltale Feed Telltale Feed
Air Conditioning Switch Air Conditioning Switch
07 LT GRN 66 Output
D7 ^LT GRN 66 Output
 C100 (Inline to l/P Harness) (cont’d)

T— ----- — ---- —^ ✓? 3 = = = = = 3 > v

“tr rsB m
, n S R nn \ ai A11 m ■ B ca
■ C " B | El
■
U n H nn
D BB
IT0U■ rJ
m I ir T
J □ O □ □ □
^ nnnan 0
■
V ac=aa ■ □
E>I B B fflD as ac=aa ■
m a
cssa
--------------*\ A 8I 1 * - a b ■ f E8
m f

62441
• 12146331 • 12176348
Connector Part • 36 Way F Metri-Pack 150, 180, Connector Part • 36 Way M Metrl-Pack 150,180,
Information 630 Series (LT GRY) information 630 Series (LT GRY)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output Ignition 3, Fuse Output Ignition 3,
D8 BRN 441 D8 BRN 441
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Starter Relay Feed Starter Relay Feed
E1 PPL/WHT 1035 For Relay Coil E1 PPL/WHT 1035 For Relay Coil
(Manual Transmission) (Manual Transmission)
Fuse Output Crank, Fuse Output Crank,
E1 PPL 806 Type III Fuse E1 PPL 806 Type III Fuse
(Automatic Transmission) (Automatic Transmission)
Ignition Switch Output, Ignition Switch Output,
E2 PNK 3 Ignition 1 E2 PNK 3 Ignition 1
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
E3 RED 342 Type II Fuse E3 RED 342
Type II Fuse
Fuse Output Ignition 3, Fuse Output Ignition 3,
E5 BRN 241 E5 BRN 241
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
E6 ORN 1840 E6 ORN 1840
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
.E7 — — Not Used E7 — — Not Used
E8 WHT 121 Tachometer Signal E8 WHT 121 Tachometer Signal
Connector Part 12065170 Connector Part • 12065172
Information 1 Way F Metri-Pack (BLK) Information • 1 Way M Metri-Pack (BLK)
Circuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output - Battery Fuse Output - Battery
RED 702 Type I Fuse
RED 702
Type I Fuse

C102 (Inline to Forward Lamp Harness, Suburban/Utility)

it□ □ □ □ □ U i
:□ □ □ □ □ o

Connector Part 15305054 Connector Part 15305057

Inform ation 12 Way F Metri-Pack (BLK) Information 12 Way M fie tri-P a ck (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
High Beam
LT GRN 11 High Beam Headlamp Feed LT GRN 11
Headlamp Feed
Not Used Not Used
BRN Park Lamp Feed BRN Park Lamp Feed
Turn Signal Lamp Feed, Turn Signal Lamp Feed,
LT BLU 14 LT BLU 14
Left Front Left Front
Turn Signal Lamp Feed, Turn Signal Lamp Feed,
DK BLU 15 Right Front
DK BLU 15 Right Front
TAN 12 Low Beam Headlamp Feed TAN 12 Low Beam Headlamp Feed
G DKGRN 29 Horn Feed DKGRN 29 Horn Feed
Sensor Return Sensor Return (w/Outside
BRN 718
(Utility and Suburan)
BRN 718 Temperature Sensor)
 C102 (Inline to Forward Lamp Hamess, Suburban/Utility) (cont’d)

F
□
M M

Connector Part 15305054 Connector Part 15305057

Information 12 Way F Mefri-Pack (BLK) Information 12 Way M Metrl-Pack (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Windshield Washer Pump Windshield Washer Pump
RED 228 RED 228
Motor Feed Motor Feed
Rear Window Washer Rear Window Washer
DKGRN 392 DK GRN 392
Pump Motor Feed Pump Motor Feed
Outside Ambient Outside Ambient
LT GRN/ LT GRN/ Temperature Sensor Signal
735 Temperature Sensor Signal 735
BLK BLK (w/Outside Temperature
(Utility and Suburan)
Sensor)
M Not Used M Not Used

C102 (Inline to Forward Lamp Harness, Pick-Up)

p\U"l-- - - - _ Lft
d 1

F i□ □ □ □ □ dl A
I
M e

366150

Connector Part • 15305056 Connector Part 15305048

Information • 12 Way F Metri-Pack (BLK) Information 12 Way M Metri-Pack (BLK)

High Beam
LT GRN 11 High Beam Headlamp Feed LT GRN 11
Headlamp Feed
Not Used Not Used
BRN Park Lamp Feed BRN Park Lamp Feed
14
Turn Signal Lamp Feed, Turn Signal Lamp Feed,
LT BLU D LT BLU 14
Left Front Left Front
 C102 (inline to Forward Lamp Harness, Pick-Up) (cont’d)

A
n s
M G

366150

Connector Part :• 15305056 ; Connector Part 15305048

Inform ation •. 12 Way F Metri-Pack-;(BLK) Inform ation 12 Way M Metri-Pack (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color No. Function
Turn Signal Lamp Feed, Turn Signal Lamp Feed,
DK BLU 15 DKBLU 15
Right Front Right Front
TAN 12 Low Beam Headlamp Feed TAN 12 Low Beam Headlamp Feed
DKGRN .29 Horn Feed DKGRN 29 Horn Feed
Not U s e d . H Not Used
Windshield Washer Pump Windshield Washer Pump
RED 228 RED 228.
Motor Feed Motor Feed
Rear Window Washer Rear Window Washer
DKGRN 392 DK GRN 392
Pump Motor Feed - Pump Motor Feed
L-M Not Used -■..L-M • Not Used

C103 (Inline to Tail Lamp Hamess)

_ _
V—\ J
:o
o'

I B|

40394

12129565 12129566
Connector Part 4 Way F Metri-Pack 280 Connector Part 4 Way M Metrl-Pack 280
Inform ation Series (GRY) Information Series (GRY

LT GRN 24 Back Up Lamp Feed ■ LT GRN 24 Back Up Lamp Feed

GRY 120 Fuel Pump Motor Feed GRY 120 Fuel Pump Motor Feed
Fuse Output - Ignition I Fuse Output - Ignition I
PNK 639 . PNK 639
Type III Fuse (Diesel) Type III Fuse (Diesel)
Engine Control Module Engine Control Module
BLK/WHT 451 BLK/WHT 451.
Ground (Diesel) Ground (Diesel)
 C104 (Inline to Rear Lamp Harness)

r x z ..p n

... _____________ 9 ' ......................

, q r— -----
....— — ........
E D C B 3
b
W- ..■.......-..— — - — .— —KJ
A H
I 'i® 0 ® 0 © 0 @ 0 © r
-L-. .. . r9

280746

• 12084891 ® 12186400
Connector Part ® 5 Way F Metri-Pack 280 Connector Part ® 5 Way M Metri-Pack 280
Information Series (GRY) Information Series (GRY
C ircuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
A BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed A BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed
Fuel Gauge Sensor Signal Fuel Gauge Sensor Signal
B PPL 30 B PPL ' 30
(Diesel Only) (Diesel Only)
C YEL 18 Stop Lamp Feed, LR C YEL 18 Stop Lamp Feed, LR
D DKGRN 19 Stop Lamp Feed, RR D DK GRN- 19 Stop Lamp Feed, RR
.E WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output E WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output

C107 (Inline to Oxy Sensor Jumper)

62447

• 12052848 • 1214107
Connector Part • 6-F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part • 6 M Hetri-Pack 150
Information Series (Black) Information Series (Black)
Circuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. ’ Function No. Function I
Oxygen Sensor Return Left Oxygen Sensor Return Left
A TAN/WHT 1669 A TAN/WHT 1669
Rear of Catalytic Converter Rear of Catalytic Converter
Oxygen Sensor Signal Left Oxygen Sensor Signal Left
B PPL/WHT 1668 B . PPL/WHT 1668
Rear of Catalytic Converter Rear of Catalytic Converter
C BLK 150 Ground C BLK 150 Ground !
 C107 (Inline to Oxy Sensor Jumper) (cont’d)

PI ' f l ' at
I]
la A
V -— -— 4

12052848 1214107
Connector Part 6 F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part 6 M IVIetri-Pack 150
Information Series (Black) Information Series (Black)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No* Function
Fuse Output - Ignition 1 Fuse Output - Ignition 1
PNK 539 D PNK 539
-Type III Fuse -Type III Fuse
Oxygen Sensor Return Oxygen Sensor Return
TAN 1671 Right Rear of Catalytic TAN 1671 Right Rear of Catalytic
Converter Converter
Oxygen Sensor Signal Oxygen Sensor Signal
PPL 1670 Right Rear of Catalytic PPL 1670 Right Rear of Catalytic
Converter Converter

C108 (Inline to Grill Lights/Speakers) Police Package

• 12146045 • 12103974
Connector Part • 5-Way F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part • 5-Way M Metri-Pack 150
Information (Natural) Information (Natural)
C ircuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No, Function
A DKGRN 961 Speaker Return, RF A DKGRN 961 Speaker Return, RF
B LT BLU 962 Speaker Return, RR B LT BLU 962 Speaker Return, RR
C GRY 963 Speaker Return, LF C GRY 963 Speaker Retur
D BRN 964 Speaker Return, LR D BRN 964 Speaker Return, LR
E BLK 965 Ground E BLK 965 Ground
 C109 (Police Package)

Connector Part • 1219565 Connector Part 1219600

Inform ation • 4-Way F Metri-Pack 280 (Gray) Inform ation 4-Way M Metri-Pack 280 (Gray)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output ■ Battery Fuse Output ■ Battery
RED 902 RED 902
Type I Fuse Type I Fuse
Fuse Output - Battery Fuse Output ■ Battery
RED 902 RED 902
Type I Fuse Type I Fuse
BLK 950 Ground BLK 950 Ground
BLK 950 Ground BLK 950 Ground

C110 (Inline to Inflatable Restraint Arming Sensor)

LJ

Connector Part • 12077988 Connector Part 12084180

Information • 2 F m/P 280 Series (YEL) Information 2 M M/P 280 Series (YEL)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No, Function
YEL 1834 SIR Forward Sensor Signal YEL 1834 SIR Forward Sensor Signal
BLK/WHT 1751 SIR Ground BLK/WHT 1751 SIR Ground
 H

H G F E
A B C D

229958

Connector Part 12047931 Connector Part • 12047937

Information 8 M Metri-Pack 150s (BLK) Information • 8 F Metrl-Pack 150, (BLK)
Circuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Coolant Temperature Coolant Temperature
YEL 410 Sensor Signal
YEL 410 Sensor Signal
Crankshaft Position Sensor Crankshaft Position Sensor
YEL 573 Signal
YEL 573 Signal
Not Used Not Used
Manifold Absolute Pressure Manifold Absolute Pressure
LT GRN 432 LT GRN 432
Sensor Signal Sensor Signal
Reference Voltage Reference Voltage
GRA 416 Feed-5 volt Reference
GRA 416 Feed-5 volt Reference
Fuel Solenoid Fuel Solenoid
BLK 491 BLK 491
Return-Closure Return-Closure
BLK 452 Sensor Return BLK 452 Sensor Return
Manifold Absolute Manifold Absolute
TAN 472 TAN 472
Temperature Sensor Signal Temperature Sensor Signal
 C113 (Diesel)

/ 0 013 E HR / 0 0 .0 E I1 1
E Q Iiii IS® ED0 E t
I DU@ 10/ 9^101]S i ] 11 /

62430

Connector Part • 12110779 Connector Part • 12041139

Inform ation ® 15F Metri-Pa.ck 280, (BLK) Inform ation - • IS M "Metrl-Pack 280, (BLK)
C ircuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No, Function No. Function

A DKBLU/ Engine Shutoff Solenoid DKBLU/ . Engine Shutoff Solenoid

259 A/.. WHT 259
WHT Output Output
Injection Timing Stepper Injection Timing Stepper
B TAN/BLK 1030 B TAN/BLK 1030
Motor Feed-Coil A-Low Motor Feed-Coil A-Low
Injection Timing Stepper Injection Timing Stepper
C RED/BLK 1031 C RED/BLK 1031
Motor Feed-Coil A-High Motor Feed-Coil A-High
Injection Timing Stepper Injection Timing Stepper
D ORN/BLK 1032 D ORN/BLK 1032
Motor Feed-Coil B-Low Motor Feed-Coil B-Low
Injection Timing Stepper Injection Timing Stepper
E YEL/BLK 1033 Motor Feed-Coil B-High
E YEL/BLK 1033
Motor Feed-Coil B-High

F
Fuse Output-lgnition 1- Fuse Output-lgnition 1-
PNK 439 F PNK 439
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor
G BRN/WHT 633 G BRN/WHT 633
Signal Signal
Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor
H ORN 1799 H ORN 1799
Signal-High Resolution Signal-High Resolution
Camshaft Position Sensor Camshaft Position Sensor
J PNK/BLK 632 J PNK/BLK 632
Return Return
K YEL 1578 Fuel Temperature Signal K YEL 1578 Fuel Temperature Signal
L LT GRN 260 Fuel Solenoid Module Feed L LT GRN 260 Fuel Solenoid Module Feed
M LT GRN 260 Fuel Solenoid Module Feed M LT GRN 260 Fuel Solenoid Module Feed

N GRA 474 Reference Voltage

N GRA 474 Reference Voltage
Feed-5 volt Reference Feed-5 volt Reference
Fuel Solenoid Closure Fuel Solenoid Closure
P RED 313 P RED 313
Signal Signal

R BRN 104
Fuse Output-Glow
R - BRN 104 Fuse Output-Glow
Plug-Type III Fuse Plug-Type III Fuse
 0115 (Inline to Generator, Diesel)

Connector Part 12052641 Connector Part 12052647

Inform ation 2F M/P 150 (Black) Inform ation 2M M/P 150 (Black)
C ircuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
WHT 121 Tachometer Signal WHT 121 Tachometer Signal
Charge Indicator Lamp Charge Indicator Lamp
BRN 25 Output ___ ____
BRN 25
Output

C116 (Inline to Windshield Wiper Jumper Harness)

12110293
® 12129615
Connector Part Connector Part 3M Metri-Pack 150
• 3F Metri-Pack 150 Series (BLK)
Information Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Rear Window Washer Rear Window Washer
DKGRN 392 DKGRN 392
Pump Motor Feed Pump Motor Feed
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
Windshield Washer Pump Windshield Washer Pump
RED 228 RED 228 Motor Feed
Motor Feed
 C117 (Natural Gas)

f \

3 0 E lk j e m t n c e
[X ] [ J ] [ c ] QT| \T }
3 0 [ ?
9 J

288213

• 12065426 • 12052189
Connector Part • 10F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part • 10M Metri-Pack 150
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
A YEL 492 MAF Sensor Signal A YEL 492 MAF Sensor Signal
B DK GRN 389 Vehicle Speed Signal B DKGRN 389 Vehicle Speed Signal
C PNK 639 Fuse Output C PNK 639 Fuse Output
D YEL 573 CNP Sensor Signal D YEL 573 CNP Sensor Signal
E TAN 1667 Oxygen Sensor Return E TAN 1667 Oxygen Sensor Return
F PPL 1666 Oxygen Sensor Signal F PPL 1666 Oxygen Sensor Signal
G TAN/WHT 1653 Oxygen Sensor Return G TAN/WHT 1653 Oxygen Sensor Return
H PPL/WHT 1665 Oxygen Sensor Signal H PPL/WHT 1665 Oxygen Sensor Signal
J BRN 919 —• J BRN 919 _

K BRN/WHT 419 Check Engine Lamp K BRN/WHT 419 Check Engine Lamp
 C118 (Natural Gas)

r
n<i o n E l n ] e ]
r

*— v ^ [ H 0 0 [j my 9
r x i [ b] [c ] [ d] c u

J
288213

• 12065425 • 12045808
Connector Part • 10F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part • 10M Metri-Pack 150
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Coolant Temperature
A YEL 410 Coolant Temperature Signal A .. YEL 410
Signal
Manifold Absolute Manifold Absolute
B TAN 472 B TAN 472
Temperature Signal Temperature Signal
C DK BLU 417 Reference Voltage C DKBLU 417 Reference Voltage
D ' GRY 474 Reference Voltage D ■ GRY 474 Reference Voltage
.. i LT GRN 432 MAP Sensor Signal E -"‘ LT GRN 432 MAP Sensor Signal
■ F ■ BLK 470 Sensor Signal F BLK 470 Sensor Signal
EGR Solenoid Position EGR Solenoid Position
G BRN 1456 G BRN 1456
Signal Signal
H — - — - Not Used H — — Not Used
J PNK 902 — J PNK 902 —
K — — Not Used — — — Not Used
 • 12124107
12052846'
Connector Part Connector Part • 6M Metri-Pack 150
6F Sietri-Pack 150 Series (BLK)
Information Information Series (BLK)
C ircuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
GRY 120 Fuel Pump Motor Feed GRY 120 Fuel Pump Motor Feed
GRY/BLK 917 GRY/BLK 917
PPL/WHT 918 PPL/WHT 918
PPL 30 Fuel Gauge Sensor Signal PPL 30 Fuel Gauge Sensor Signal
Not Used Not Used
ORN 40 Fuse Output ORN 40 Fuse Output

0120 (Inline to 4WD Indicator)

40394

12129600
12129566
Connector Part Connector Part 4M Metri-Pack 280
4F Metri-Pack 280 Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Information

4WD Switch Signal - Low 4WD Switch Signal - Low

GRY/BLK 1694 GRY/BLK 1694
(Automatic Only) (Automatic Only)
4WD Front Wheel Lock 4WD Front Wheel Lock
BLK/WHT 1695 BLK/WHT 1695
Telltale Feed Telltale Feed
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
Fuse Output Ignition 3 Fuse Output Ignition 3
BRN 241 BRN 241
Type III Fuse________ Type ill Fuse________
 C122 (M30) Engine Harness
■
5

ll
a

mooooo f ))
U
u
R

283826

• 12160490 • 12160545
• Harness Side 20 Way F • Transmission Side 20 Way M
Connector Part Metri-Pack 100W Series Connector Part Metri-Pack 100S Series
inform ation Sealed (GRY) information Sealed (GRY)
C ircuit
Pin Wire Color
No* Function
Pin Wire Color C|£u
No.
it Function
A LT GRN 1222 Shift Solenoid A Output A LT GRN 1222 Shift Solenoid A Output
B YEL/BLK 1223 Shift Solenoid B Output B YEL/BLK 1223 Shift Solenoid B Output
Transmission Force Transmission Force
C RED/BLK 1228 C RED/BLK 1228
Motor Feed Motor Feed
LT BLU/ Transmission Force LT BLU/ Transmission Force
D 1229 D
WHT
WHT Motor Return Motor Return
Fuse Output, Off, Run, Fuse Output, Off, Run,
E PNK 1020 ; Crank - Type III E PNK 1020 Crank - Type III
Fuse Sensor Fuse Sensor
Transmission Temperature Transmission Temperature
L YEL/BLK 1227 L YEL/BLK 1227
Sensor Signal Sensor Signal
M BLK 452 Sensor Return (Diesel) M BLK 452 Sensor Return (Diesel)
M BLK 470 Sensor Return (Gas) M BLK 470 Sensor Return (Gas)
Transmission Pressure Transmission Pressure
N PNK 1224 N PNK 1224
Switch Signal - Bit 1 Switch Signal - Bit 1
Transmission Pressure Transmission Pressure
P RED 1226 P RED 1226
Switch Signal - Bit 3 Switch Signal - Bit 3
Transmission Pressure Transmission Pressure
R DK BLU 1225 R DKBLU 1225
Switch Signal - Bit 2 Switch Signal - Bit 2
Shift Solenoid Output - Shift Solenoid Output -
S WHT 687 S WHT 687
3/2 (Light Duty) 3/2 (Light Duty)
Torque Converter Clutch Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid Output, Pulse Solenoid Output, Pulse
S BRN 418 Width Modulation S BRN . 418
Width Modulation
(Heavy Duty) (Heavy Duty)
Torque Converter Clutch Torque Converter Clutch
T TAN/BLK 422 Solenoid Output T TAN/BLK 422 Solenoid Output
(Light Duty) (Light Duty)
Torque Converter Clutch Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid Output, Pulse Solenoid Output, Pulse
U BRN 418 U BRN 418
Width Modulation Width Modulation
(Light Duty) (Light Duty)
 C130 (Inline to Tail and Stop Lamp Ext., Gas)

d_d
|AJ C
0 0 r
=>oo n = □
fB| D
E ll

TT

• 12160482 12160825
Connector Part Connector Part 4M Metrl-Pack 150
• 4F Metri-Pack 150 Series (BLK)
Inform ation Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Reference Voltage Feeds GRY Reference Voltage Feeds
GRY' 474 474
Volt Reference Volt Reference
Fuel Tank Pressure DKGRN Fuel Tank Pressure
DKGRN 890 Sensor Signal 890 Sensor Signal
BLK 470 Sensor Return BLK 470 Sensor Return
PPL . 1589 Fuel Gauge Sensor Signal PPL 1589 Fuel Gauge Sensor Signal

C131 (Inline to Active Transfer Case Shift Control Hamess)

.." L ,.......J T

.:
...
.j

m
rVi[
[fill
J —
V

V
v •
V.

Connector Part • 12059472 Connector Part • 12052200

Information • 7F Metri-Pack MXD (BLK) Information • 7M Metri-Pack MXD (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No* Function No. Function
Transfer Case Lock Transfer Case Lock
TAN 1569 TAN 1569 Solenoid Output
Solenoid Output
GRY/BLK 1570 Front Axle Actuator Output GRY/BLK 1570 Front Axle Actuator Output
Fuse Output Battery, ORN Fuse Output Battery,
ORN 1640 1640 Type III Fuse
Type III Fuse______
GRY/BLK 1694 S4WD Switch Signal, Low GRY/BLK 1694 S4WD Switch Signal, Low
Transfer Case Motor
BLK 1552 BLK 1552 Transfer Case Motor
Feed, Clockwise Feed, Clockwise
S4WD Front Wheel Lock S4WD Front Wheel Lock
BLK/WHT 1695 BLK/WHT 1895 Telltale Feed
Telltale Feed
Transfer Case Motor Feed, Transfer Case Motor Feed,
RED 1553 RED 1553 Counter Clockwise
Counter Clockwise
 C132 (Inline to Active Transfer Case Shift Control Harness)

f GO rol [F] \]
r @ §0 E [ k] [ h]

Lyjl ®@[j H r 1 E [3 HD1d dJ |

9 J
288213

• 12065426 • 12186882
Connector Part • 10F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part • 10M Metri-Pack 150
Information Series (GRY) - Information Series (GRY)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No- Function No, Function
Vehicle Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor
A YEL 400 A YEL 400
Signal Signal
Vehicle Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor
B PPL 401 B PPL 401 Return
Return
LT GRN/ Reference Voltage Feed, LT GRN/ - 431 Reference Voltage Feed,
C 431 C
BLK 8 Volt Reference BLK 8 Volt Reference
Transfer Case Encoder Transfer Case Encoder
D BLK/WHT 1554 D BLK/WHT 1554
Signal Return Signal Return
Transfer Case Position Transfer Case Position
E BRN/WHT 1555 Switch Encoder Signal, E BRN/WHT 1555 Switch Encoder Signal,
Channel P Channel P
Transfer Case Position Transfer Case Position
F RED/WHT 1556 Switch Encoder Signal, F RED/WHT 1556 Switch Encoder Signal,
Channel C Channel C
DK BLU/ Transfer Case Encoder DK BLU/ Transfer Case Encoder
G 1557 G WHT
1557
WHT Signal, Channel A Signal, Channel A
Transfer Case Encoder Transfer Case Encoder
H YEL/BLK 1558 H YEL/BLK 1558
Signal, Channel B Signal, Channel B
Vehicle Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor
J LT BLU 2221 J LT BLU 2221
Signal Signal
Vehicle Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor
K DKGRN 2222 K DK GRN 2222
Return Return
 C140 (Inline to Transfer Case Shift Control Harness)

62447

12124107
• 12052848
Connector Part Connector Part 6M Metrl-Pack 150
Information • 6F Metrl-Pack 150 Series (BLK)
Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No: Function
Transfercase Encoder Transfercase Encoder
BLK/WHT 1554 BLK/WHT 1554
Signal Return Signal Return
Transfercase Position Transfercase Position
BRN/WHT 1555 Switch Encoder Signal BRN/WHT 1555 Switch Encoder Signal
Channel P Channel P
Transfercase Position Transfercase Position
RED/WHT 1556 Switch Encoder Signal - RED/WHT 1556 Switch Encoder Signal
Channel C Channel C
Transfercase Position Transfercase Position
DK BLU/ DK BLU/
1557 Switch Encoder Signal 1557 Switch Encoder Signal
WHT WHT
Channel A Channel B
Transfercase Position Transfercase Position
YEL/BLK 1558 Switch Encoder Signal YEL/BLK 1558 Switch Encoder Signal
Channel B Channel B
LT GRN/ Reference Voltage Feed LT GRN/ Reference Voltage Feed ■
431 431
BLK 8Volt Reference BLK 8Volt Reference
 C142 (Inline to Transfer Case Shift Control Harness)

Connector Part 15300002 Connector Part 15300027

Information 2F Metri-Pack 280 Series (BLK) Information 2F Metrl-Pack 280 Series (BLK)
Pin Circuit Circuit
Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Transfer Case Motor Feed Transfer Case Motor Feed
BLK 1552: BLK 1552
Clockwise. Clockwise
Transfer Case Motor Feed Transfer Case Motor Feed
RED 1553 RED .1553
Counter Clockwise' Counter Clockwise

.C200-(Diesel)-

n ____n R /r9=Q = s n
Jn J n H l In!
K i j H G Fl m in fln lln lln M nl
e I d I c l b I Ha
0 0 0 03 0
□ □ □ □ □
r\= s =
B 0 0 B 0
□ □ □ □ □
C=D ( >O
□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
|L | M N P T U V W X Yl|T|
RM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TEJTTTOMIununuitlJiruiilJi w r n r rB :
LT tr

62492

Connector Part • 12092249 Connector Part « 12092248

Information * 32F fietri-Pack 280 ACT (BLK) Information - 23M Metri-Pack 280 ACT (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
A WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output A WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output
Cruise Control Set/Coast Cruise Control Set/Coast
B DK BLU 84 B DK BLU 84
Switch Signal Switch Signal
Cruise Control Resume/ Cruise Control Resume/
C GRY/BLK 87 C GRY/BLK 87
Accel Switch Signal Accel Switch Signal
D — — Not Used *■ D Not Used
Service Throttle Soon Service Throttle Soon
E WHT/BLK 176 E' WHT/BLK 176
Indicator Lamp Output Indicator Lamp Output
Transmission Mounted Transmission Mounted
Neutral Safety Neutral Safety
F LT GRN 275 F LT GRN 275
Switch Output, Park Switch Output, Park
(Automatic Transmission) (Automatic Transmission)
 C200 (Diesel) (cont’d)

v__... n ....... .....m...t r ------- —rn-J

In Jn iJ M T n l Ini riflnl Ini In T Ini, i i i l 0
Ini 0 0 0 15!
K J H G| F l E I DICI-B IfA □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
c m ^ c .......) CZD DC D CZD t.. ...... .......... - -»
T U V w X V
] □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
—1
z

N P R] S 0 El 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
T D rin n u n n T [ □! |U| |U| |u n n i I u u U||U| nr
-o -

Connector Part • 12092249 Connector Part 12092248

inform ation • 32F Metrl-Pack 280 ACT (BLK) Inform ation 23M ile tri-P a ck 280 ACT (BLK)
C ircuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Vehicle Speed Signal - Vehicle Speed Signal -
G DKGRN 389 DKGRN 389
4000 Pulses per mile 4000 Pulses per mile
Brake Pedal Switch Output, Brake Pedal Switch Output,
PPL 420 PPL 420
Torque Converter Clutch Torque Converter Clutch
Engine Control Module Engine Control Module
BRN 437 BRN 437
Ground Ground
Engine Control Module Engine Control Module
BLK/WHT 451 BLK/WHT 451
Ground Ground
Water In Fuel Indicator Water In Fuel Indicator
YEL/BLK 508 YEL/BLK 508
Lamp Output Lamp Output
Transmission Position Transmission Position
M BLK/WHT 771 M BLK/WHT 771
Switch Signal, Bit 1 Switch Signal, Bit 1
Transmission Position Transmission Position
YEL 772 YEL 772
Switch Signal, Bit 2 Switch Signal, Bit 2
Transmission Position Transmission Position
GRY 773 GRY 773
Switch Signal, Bit 3 Switch Signal, Bit 23
Transmission Position Transmission Position
WHT 776 WHT 776
Switch Signal, Parity Bit Switch Signal, Parity Bit
Fuse Output - OFF/RUN - Fuse Output - OFF/RUN -
LT GRN 1478 LT GRN 147
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Coolant Temperature Coolant Temperature
DKGRN 35 DKGRN 35
Indicator Lamp Output Indicator Lamp Output
Oil Pressure Indicator Oil Pressure Indicator
TAN 31 TAN 31
Lamp Output Lamp Output
Check Engine Indicator Check Engine Indicator
BRN/WHT 419 V BRN/WHT 419
Lamp Output Lamp Output
W DKGRN 1614 Air Inlet Valve Motor Feed W DKGRN 1614 Air Inlet Valve Motor Feed
X -Z Not Used X -Z Not Used
 C200 (Gas)

r - r-
c h . . d ..:.' - ...... :.: .:.:::.r . r
A* B o h e r ; p H
IH H 3 H E E E IE M ]
c “1 ■
E 3 E B 0 E 3 E E 1 C I] p p m ||L |K J
■ 1c 3 : = siR
.......—

280749
•.12129430 • 12129429
Connector Part • 16F Metri-Pack 280 Series Gonnector Part • 16M Metrl-Pack 280 Series
Inform ation ACT (WHT) Information ACT (WHT)
C ircuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Transmission Mounted Transmission Mounted
173?
A .. ... YEL Neutral Safety Switch A YEL 1737 Neutral Safety Switch
Output, Park, Neutral Output, Park, Neutral
B- D — Not Used . B- D — — Not Used
Brake Pedal Switch Output, Brake Pedal Switch Output,
E PPL 420
Torque Converter CJulcii
E PPL 490
Torque Converter Clutch
Engine Control Module Engine Control Module
F BLK/WHT 451 F BLK/WHT 451
Ground Ground
Transmission Position Transmission Position
G BLK/WHT 771 Switch Signal, Bit 1 G BLK/WHT 771 Switch Signal, Bit 1
(Automatic Transmission) (Automatic T ransmission)
Transmission Position Transmission Position
H YEL 772 Switch Signal, Bit 2 H YEL 772 Switch Signal, Bit 2
(Automatic T ransmission) (Automatic Transmission)
Transmission Position Transmission Position
J /GRY 773 Switch Signal, Bit 3 J GRY 773 ' Switch Signal, Bit 3
(Automatic T ransmission) (Automatic Transmission)
Transmission Position Transmission Position
K .WHT 776 Switch Signal, Parity Bit . .. K ' WHT 776 Switch Signal, Parity Bit
(Automatic T ransmission) (Automatic T ransmission)
Coolant Temperature Coolant Temperature
L DKGRN 35 L DK GRN 35
Indicator Lamp Output Indicator Lamp Output
Oil Pressure Indicator Lamp Oil Pressure Indicator
M TAN 31 Output
M TAN 31
Lamp Output
Check Engine Indicator Check Engine Indicator
N BRN/WHT 419
Lamp Output
N BRN/WHT 419
Lamp Output
P DK GRN . 1614 Air Inlet Valve Motor Feed P DKGRN .1614 Air Inlet Valve Motor Feed
R -S — — Not Used ■R-S — —• Not Used
 C203 (Inline to A/C Harness)

38267

12129155
• 12199081
Connector Part Connector Part 2M Metrl-Pack 280
• 2F Metri-Pack 280 Series (BLK)
Information Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Function Pin Wire Color No. Function
No.
Fuse Output - Battery Fuse Output - Battery •
RED 542 RED 542
Type II Fuse Type II Fuse
Not Used Not Used

C204 (Diesel)

K J H Q F

• 12064769 • 12064770
Connector Part • 10F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part ® 10M Metri-Pack 150
Information Series (NAT) Information Series (NAT)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No, Function No. Function
Electronic Throttle Pedal Electronic Throttle Pedal
WHT/BLK 1164 WHT/BLK 1164 Position 5V Reference 1
Position 5V Reference 1
Electronic Throttle Pedal Electronic Throttle Pedal
DK BLU 1161 DK BLU 1161 Position Signal 1
Position Signal 1
Electronic Throttle Pedal Electronic Throttle Pedal
LT BLU 1162 LT BLU 1162
Position Signal 2 Position Signal 2
Electronic Throttle Pedal Electronic Throttle Pedal
BRN 1271 BRN 1271 Position Return 1
Position Return 1
Electronic Throttle Pedal Electronic Throttle Pedal
TAN 1274 TAN 1274 Position 5V Reference 2
Position 5V Reference 2
Electronic Throttle Pedal Electronic Throttle Pedal
YEL/BLK 1275 YEL/BLK 1275 Position 5V Reference 3
Position 5V Reference 3
 f -'v
K J H G F

f= A B C D E =2i
N. )

• 12064769 12064770
Connector Part • 10F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part 10M Metri-Pack 150
Information Series (NAT) Information Series (NAT)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Electronic Throttle Pedal Electronic Throttle Pedal
DK GRN 1163 G DKGRN 1163
Position Signal 3 Position Signal 3
Electronic Throttle Pedal Electronic Throttle Pedal
PPL 1272 M PPL 1272
Position Return 2 Position Return 2
Electronic Throttle Pedal Electronic Throttle Pedal
GRY 1273 GRY 1273
Position Return 3 Position Return 3
Cruise Control On Switch Cruise Control On Switch
GRY 397 GRY 397
Output _____________ Output

C205 (Convenience Center Inline to Front to Rear Harness)

ji

f1 J------I r— l

n
J_>
LZ] J

• 12129938 12129939
Connector Part Connector Part 2M Metri-Pack 150
• 2F Metri-Pack 150 Series (BLK)
Information Information Series (BLK)

Fuse Output - Battery Fuse Output ■ Battery ■

RED 542 RED 542
Type II Fuse Type II Fuse
Fuse Output - Ignition 3 Fuse Output - Ignition 3
BRN 341 BRN 341
Type III Fuse________ Type III Fuse
 C206 (Crossbody Harness Inline to Drivers Door Harness)

62460

12064763
• 12064762
Connector Part • 6F Metrl-Pack 150 Series (BLK)
Connector Part 6M Metri-Pack 150
Information Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
GRY 118 Speaker Return - Left Front GRY 118 Speaker Return - Left Front
TAN 201 Speaker Feed - Left Front TAN 201 Speaker Feed - Left Front
Fuse Output - Battery Fuse Output - Battery ■
ORN 40 ORN 40
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
BRN Park Lamp Feed BRN Park Lamp Feed
Power Window Master Power Window Master
LT BLU 167 Switch Output - Right Front LT BLU 167 Switch Output - Right Front
Window Down Window Down
 C207 (Crossbody Harness inline to Drivers Door Harness, w/o O/S Day/Night Mirror)

E F G H

D C B A
d h e B dcS d [E d
a
12064767
12064766
Connector Part Connector Part 8M Metri-Pack 150
8F Metrl-Pack 150 Series (BLK)
Information Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function; No. Function
Fuse Output - Battery - Fuse Output - Battery -
ORN 40 ORN 40
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Power Mirror Motor Feed - Power Mirror Motor Feed -
-YEL 1496 YEL - 1496
Common Common
Power Mirror Motor Feed - Power Mirror Motor Feed -
GRY 90 Right Horizontal Motor GRY 90 Right Horizontal Motor Left
Left Direction Direction
Power Mirror Motor Feed - Power Mirror Motor Feed -
PPL/WHT 889 Right Vertical Motor Down PPL/WHT 899 Right Vertical Motor Down
Direction Direction
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
BRN Park Lamp Feed BRN Park Lamp Feed
G-H Not Used G Not Used
 C207 (Crossbody Harness Inline to Drivers Door Harness, w/O/S Day/Night Mirror)

r A

iZ jr ..x
H f{ n
H F G H j k :l J K J H G F

J E D C B A A B C D E p
t=A V>
JJ

258237

• 12064871 * 12064872
Connector Part • 10F Metrl-Pack 150 Connector Part ® 10M Metri-Pack 150
Inform ation Series (BLU) Inform ation ■■■ Series (BLU)
C ircuit
Pin Circuit
Pin Wire Color Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
A PNK 40 A PNK 40
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Power Mirror Motor Feed, Power Mirror Motor Feed,
B~ YEL 1496 Common
B " YEL : 1496 Common
Power Mirror Motor Feed, Power Mirror Motor Feed,
C GRY 90 Right Hand Horizontal C GRY'. 90 Right Hand Horizontal
Motor, Inward Direction Motor, Inward Direction
Power Mirror Motor Feed, Power Mirror Motor Feed,
D 9 PPL/WHT 899 Right Hand Vertical Motor, D PPL/WHT 889 Right Hand Vertical Motor,
Downward Direction Downward Direction
E' BLK 150 Ground E BLK 150 Ground
F BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed F BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed
Automatic Day/Night Mirror Automatic Day/Night Mirror
G GRY 1690 Signal, Outside G GRY 1690 Signal, Outside
Automatic Day/Night Mirror Automatic Day/Night Mirror
H PNK 1691 H PNK 1691 Return, Outside
Return, Outside
Heated Mirror Heated Mirror
J ORN 267 J ORN 267
Element Feed Element Feed
Heated Mirror
K — — K — — Not Used
Element Feed
 C209 (Crossbody Hamess Inline to Drivers Door Harness)

1 1

'0 □)
0
II" ■ § @ ! ■
0:
3
U__ 1 1__ u T “— ------ -af—*

62455

• 12064998 • 12066195
Connector Part • 8 F Metrl-Pack 280 Connector Part • 8 M Metri-Pack 280
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output - Battery A ORN Fuse Output - Battery
A CRN 640 Type III Fuse
640 Type III Fuse
Power Door Lock Relay Power Door Lock Relay
B WHT 194 B WHT 194
Feed - Unlock Coil Feed - Unlock Coil
Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
C TAN 694 C TAN 694
Feed - Driver Door Unlock Feed - Driver Door Unlock
Power Door Lock Motor D GRY
Power Door Lock Motor
D GRY 295 Feed - Lock
295 Feed - Lock
Power Door Lock Relay Power Door Lock Relay
E LT BLU 195 E LT BLU 195
Feed - Lock - Coil Feed9 Lock - Coil
F BLK 150 Ground F BLK 150 Ground
 C210 (Convenience Center C210 (Convenience Center
Inline to l/P Harness) Inline to l/P Harness) (cont’d)

F E D C B A F E D C B A
f
I

283914

• 12110747 12110747
Connector Part ® ASM 6 Way F Metri- Pack 280 Connector Part ASM 6 Way F Metri- Pack 280
information Series (GRY) Information Series (GRY)

Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function

4WD Front Wheel Lock Fuse Output -

A BLK/WHT 1695 D YEL 343
Telltale Feed Accessory - Type
Trunk Release Switch
Fuse Output - Battery BLK 1576
B ORN 640 Output
Type III Fuse
BLK 28 Horn Relay Output - Coil
Fuse Output - Battery
C ORN 540
Type III Fuse

C211 (Inline to Seat Belt Switch, LH)

35424

Connector Part 12047662 Connector Part • 12047663

Information 2 F M/P 150 Series (BLK) Information • 2 M M/P 150 Series (BLK)

Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color

BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground

BLK/WHT 238 Seat Belt Switch Signal BLK/WHT 238 Seat Belt Switch Signal
 C212 (Inline to Power Seat, LH)

1
3)
0 B Q

Connector Part 12129135 Connector Part 12129136

Inform ation 4 F M/P 280 Series (BLK) Information 4 M M/P 280 Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output - Battery ■ Fuse Output - Battery •
ORN 540 Type III Fuse
ORN 540
Type III Fuse
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
Fuse Output - Battery ■ Fuse Output - Battery •
ORN 341 ORN 341
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Fuse Output - Battery Fuse Output - Battery ■
ORN 1840 Type'll!-Fuse" ORN 1840 Type HI Fuse
(with Heated Seats) (with Heated Seats)
Fuse Output - Battery ■ Fuse Output - Battery ■
ORN 640 ORN 640
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse

C213 (Inline to Door Harness RH)

rfS J i
— "y ^ —

cSbrfib d&cfi]
E
Connector Part 12064998 Connector Part • 12066195
Information 8 F M/P 280 Series (BLK) Information • 8 M M/P 280 Series (BLK)
Circuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No, Function No. Function
Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
TAN 294 TAN 294
Feed - Unlock Feed - Unlock
Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
GRY 295 GRY 295
Feed - Lock Feed - Lock
Power Door Lock Relay Power Door Lock Relay
WHT 194 WHT 195
Feed - Unlock Coil Feed - Unlock Coil
Power Door Lock Relay Power Door Lock Relay
LT BLU 195 LT BLU 195
Feed - Lock Coil Feed - Lock Coil
 C213 (Inline to Door Harness RH) (cont’d)

)s = t i
i

0
62468

Connector Part 12064998 Connector Part • 12066195

Information 8 F M/P 280 Series (BLK) Inform ation .• 8 M M/P 280 Series (BLK)
C ircuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Power Window Master Power Window Master
DK BLU 1307 DK BLU 1307
Switch Output - Lockout Switch Output - Lockout
Fuse Output Battery ■ Fuse Output Battery *
ORN 640 Type III Fuse
ORN 640 Type III Fuse
Power Window Master
Power Window Master
Switch Output - RF
G LT BLU 166 Switch Output - RF Window LT BLU 166 Window - Up Power
- Up Power Window
Window
Power Window Master Power Window Master
TAN 167 Switch Output - Right Front TAN 167 Switch Output - Right Front
Window Power Window Power

C214 (Inline to Door Harness RH)

12064761
12146407
Connector Part Connector Part 4 M Metri-Pack 150
4 F Metri-Pack 150 Series (BLK)
Information Information Series (BLK)

Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color

Function
Function
Power Mirror Motor Feed Power Mirror Motor Feed
YEL 1496 Common
YEL 1496 Common
Power Mirror Motor Feed • Power Mirror Motor Feed
PPL/WHT 889 Right- Vertical Motor - PPL/WHT 889 Right- Vertical Motor -
Down Direction Down Direction
 C214 (Inline to Door Harness RH) (cont’d)

E = = c

12064761
• 12146407
Connector Part Connector Part 4 M Metri-Pack 150
• 4 F Metri-Pack 150 Series (BLK) Information
Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No, Function
Power Mirror Motor Feed ■ Power Mirror Motor Feed ■
GRY 90 Right - Horizontal Motor GRY 90 Right - Horizontal Motor
Left Direction Left Direction
Not Used Not Used

C215 (Crossbody Harness Inline to RH Door Harness)

E F G H
EfP CJ? a
D C B A

a rY i Mb i r c i Hd1-]

Connector Part • 12064766 Connector Part • 12064767

Information * 8 F M/P 280 Series (BLU) Information • 8 M M/P 280 Series (BLU)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
BRN Park Lamp Feed BRN Park Lamp Feed
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
Fuse Output Battery - Fuse Output Battery •
ORN 40 ORN 40
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Speaker Return - Speaker Return -
DKGRN 117 DKGRN 117
Right Front Right Front
LT GRN 200 Speaker Feed - Right Front LT GRN 200 Speaker Feed - Right Front
G-H" Not Used G-H Not Used
 C216 (Crossbody Harness Inline to RH Door Hamess)

Connector Part * 12064867 Connector Part 12064868

Information • 2 F m/P 150 Series (NAT) Information 2 l i/P 150 Series (NAT)
Circuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
DKGRN 117 Speaker Return - RF DKGRN 117 Speaker Return - RF
LT GRN 200 Speaker Feed - RF LT GRN 200 .Speaker Feed - RF

C221 (Front to Rear Body Harness C221 (Front to Rear Body Harness
inline to Convenience Center) .9 Inline to Convenience Center) (cont’d)

_
l I ■OB' I
F j
03

C D
O

: E: /:F Y
O

e
>
>

283925 283925

® Convenience Center • Convenience Center

Connector Part • ASH 6 Way F Uetri - Connector Part • ASH 6 Way F Metri -
Information Pack (B II Information Pack(BLK)
Circuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. ■ Function ■■ 'No. Function.

Auxiliary HVAC Switch Windshield Wiper Switch

A ' DKBLU =1926 D LT BLU 97
Output - Low Signal - Mist/Off Low \
Rear Window Wiper Switch
Auxiliary HVAC Switch E =GRY 391
B RED 1925 Output
Output - Medium
Rear Window Washer
Auxiliary HVAC Switch . F DK GRN 392
C WHT 1924 Pump Motor - Feed ;
Output - High
 C222 (Front to Rear Body Harness C223 (Inline to Convenience Center,
Inline to Convenience Center) Export Only)

12033713 12015203
Connector Part 1 Way F Metrl-Pack 280 Connector Part 2 Way F Metri-Pack 280
Information Series (NAT) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Coior
No. Function No. Function
Rear Defogger DK GRN/ Vehicle Speed Signal
PPL 293 817
Element Feed WHT 4000 Pulses Per Mile

C224 (IP Hamess Inline toTransfer Case Harness)

Connector Part 12052848 Connector Part 12124107

Information 6F M/P 150 (BLK) Information 6M M/P 150 (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
BLK/WHT 1554 Transfer Case Encoder Transfer Case Encoder
BLK/WHT 1554
Signal Return _____ Signal Return ______
Transfer Case Position Transfer Case Position
BRN/WHT 1555 Switch Encoder Signal - BRN/WHT 1555 Switch Encoder Signal -
Channel "P" Channel "P"
Transfer Case Position Transfer Case Position
RED/WHT 1556 Switch Encoder Signal - RED/WHT 1556 Switch Encoder Signal -
Channel "C" Channel "C"
Transfer Case Position Transfer Case Position
DK BLU/ 1557 Switch Encoder Signal - DK BLU/
WHT 1557 Switch Encoder Signal -
Channel "A" WHT
Channel "A"
Transfer Case Position Transfer Case Position
YEL/BLK 1558 Switch Encoder Signal - YEL/BLK 1558 Switch Encoder Signal -
Channel "B" Channel "BC"
LT GRN/ Reference Voltage Feed LT GRN/ Reference Voltage Feed
BLK 431 8 Volt 431
BLK 8 Volt
 C225 (IP Hamess Inline to Transfer Case Harness)

i i l t o
^ — - js

277418

Connector Part • 15300027 Connector Part • 15300002

Information • 2M M/P 280 (BLK) Information • 2F M/P 280 (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Transfrer Case Motor Feed Transfrer Case Motor Feed
A BLK 1552 A BLK 1552
- Clockwise - Clockwise
Transfer Case Motor Feed - Transfer Case Motor Feed
B RED 1553 B RED 1553
Counter Clockwise - Counter Clockwise

C227 (IP Harness Inline to Stoplamp Switch)

9 -1
)

[ 0 [1 SI □I
J &<§ i !■
□ :.0
Ta— c3
L —
|
JJ
If
62455

• 12064752 . • 12064754
Connector Part • ASM 6 Way F Metrl-Pack 280 Connector Part • ASM 6 Way M Metri-Pack 280
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color

A WHT
No,
17
Function
Stop Lamp Switch Output A WHT
17
No. Function
Stop Lamp Switch Output
Fuse Output - Battery - Fuse Output - Battery -
B ORN 140 B ORN 140
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Transmission Mounted Transmission Mounted
C LT GRN 275 Neutral Safety Switch C LT GRN 275 Neutral Safety Switch
Output - Park Output - Park
DK GRN/ Brake Transmission Shift DK GRN/ Brake Transmission Shift
D 1135 D 1135 Interlock Solenoid Feed
WHT Interlock Solenoid Feed WHT
Brake Pedal Switch Output Brake Pedal Switch Output
E PPL 420 E PPL 420
- Torque Converter Clutch - Torque Converter Clutch

Fuse Output - Ignition 3 Fuse Output - Ignition 3

F BRN 441 F BRN 441
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
 C228 (Crossbody Harness Inline to Seat Belt Switch, RH)

£ □ ___Cl
A e e

12047662 12047663
Connector Part 2 Way F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part 2 Way M Metri-Pack 150
Inform ation' Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
C ircuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color No. Function
Heated Seats Control Heated Seats Control
YEL 182 YEL 182
Module Module
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground

C229 (Crossbody Harness Inline to Power Seat RH)

M 9-1
fl @ 1□)
........................................

&qc] |0
I |.
| |r
U— J L —JU
.0
nj

62455

• 12064752 • 12064754 '

Connector Part • 6 Way F Metri-Pack 280 Connector Part • 6 Way M Metri-Pack 280
Information Series (BLK) Information - Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function

A ORN 1840
Fuse Output Battery -
Type III Fuse
- A ORN : 1840
Fuse Output Battery -
Type III Fuse
B — — Not Used B — — Not Used
Fuse Output Battery - Fuse Output Battery -
C ORN 540 C ORN 540
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
D . BLK 150 Ground D BLK 150 Ground
Fuse Output Ignition 3 Fuse Output Ignition 3
E BRN 341 'E BRN 341
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Heated Seats Control Heated Seats Control
F YEL 182 F YEL 182
Module Module
 r -

I
E F G H T

D C B A
c2 d cE d e S cE d

§L M
Connector Part • 12110216 Connector Part • 12110214
Inform ation v 8F Metri-Pack 280 (YEL) Inform ation • BM Metri-Pack 280 (YEL)
Circuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
SIR Indicator Lamp Output SIR Indicator Lamp Output
BRN 353 BRN 353
(Pickup Only) (Pickup Only) _______
BLK/WHT 238 Seat Belt Switch Signal BLK/WHT 238 Seat Belt Switch Signal
WHT 347 SIR Inflator Feed Driver WHT 347 SIR Inflator Feed Driver
DK GRN 348 SIR Inflator Output Driver DKGRN 348 Sir Inflator Output Driver
SIR Inflator Feed SIR Inflator Feed
WHT/BLK 1403 Passenger WHT/BLK 1403 Passenger
DK GRN/ SIR Inflator Output DK GRN/ SIR Inflator Output
1404 1404
WHT Passenger WHT Passenger
Serial Data Signal - UART - Serial Data Signal - UART
G TAN 800 TAN 800
8192 BAUD - Primary - 8192 BAUD - Primary
YEL 1834 SIR Forward Sensor Signal YEL 1834 SIR Forward Sensor Signal

C232 (IP Harness Inline to SIR Harness)

UTD

• 15304974
• 12151740
Connector Part Connector Part • 4M Metri-Pack 280
• 4F Metrl-Pack 280 Series (YEL)
information Information Series (YEL)

A1 BRN 358 SIR Indicator Lamp Output A1 BRN 358 SIR Indicator Lamp Output
A2 BLK/WHT 1751 SIR Ground A2 BLK/WHT 1751 SIR Ground
Fuse Output - Ignition 1, Fuse Output - Ignition 1,
B1 YEL 1139 B1 YEL 1139
Type III Fuse - SIR Type III Fuse - SIR
B2 Not Used B2 Not Used
 —
| A
m
a d
IJ

12186799
12124124
Connector Part Connector Part 2M'Metrl-Pack 280
2F Metrl-Pack 280 Series (YEL)
Inform ation Information Series (YEL)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire C olor No. Function
SIR Inflator Feed - SIR Inflator Feed ■
WHT/BLK 1403 Passenger
WHT/BLK 1403 Passenger
:DK GRN/ SIR Inflator Output • DK GRN/ SIR Inflator Output ■
WHT
1404 Passenger . . WHT
1404 Passenger

C235 (IP Harness Inline to Auxiliary Fuse Panel Harness)

D C B A

Connector Part 12015664 Connector Part 12034295

Information 4 F Metri-Pack 630 (BLK) Information 4 M Metri-Pack 630 (BLK)
C ircuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output Battery Fuse Output Battery
RED RED
-Type I Fuse -Type I Fuse
Fuse Output Battery Fuse Output Battery
RED RED
-Type I Fuse -Type I Fuse
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
 C236 (Power Seat Harness Inline to Heated Seat Harness, LH)

;d c B
I A

12052054
12045813
Connector Part Connector Part m Metri-Pack 150
4F Metri-Pack 150 Series (NAT)
Information Inform ation Series (NAT)
Circuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire C olor
No.
No. Function Function
Fuse Output - Battery ■ Fuse Output - Battery ■
ORN 1840
Type 111Fuse
ORN 1840
Type III Fuse
Fuse Output - Ignition 3 ■ Fuse Output - Ignition 3 -
BRN 341
Type III Fuse
BRN 341
Type III Fuse
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150: Ground
Not Used D Not Used

C237 (Power Seat Harness Inline to Heated Seat Harness, RH)

j i * i ■ i* i° iL i

280756

• 12052054
• 12045813;
Connector Part Connector Part ® 4M Metri-Pack 150
• • 4F Metri-Pack 150 Series (NAT)
Information inform ation Series (NAT)
Circuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output - Battery - Fuse Output - Battery -
A ORN 1840
Type III Fuse
A ORN 1840
Type III Fuse
Fuse Output - Ignition 3 - Fuse Output - Ignition 3 -
B BRN 341
Type III Fuse
B BRN 341
Type III Fuse
C BLK 150 Ground C BLK 150 Ground
Heated Seat Contol Module Heated Seat Contol
D YEL 182 D YEL 182
Enable Module Enable
 EF3I

Connector Part 12064749 Connector Part 12064750

Information 2 F M/P (BLK) Information 2 M M/P (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output - Battery ■ Fuse Output - Battery
ORN 940 Type III Fuse ORN 940
Type III Fuse
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground

C242 (IP Harness Inline to Aux. Horn/Siren Harness, Police Package)

( 1
A
A

95869

Connector Part • 12069885 Connector Part • 1206984

Information • 1F M/P 480 (BLK) Information • 1M M/P 480 (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
A BLK 28 Horn Relay Output - Coil A BLK 28 Horn Relay Output - Coil
 C243 (Crossbody Harness Inline to Door Hamess, LH)

Q P
c& cS dc & cS ]
d 1

12064998 12066195
Connector Part 8 Way F Metrl-Pack 280 Connector Part 8 Way M Metrl-Pack 280
Inform ation Series (BLK) Inform ation Series (BLK)
C ircuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color
No- Function
Pin Wire Color Function
No.
Fuse Output - Accessory - Fuse Output - Accessory
YEL 343 YEL 343
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Power Window Master Power Window Master
LT BLU 166 Switch Output - Right Front LT BLU 166 Switch Output - Right Front
Window - Up Window - Up
Power Window Master Power Window Master
TAN 167 Switch Output - Right Front TAN 167 Switch Output - Right Front
Window - Down Window - Down
Power Window Master Power Window Master
DKGRN 168 Switch Output - Left Rear DKGRN 168 Switch Output - Left Rear
Window - Up Window - Up
Power Window Master Power Window Master
PPL 169 Switch Output - Left RR PPL 169 Switch Output - Left RR
Window - Down Window - Down
Power Window Master Power Window Master
LT GRN 170 Switch Output - Right Rear LT GRN 170 Switch Output - Right Rear
Window - Up Window - Up
Power Window Master Power Window Master
PPL 171 Switch Output - Right Rear G PPL 171 Switch Output - Right Rear
Window - Down Window - Down
Power Window Master Power Window Master
DK BLU 1307 DKBLU 1307
Switch Output - Lockout Switch Output - Lockout
 C245 (IP Harness Inline to Auxiliary Fuse Panel Harness, Police Package)

Connector Part 12129082 Connector Part 12129156

Inform ation 2 F m/P 280 (GRY) Inform ation 2 M m/P 280 (GRY)
Circuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No, Function No. Function
Fuse Output - Accessory ■ Fuse Output - Accessory •
YEL 343 YEL* 343
Type III Fuse " Type III Fuse
Not Used Not Used

C266

Bv. M. A1.7

___________________________________„ ^
] □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ U sK
B6 nunuLu [" E g [" □ □ □ B1 t 't n o o i—
C6 □ □ □ ] C1 - r u c z u z iL r
D6 nnnnnn [. ts a [ D1 ^ ^ o p r -
I
i

■/—
o

"Xi»—TJ-TT--- —^ 6
8 El E18 4 ■

39776

Connector Part • 12047837 Connector Part • 12077822

Information • 48 Way M M/P MXD (BLK) Inform ation • 48 Way M M/P MXD (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Stoplamp Switch Output Stoplamp Switch Output
A1 WHT 17 A1 WHT 17
(Suburban Utility) (Suburban Utility)
Fuse Output Ignition I, Fuse Output Ignition I,
A2 PNK 139 A2 PNK 139
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
A3 BLK 150 Ground A3 BLK 150 Ground
A4-A5 — — Not Used A4-A5 —- — Not Used
Turn Signal Lamp Feed, Turn Signal Lamp Feed,
A6 DK BLU 15 A6 DK BLU 15
Right Front Right Front :
Turn Signal Feed, Turn Signal Feed,
A7 LT BLU 14 A7 LT BLU 14
Left Front Left Front
A8- A8-
— — Not Used — — Not Used
A10 A10
A11 BLK 28 Horn Relay Output, Coil A11 BLK 28 Horn Relay Output, Coil
 0266 (cont’d)

Bv A1 A17

. 4 n .: ................. :............................ - ..............m

B6 r ....i i— ir i ‘ E g L..J L __ ICTZ1 B1 vl j u u r i r p u u ' j L c
C8 □ □ □ ! l ' j c h i __ j C1 □ □ □ L r ^ S J n a m i r
D6 ■B a ; D1
i - — —— —— 0 J /

rr ^
D 1 3 £1 E13 4

39776

Connector Part • 12047837 Connector Part • 12077822

Inform ation • 48 Way M: M/P MXD (BLK) Information • 48 Way M M/P MXD (BLK)
C ircuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No, Function No. Function
Cruise Control On Switch Cruise Control On Switch
A12 GRY 397 A12 GRY 397
Output Output
Fuse Output Ignition 3, Fuse Output Ignition 3,
A13 BRN . 41 A13 BRN 41
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Cruise Control Set/Coast Cruise Control Set/Coast
A14 DK BLU 84 A14 DK BLU 84
Signal Signal
Cruise Control Cruise Control
A15 GRY/BLK - 87 Resume/Accel Switch A15 GRY/BLK 87 Resume/Accel Switch
Signal Signal
A16 BLK 150 Ground A16 BLK 150 Ground
DK GRN/: Brake Transmission Shift DK GRN/ Brake Transmission Shift
A17 1135 A17 1135
WHT Interlock Solenoid Feed WHT Interlock Solenoid Feed
Reference Voltage Feed, Reference Voltage Feed,
B1 RED/WHT 812 B1 RED/WHT 812
12V Reference 12V Reference
B2 BLK 150 Ground B2 BLK 150 Ground
Key Reminder Switch Key Reminder Switch
B3 LT GRN 80 B3 LT GRN 80
Signal Signal
Key Reminder Switch Key Reminder Switch
B4 TAN 159 B4 TAN 159
Output Output
B5 LT BLU 1134 Park Brake Switch Signal B5 LT BLU 1134 Park Brake Switch Signal
- B6 ■ — — Not Used B6 — — Not Used
Ignition Switch Output, Ignition Switch Output,
C1 WHT 1390 C1 WHT 1390
Off/Run/Crank Off/Run/Crank
C2 BLK 150 Ground C2 BLK 150 Ground
Reference Voltage Feed, Reference Voltage Feed,
C3 GRY 705 C3 GRY 705
5V Reference 5V Reference
- C4 ORN/BLK 1057 Sensor Return C4 ORN/BLK 1057 Sensor Return
Ignition Switch Output, Ignition Switch Output,
C5 :■ PNK 3 C5 PNK 3
Ignition 1 Ignition 1
Ignition Switch Output, Ignition Switch Output,
C6 ORN 300 C6 ORN 300
Ignition 3 Ignition 3
Ignition Switch Ignition Switch
D1 YEL 5 D1 YEL 5
Output, Crank Output, Crank
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
D2 RED 342 D2 RED 342
Type II Fuse Type II Fuse
 C266 (cont’d)

M A17
bA__ O... XIX.__ Ck__ E3__ O__a __rn
P D D D D D O D I] □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ u E k '
i
B6 I---- I I If...1 □Z3EZ3EZ3 B1 f c a n r 3 r ” p L _ ii_ i'^ L c
ce czm u cn ] KD)) [ I .ZIILIIIIL-J C1 i— i r u - i L r
D6 C is a ] f— i n z i n n D1 ^ fj^ a p Q :

v s ' /
D X 3 E1 E13 4

39776

Connector Part • 12047837 Connector Part • 12077822

Information • 48 Way M M/P MXD (BLK) information • 48 Way M M/P MXD (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Magnetic Rotation Magnetic Rotation
D3 YEL 1836 D3 YEL 1836
Detection Sensor Signal Detection Sensor Signal
Steering Wheel Position Steering Wheel Position
D4 LT BLU 1059 D4 LT BLU 1059
Sensor Signal Sensor Signal
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
D5 RED 242 D5 RED 242
Type II Fuse Type II Fuse
Ignition Switch Output, Ignition Switch Output,
D6 BRN 4 D6 BRN 4
Accessory Accessory
Turn/Hazard Module Feed, Turn/Hazard Module Feed,
E1 GRY 1696 E1 GRY 1696
Secondary Secondary
E2 LT BLU 20 Stoplamp Feed (Gas) E2 LT BLU 20 Stoplamp Feed (Gas)
Windshield Wiper Motor Windshield Wiper Motor
E3 PPL 92 E3 PPL 92
Feed, High Speed Feed, High Speed
Fuse Output Accessory, Fuse Output Accessory,
4 YEL 143 E4 YEL 143
Type ill Fuse Type III Fuse
Windshield Wiper Switch Windshield Wiper Switch
E5 BRN 96 E5 BRN 96
Signal, Pulse Delay Signal, Pulse Delay
Stop/Turn Lamp Feed, Stop/Turn Lamp Feed,
E6 DKGRN 19 E6 DKGRN 19
Right Rear Right Rear
Stop/Turn Lamp Feed, Stop/Turn Lamp Feed,
E7 YEL 18 E7 YEL 18
Left Rear Left Rear
E8 ORN 140 Battery Feed E8 ORN 140 Battery Feed
E9 Turn/Hazard Module
E9 PPL 1697 Turn/Hazard Module Output PPL 1697
Output
E10 — ' ■■ .— Not Used E10 . — — Not Used
High Beam
E11 LT GRN 11 High Beam Headlamp Feed E11 LT GRN 11
Headlamp Feed
Headlamp Feed, Daytime Headlamp Feed, Daytime
E12 PPL 359 E12 PPL 359
Running Lamps Running Lamps
E13 YEL 10 Headlamp Switch Output E13 YEL 10 Headlamp Switch Output
 C271 (IF Hamess Inline to ’A’ Pillar Harness)

J5

T r
K J H G F F G H J K

E P C B A
A B C D E.

39763

12064871 • 1204872
Connector Part 10 Way F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part • 10 Way F Metri-Pack 150
Information Series (BLU) information Series (BLU)
C ircuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
BRN Park Lamp Feed BRN Park Lamp Feed
LT GRN 24 Back-Up Lamp Feed LT GRN 24 Back-Up Lamp Feed
Fuse Output Ignition I Fuse Output Ignition I,
PNK 39 PNK 39
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
ORN 40 ORN 40
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
BRN 718 Sensor Return BRN 718 Sensor Return
LT GRN/ Outside Ambient LT GRN/ Outside Ambient
G 735 735
BLK Temperature Sensor Signal BLK Temperature Sensor Signal
Automatic Day/Night Mirror Automatic Day/Night Mirror
H GRA 1690 GRA 1690
Signal-Outside Signal-Outside
Automatic Day/Night Mirror Automatic Day/Night Mirror
PNK 1691 PNK 1691
Return-Outside Return-Outside
Not Used Not Used
 0272 (IP Harness Inline to Spot Lamp Jumper, Police Package)

301999

Connector Part • 12015952 Connector Part • 12015987

Information • 1 F M /P 480 (GRY) Information • 1 M M /P 480 (GRY)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output Fuse Output
■A BLK 940 A . BLK • 940
Battery III Fuse Battery III Fuse

0298 (Suburban/Utility)

1 rs m
C “i r-1 r
: a B c !'-- E f |g H
[H E E 1H E 1S 0 E E ]
.c 1
[ j] lH [ t ] [ M ] [ N ] [ P ] [ R ] [ l]
M l | k| j
c 3 ' : Si R p ' J I
L J ..........................
— t___ 1 : /TJ9 1L i P™ m

280749

• 12129430 • 12129429
Connector Part • 16 Way F Metri-Pack 150 Series Connector Part ® 16 Way M Metri-Pack 150
Information (ACT WHT) Information Series (ACT WHT)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
A ORN 40 A ORN 40
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
B BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed B BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed
C WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output C WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
D BLK/WHT 238 Seat Belt Switch Signal D BLK/WHT 238 Seat Belt Switch Signal
Instrument Panel Instrument Panel
E GRY 8 Lamp Feed
E GRY 8 Lamp Feed
F WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output F WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output
Interior Lamp Defeat Interior Lamp Defeat
G PPL 328 Switch Output G PPL 328
Switch Output
Transmission Mounted Transmission Mounted
H YEL 1737 Neutral Safety Switch H YEL 1737 Neutral Safety Switch
Output—Park Neutral Output—Park Neutral
 C298 (Suburban/Utility) (cont’d)

1__ □ _ XL

EDEOEEI CSIUIEE] A B c jo E
Fi°
H

□ G HD E [ 1 [ n ] [ p ] Or ] [ 1 ]
S R p |> M
— □ — ---------------- — p —
TT

12129430 12129429
Connector Part • 16 Way F Metrl-Pack 150 Series Connector Part 16 Way M Metri-Pack 150
Information (ACT WHT) Information Series (ACT WHT)
Pin Circuit Circuit
Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
GRY 157 Interior Lamp Output GRY 157 Interior Lamp Output
Keyless Entry Program Keyless Entry Program
BLK/WHT 1455 BLK/WHT 1455
Signal Signal
Fuse Output- -Battery ORN Fuse Output- -Battery
ORN 1840 1840
Type III Fuse Type II I Fuse
Fuse Output—Ignition 3 Fuse Output- -Ignition 3
M BRN 341 M BRN 341
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Automatic Day/Night Mirror Automatic Day/Night Mirror
GRY 1690 GRY 1690
Signal—Outside Signal—Outside
Automatic Day/Night Mirror Automatic Day/Night Mirror
PNK 1691 PNK 1691
Return—Outside Return—Outside
Fuse Output—Battery Fuse Output—Battery
ORN 1040 ORN 1040
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Rear Defogger Rear Defogger
PPL 293 PPL 293
Element Feed Element Feed
 f
— K J H Q — '

= 5)
A B C D E
x .. >

39763

Connector Part • 12064769 Connector Part • 12064770

Information ® ConniOM M/P 150 NAT Information • Conn 10M M/P 150 NAT
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
A ORN 40 A ORN 40
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
B BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed B BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed I
C WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output C WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
D BLK/WHT 238 Seat Belt Switch Signal D BLK/WHT 238 Seat Belt Switch Signal
Instrument Panel Instrument Panel
E GRY 8 E ■ GRY 8
Lamp Feed Lamp Feed
F WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output F WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output
Interior Lamp Defeat Switch Interior Lamp Defeat
G PPL 318 G PPL 328
Output Switch Output
DK BLU/ DK BLU/
H 149 Courtesy Lamp H 149 Courtesy Lamp
WHT WHT
J GRY 157 Interior Lamp Output J GRY 157 Interior Lamp Output
Keyless Entry Program Keyless Entry Program
K BLK/WHT 1455 K BLK/WHT 1455
Enable Signal Enable Signal
 C299 (l/P Harness Inline to Crossbody Harness)

>i _ _

H F
............ —
G H J K
H I
K J H G F

,— 1 E D C B A A B C D E b

258237

Connector Part • 12064871 Connector Part • 12064872

Information • 10 F M/P 150 (BLU) Information • 10 M M/P 150 (BLU)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No* Function
Speaker Return -
A DKGRN 117 A DKGRN 117 Speaker Return - Left Front
Right Front
B GRY 118 Speaker Return - Left Front B GRY 118 Speaker Return - Left Front
C LT GRN 200 Speaker Feed - Right Front C LT GRN 200 Speaker Feed - Right Front
D TAN 201 Speaker Feed - Left Front D TAN 201 Speaker Feed - Left Front
E DK BLU 46 Speaker Feed - Right Rear E DK BLU 46 Speaker Feed - Right Rear
Speaker Return - Speaker Return -
F LT BLU 115 F LT BLU 115
Right Rear Right Rear
G YEL 116 Speaker Return - Left Rear G YEL 116 Speaker Return - Left Rear
H BRN 199 Speaker Feed - Left Rear H BRN 199 Speaker Feed - Left Rear
J PNK 314 Radio Signal - ON J PNK 314 Radio Signal - ON
Fuse Output Ignition 1 Fuse Output Ignition 1
K PNK 39 K PNK 39
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
 C300 (Front to Rear Harness Inline to Auxiliary Switch with A/C)

J I
E F G H
T
a
D C B
[5b [Sbrfjb c&
a
Connector Part • 13084766 Connector Part • 12089906
Information • 8 F M/P 150 (BLU) information • 8M M/P 150 (BLU)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Col or
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output - Ignition 3 Fuse Output - Ignition 3
BRN 341 BRN 341
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Auxiliary HVAC Switch Auxiliary HVAC Switch
DK BLU 1926 DK BLU 1926
Output - Low Output - Low
Aux HVAC Switch Aux HVAC Switch
WHT 1924 WHT 1924
Output - High Output - High
Aux HVAC Switch Aux HVAC Switch
RED 1925 RED 1925
Output - Medium Output - Medium
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
Air Temperature Valve Air Temperature Valve
DK BLU 1199 DK BLU 1199
Motor Feed Motor Feed
WHT 454 Mode Switch Signal G WHT 454 Mode Switch Signal
Instrument Panel Instrument Panel
GRY GRY
Lamp Feed Lamp Feed_____
 C300 (Front to Rear Harness Inline to Auxiliary Switch Without A/C)

K J H G F

B
H
A C D E

Connector Part 12064769 Connector Part 12064770

Information 8 F M/P 150 (BLU) Information 8 M M/P 150 (BLU)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Instrument Panel Instrument Panel
GRY GRY
Lamp Feed Lamp Feed
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
Auxiliary HVAC Switch Auxiliary HVAC Switch
DK BLU 1926 Output - Low
DK BLU 1926 Output - Low
Auxiliary HVAC Switch Auxiliary HVAC Switch
WHT 1924 WHT 1924 Output - Medium
Output - Medium
Auxiliary HVAC Switch Auxiliary HVAC Switch
RED 1925 RED 1925 Output - High
Output - High
Auxiliary HVAC Switch Auxiliary HVAC Switch
ORN 1923 ORN 1923 Output - Feed______
Output - Feed_______
 0301

..... c z .- p ...
- -
i i --------- ----------
* \
(
(■ ( 7 = K J H G F

n
E 3 ^ E lR O ] I E [
E E A B D E
ID
Pen m fA l r 1 C
E m I 1r j i
Vy --------- '
V
T
.... ... ......:...:.:........... .:...... :.... .'z* f

243492
• 12064769 • 12064770
Connector Part • 10 Way F Metri-Pack 150 Connector Part • 10 Way M Metri-Pack 150
Inform ation Series NAT Information Series (NAT)
C ircuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
A WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output A WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
Speaker Return, Speaker Return,
B LT BLU 115 B LT BLU 115
Right Rear Right Rear
C DK BLU 46 Speaker Feed, Right Rear C DK BLU 46 Speaker Feed, Right Rear
D YEL 116 Speaker Return, Left Rear D YEL 116 Speaker Return, Left Rear
' E BRN 199 Speaker Feed, Left Rear E BRN 199 Speaker Feed, Left Rear
Liftgate Release Switch Liftgate Release Switch
F BLK 1576 F BLK 1576
Output Output
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
G ORN 40
Type III Fuse Feed G ORN 40
Type III Fuse
Fuse Output Battery, Fuse Output Battery,
H ORN 640 H ORN 640
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Transmission Mounted Transmission Mounted
Neutral Safety Switch Neutral Safety Switch
J YEL 1737 J YEL 1737
Output, Park/Neutral Output, Park/Neutral
(Keyless Entry) (Keyless Entry)
K WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output K WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output
 C302 (06 w/Rear Heat Only)

J - 1

<= C
i
j |c
i

D
E B [I E

F A |a F
S .L J /J
Ll

283939

12089527 • 12089745
Connector Part • 6 Way F Metri-Pack 280 Series Connector Part • 6 Way M Metri-Pack 280 Series
Inform ation (LT GRN) Information (LT GRN)
Pin Circuit Circuit
Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No- Function
Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
A TAN 294 A TAN 294
Feed - Unlock Feed - Unlock
Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
B GRY 295 B GRY 295
Feed - Lock Feed - Lock
Int Lamp Defeat Switch Int Lamp Defeat Switch
C PPL 328 C PPL 328
Output Output
Instrument panel Instrument panel
D GRY 8 D GRY 8
Lamp Feed Lamp Feed
Power Door Lock Relay Power Door Lock Relay
E WHT 194 E ' WHT 194
Feed - Unlock Coil Feed - Unlock Coil
Power Door Lock Relay Power Door Lock Relay
F LT BLU 195 F LT BLU 195
Feed - Lock Coil Feed - Unlock Coil
 C3Q2 (All Except 06 w/Rear Heat)

c E ic S ][fi]
d

• 12064998 12066195
Connector Part • 8 Way F Metri-Pack 280 Connector Part • 8 Way M Metrl-Pack 280
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Pin Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Wire Color
N o- Function
Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
TAN 294 Feed-Unlock
TAN 294
Feed-Unlock
Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
GRY 295 Feed - Lock
GRY 295 Feed - Lock
INT Lamp Defeat Switch INT Lamp Defeat Switch
PPL 328 Output
PPL 328 Output
Instrument Panel Instrument Panel
D GRY GRY
Lamp Feed Lamp Feed
Power Door Lock Relay Power Door Lock Relay
WHT 194 WHT 194
Feed - Unlock Coil Feed - Unlock Coil
Power Door Lock Relay Power Door Lock Relay
LT BLU 195 LT BLU 195
Feed - Lock Coil Feed - Lock Coil
BRN Park Lamp Feed BRN Park Lamp Feed
Not Used Not Used
 95860

Connector Part « 12047781 Connector Part •12047782

Information • 3 F M/P 150 (BLK) Information • 3 M M/P 150 (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output Battery - Fuse Output Battery -
A ORN 40 A ORN 40
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
B --. WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output B WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
C BLK ■1 5 0 Ground C BLK 150 Ground

C307

Connector Part ' • 12065422 Connector Part ■ • 12065432

Information • 3 F M/P 150 (NAT) ■ Information • 3 M M/P 150 (NAT)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color - Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
A ORN 40 Fuse Output A ORN 40 Fuse Output
B BLK 150 Ground B BLK 150 Ground
e BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed C BRN 9 Park Lamp Feed
 C308 (Inline to Dome Lamp — Front)

Connector Part 12047781 Connector Part 12047782

Information 3 F M/P 150 (BLK) Information 3 M m/P 150 (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. 'function No, Function
Fuse Output Battery - Fuse Output Battery -
ORN 40 Type III Fuse
ORN 40 Type III Fuse
WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground

C314 (Inline to Endgate Window Release Actuator)

a
00
• 12064749 12064750
Connector Part • 2 Way F Metri-Pack 480 Connector Part 2 Way M Metri-Pack 480
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK) ~

Trunk Release Switch Trunk Release Switch

BLK 1576 Output
BLK 1576 Output
Transmission Mounted Transmission Mounted
YEL 1737 Neutral Safety Switch YEL 1737 Neutral Safety Switch
Output - Park/Neutral Output - Park/Neutral
 C32Q (Lumbar Switch)

62458

12065658
12064761
Connector Part Connector-'Part 4M Metrl-Pack 150
Information 4F Metrl-Pack 150 Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Wire Color Circuit Pin Wire Color
Circuit
Pin No. Function No. Function
Not Used Not Used
ORN
Fuse Output - Battery 540
Fuse Output - Battery
540 ORN Type III Fuse
Type III Fuse
Power Seat Motor Feed • Power Seat Motor Feed •
TAN 768 TAN 768
Driver Lumbar - Up Driver Lumbar - Up
Power Seat Motor Feed ■ Power Seat Motor Feed ■
PPL 767 D PPL 767
Driver Lumbar - Down Driver Lumbar - Down

C321 (Lumbar Pump Motor)

i j
I
V ........... _ ........... _

\
i
9 0 0
0 0
V _________ ^/
V V J
62458

• 12065658
• 12064760
Connector Part Connector Part • 4M Metri-Pack 150
Information • 4F Metri-Pack 150 Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Pin Circuit
Pin Wire Color No, Function Wire Color Function
No.
A __ — Hoi User A __ Not Used
B BLK 150 Ground B 6!.K 150 Ground
Power Seat Motor Feed - Power Seat Motor Feed -
C TAN 768 C TAN' 768 Driver Lumbar - Up
Driver Lumbar - Up
Power Seat Motor Feed - Power Seat Motor Feed -
D PPL 767 Driver Lumbar - Down
D PPL 767 Driver Lumbar - Down
 C322 (Lumbar Switch)

r ~ )< ■;{ i J
1.
n ~n \

\ _____ :_____
p i
9 0 0

00 /
J

62458

® 12065658
• 12064761
Connector Part Connector Part 9 4M Metri-Pack 150
• 4F Metri-Pack 150 Series (BLK)
Inform ation Information Series (BLK)
C ircuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
A — : ■ :— Not Used A — Not Used
Fuse Output - Battery Fuse Output - Battery
B : ORN 540 B ORN/ 540
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse '
Power Seat Motor Feed - .Power Seat Motor Feed -
C TAN 768 C TAN 768 .
Driver Lumbar - Up Driver Lumbar - Up
Power Seat Motor Feed - Power Seat Motor Feed -
D ■" PPL 767 D PPL 767
Driver Lumbar - Down Driver Lumbar - Down

323 (Lumbar Pump Motor)

I — J
f ..[....... ................■..|..S
\
<
0 0
E 3 4 3

& 4 3
00 /
V , .............................. J V J
62458

• 12064760 .• 12065658
Connector Part Connector Part ® 4M Metri-Pack 150
• 4F "Metrl-Pack 150 Series (BLK)
Information Information Series (BLK) - ,■
Pin Wire Color Circuit Pin Circuit
Function Wire Color No.
No. Function
A — — Not Used A —• _ Not Used
B' BLK 150 Ground B BLK 150 Ground
C TAN Power Seat Motor Feed - Power Seat Motor Feed -
768 Driver Lumbar - Up C TAN 768
Driver Lumbar - Up
D : PPL 767 Power Seat Motor Feed - D Power Seat Motor Feed -
Driver Lumbar - Down PPL 767
Driver Lumbar - Down
 r

12064749 • 15305452
Connector Part 2 Way F Metrl-Pack Connector Part • 2 Way M Metri-Pack
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color
No* Function
Fuse Output Battery Fuse Output Battery
RED 542 RED 542
Type II Fuse Type II Fuse
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground

C401

sa,
I Aj B I c l m

12064762 12089892
Connector Part 6 Way F Metrl-Pack 150 Connector Part 6 Way M Metrl-Pack 150
Information Series (GRY) information Series (GRY)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Pin Wire Color
No. Function
WHT 454 Mode Switch Output WHT 454 Mode Switch Output
Auxiliary HVAC Switch Auxiliary HVAC Switch
DKBLU 1926 DK BLU 1926
Output - Low Output - Low
Electronic Variable Orifice Electronic Variable Orifice
WHT 1294 WHT 1924
Solenoid Feed Solenoid Feed
Auxiliary HVAC Switch Auxiliary HVAC Switch
RED 1925 RED 1925
Output - Medium Output - Medium
Fuse Output Ignition 3 Fuse Output Ignition 3
BRN 341 BRN 341
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Air Temperature Valve Air Temperature Valve
DK BLU 1199 DK BLU 1199
Motor Feed Motor Feed
 C402 (Front to Rear Hamess Inline to Windshield Wiper Motor, RR)

--------- f SsL _ -----------_ n n — _

D C| B A |A B | | C D
L

456410

Connector Part 18905206 Connector Part • 08905220

information • 4 F PAC/ON (BLK) Information • 4 M PAC/ON (BLK)
Pin Circuit Pin Circuit
Wire Color No. Function Wire Color
No. Function
Rear Window Wiper Switch Rear Window Wiper Switch
A GRY 391 A GRY 391
Output Output
Rear Window Washer Rear Window Washer
B DKGRN 392 B DKGRN 392
Pump Motor - Feed Pump Motor - Feed
C BLK 150 Ground C BLK 150 Ground
Windshield Wiper Switch Windshield Wiper Switch
D LT BLU 97 Signal - Mist/Off/Low
D LT BLU 97 Signal - Mist/Off/Low

C403 (Front to Rear Harness Inline to CHMSL)

n n r ____
f >
A B B A

V 9 V J
K 9

35424

Connector Part • 12089868 Connector Part •12047663

Information • 2F MtP 150 (BLK) Information • 2M M/P 150 (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
A WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output A WHT 17 Stop Lamp Switch Output
B BLK 150 Ground B BLK 150 Ground
 • 12015199 12015271
Connector Part • 2 Way F Metrl-Pack 280 Connector Part 2 Way M Metri-Pack 280
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Wire Color
Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin
No. Function No. Function
Rear Defogger Rear Defogger
PPL 293 PPL 293
Element Feed Element Feed
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground

C410 (Crossbody Harness Inline to Rear Radio Speaker Harness, Pick-up)

1 J

n -------------- n \
_ ) i
9 B 0

00 /
X V V J
62458

• 12064760 • 12065658
Connector Part • 4 Way F Metri-Paek 150 Connector Part • 4 Way M Metri-Pack 150
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
A DK BLU 46 Speaker Feed, RR A DK BLU 46 Speaker Feed, RR
Speaker Return - Speaker Return -
B LT BLU 115 B LT BLU 115
Right Rear Right Rear
C YEL 116 Speaker Return - Left Rear C YEL 116 Speaker Return - Left Rear
D BRN 199 Speaker Feed - Left Rear D BRN 199 Speaker Feed - Left Rear
 fa | AI B | C
C lb
n
62460

Connector Part ® 12064762 Connector Part 12064763

Inform ation .• 8 F m/P 150 (BLK) Inform ation 8 M m/P 150 (BLK)
Pin Wire Color
C ircuit
Pin Wire Color
Circuit'
No. Function No- Function
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
WHT 150 Courtesy Lamp Output WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
Fuse Output - Battery Fuse Output - Battery -
ORN 40
Type III Fuse ORN 40
Type III Fuse
WHT 17 Stoplamp Switch Output WHT 17 Stoplamp Switch Output
DKBLU/ DK BLU/
WHT
149 Courtesy Lamp Feed
WHT 149' Courtesy Lamp Feed
Not Used Not Used

C411 (Crossbody Harness Inline to Cargo LP Harness, Pick-Up and Ext. Cab)

I H | Q | F-IT
A B C D

229958

Connector Part; 12059558 Connector Part 12047931

Information 8 F M/P 150 (BLK) Information 8 M M/P 150 (BLK)
C ircuit C ircuit
Pin Wire Color - No. Function
Pin Wire Color
No. Function
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
Fuse Output - Battery - Fuse Output - Battery -
ORN 40 ORN 40
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
WHT 17 Stoplamp Switch Output WHT 17 Stoplamp Switch Output
DK BLU/ Courtesy Lamp Feed
DK BLU/
149 149 Courtesy Lamp Feed
WHT WHT
F-H Not Used F-H Not Used
 D

A B 0
r
F

12064762 12064763
Connector Part 6 Way F Metri-pack 150 Connector Part M Way M Metri-pack 150
Information ■Series (GRY) Information Series (GRY)
Pin Wire Color
Circuit
Pin Wire Color Circuit
N o. Function No. Function
BRN Park Lamp Feed BRN Park Lamp Feed

ORN Fuse Output - Battery ■ Fuse Output - Battery -

40 ORN 40
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
Speaker Return-Right Speaker Return-Right
RED 1955 RED 1955
Rear-Midrange Rear-Midrange
Speaker Feed - Right Rear Speaker Feed Right Rear
TAN 1855 TAN 1855
-Midrange - Midrange
 □

62455

• 12064752 • 12064754
Connector Part • 6 Way F Metrl-Pack 280 Connector Part • 6 Way M Metri-pack 280
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color Function
No. Function No.
Power Window Master Power Window Master
A DK BLU 1307 Switch output - Lockout A DK BLU 1307 Switch output - Lockout
Power Window Master Power Window Master
B LT GRN 170 Switch Output - Right Rear B LT GRN 170 Switch Output - Right Rear
Window - Up Window - Up
Power Window Master Power Window Master
C PPL 171 Switch Output - Right Rear C PPL 171 Switch Output - Right Rear
Window - Down Window - Down
Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
D TAN 294 D TAN 294
Feed - Unlock
Feed - Unlock
Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
E GRY 295 E GRY 295
Feed - Lock
Feed - Lock
F — — Not Used F —* — Not Used
 £ F E D

E A B C

12084762 12064763
Connector Part 6 Way F Metrl-Pack 150 Connector Part 6 Way M Metri-pack 150
Information Series (GRY) Information Series (GRY)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function
Pin Wire Color Function
No.
BRN Park Lamp Feed BRN Park Lamp Feed
ORN 40 Fuse Output Battery ORN 40 Fuse Output Battery
WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
Speaker Feed Left Rear - Speaker Feed ■ Left Rear •
TAN 1859 TAN 1859
Midrange Midrange
Speaker Return Left Rear Speaker Return - Left Rear
WHT 1959 WHT 1959
- Midrange - Midrange
 C499 (Crossbody Harness Inline to Door Harness, LH, RR)

i n t i

1 S' 3
Q
HI li-
s 0:
3 .0 0 ;
LL—1 1__U

62455

• 12064752 • 12064754
Connector Part • 6 Way F Metri-Pack 280 Connector Part • 6 Way M Metri-pack 280
Information Series (BLK) Information Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Power Window Master Power Window Master
A DKBLU 1307
Switch Output - Lockout
A DK BLU' 1307
Switch Output - Lockout
Power Window Master Power Window Master
B DK GRN 168 Switch Output - Left Rear B DKGRN 168 Switch Output - Left Rear
Window - Up Window - Up
Power Window Master Power Window Master
C PPL 169 Switch Output - Left Rear C PPL 169 Switch Output - Left Rear
Window - Down Window - Down
Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
D TAN 294 D TAN 294
Feed - Unlock Feed - Unlock
E Power Door Lock Motor Power Door Lock Motor
GRY 295 E GRY 295
Feed - Lock Feed - Lock
F — — Not Used E — — Not Used
 H

A B C D E

Connector Part 12064871 Connector Part 12064872

Information 10 Way F.M/P 150 (NAT) Information 10 Way F M/P 150 (NAT)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Fuse Output Battery Fuse Output Battery
ORN 40 Type III Fuse, Power Mirror ORN 40 Type III Fuse, Power Mirror
Motor Feed, Common Motor Feed, Common
Power Mirror Motor Feed, Power Mirror Motor Feed,
YEL 1496 Common
YEL 1496 Common
Power Mirror Motor Feed, Power Mirror Motor Feed,
GRY 90 Right Horizontal Motor, GRY 90 Right Horizontal Motor,
Left Direction Left Direction
Power Mirror Motor Feed, Power Mirror Motor Feed,
D PPL/WHT 889 Downward Direction
D PPL/WHT 889 Downward Direction
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
BRN Park Lamp Feed BRN Park Lamp Feed
Automatic Day/Night Mirror Automatic Day/Night Mirror
GRY 1690 Signal, Outside
GRY 1690 Signal, Outside
Automatic Day/Night Mirror Automatic Day/Night Mirror
PNK 1691 Return, Outside
PNK 1691 Return, Outside
Heated Mirror Heated Mirror
ORN 267 Element Feed
ORN 267 Element Feed
Not Used Not Used
 In lc
P 3

d j

Connector Part 12064766 Connector Part ® 12089908

Information 8.Way F M/P 150 (BLK) Information 8 Way M M/P 150 (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color Pin Wire Color
No. Function No. Function
Power Mirror Motor Power Mirror Motor
YEL 1498 YEL 1496
Feed-Common Feed-Common
PPL 889 Shift Solenoid Output PPL 889 Shift Solenoid Output
Power Mirror Motor Power Mirror Motor
GRY 90 Feed-Right Horizontal GRY 90 Feed-Right Horizontal
Motor-Left Direction Motor-Left Direction
Heated Mirror Heated Mirror
ORN 267 ORN" 267
Element Feed Element Feed
BLK 150 Ground BLK 150 Ground
Automatic Day/Night Mirror Automatic Day/Night Mirror
GRY 1690 GRY 1690
Signal-Outside Signal-Outside
Automatic Day/Night Mi rror Automatic Day/Night Mirror
PNK 1691 PNK 1691
Return-Outside Return-Outside
Not Used Not Used
Harness Routing Views
Windshield Washer and Forward Lamp Harness

Legend
(1) Forward Lamp Harness (5) Windshield Washer Motor, Rear
(2) C116 (6) Windshield Washer Reservoir
(3) Windshield Washer Motor Wiring Harness (7) Battery, LH (Auxiliary/Diesel Only)
(4) Windshield Washer Motor, Front
7.4L Engine, C105, Rear View

276622
Legend
(1) Generator, RH (5) Generator Connector, LH
(2) Generator Cable (6) Battery, LH
(3) C115 (7) Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM)
(4) Generator, LH
 Engine Hamess, Rear (Diesel)

465311

Legend
(1) C114 (6) Glow Plug Wiring Harness, LH
(2) C112 (7) Engine Harness
(3) C113 (8) Glow Plug Controller Connector
(4) Fuel Heater Connector (9) Water-ln-Fuel Sensor Connector
(5) Glow Plug Controller
 Connectors: C100, C103, C104, C131, C132, C140, C142

Legend
(1) C132 (Automatic Transfer Case)/ (8)Taillamp Ext. Hamess
C140 (Selectable Transfer Case) (9)Engine Hamess
(2) C130 (10) Trailer Wiring Harness
(3) C100 (11) C131 (Automatic Transfer Case)/
(4) C104 (IP Harness) C142 (Selectable Transfer Case)
(5) C103 (Engine Harness) (12) C132 (Automatic Transfer Case)/
(6) C104 (Taillamp Ext. Harness) C140 (Selectable Transfer Case)
(7) C103 (Taillamp Ext. Harness)
 Underhood Lamp

Legend
(1) Underhood Lamp (4) Engine Harness
(2) G108 (5) P101
(3) Underhood Lamp Connector
 Underhood Fuse Block and Wiring (CNG)

Legend
(1) C119 (6) C103
(2) C117 (7) C130
(3) C118 (8) C100
(4) ABS Wiring Harness (9) C l06
(5) Engine Wiring Harness (10) Underhood Fuse Block
Connectors: C107, C120 (4L80E w/S4WD)

276630
Connectors: C107, C120 (5-Speed Manual)

276778
276758
 Connectors: C210, C231, C232, C298 and Diode D203 (Crossbody Harness)

278799

Legend
(1) D203 (6) Audio Amplifier
(2) C231 (7) C232
(3) Crossbody. Hamess (8) C210
(4) Radio Amplifier Relay (9) C298
(5) Door Lock Relay (10) IP Harness
 Convenience Center, C205, C210, C218, C221

276793

Legend
(1) C210 (5) IP Wiring Harness
(2) C218 (6) C280
(3) C221 (7) Convenience Center
(4) C205
 Connectors: C221, C222, C301,C302 (Crossbody to Front to Rear Body Harness)

Legend
(1) C222 (3) C302
(2) C221 (4) C301
Connector: C203 (Convenience Center)
 IP Wiring, Tranfer Case Shift Control Module

276795

Legend

(1) DRL Module (7) C271

(2) C298 (8) Transfer Case Shift Control Module,
(3) C233 Connector C1
(4) C100 (9) Transfer Case Shift Control Module,
(5) IP Hamess Connector C2
(6) Steering Column Hamess and C266 (10) Transfer Case Shift Control Module
 Connectors: C227, C233, C266 (IP Left Side)

Legend
(1) C227
(2) C266
 Connectors: C200, C204, C299 (Right Side, Gas)

Legend
(1) Passenger IP Inflation Module Connector (3) C200
(2) C203 (4) C299
 Connectors: C200, C204, C230, C299 (IP Wiring Right Side, Diesel)

276797

Legend
(1) IP Harness (7) Courtesy Lamp, RF
(2) Low Level Coolant Level Module (8) Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer (VSSB)
(3) C200 (9) Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
(4) IP Compartment Box Light Connector (10) C299
(5) C204 (11) Door Jamb Switch and Connector, RF
(6) C230
Heater and A/C Wiring, C203, G202

277642
 Connectors: C300, C307 (Overhead Console)

375523

Legend

(1) Front-to-Rear Body Harness (6) Dome Lamp Harness

(2) C307 (7) Garage Door Lamp Switch
(3) Dome Lamp Connector, Front (8) Auxiliary HVAC Control Module
(4) Auxiliary HVAC Control Module Harness Connector, Front
(5) Dome Lamp Connector, Front 0 ) Overhead Console Harness
 Power Seat Wiring Harness Connectors

(1) C236 (Left)/C237 (Right) (3) C211 (Left)/C228 (Left)

(2) C212 (Left)/C229 (Right)
 Front Door Wiring

375317

Legend

(1) Speaker Connector, Tweeter (10) C206 (Left)/C214 (Right)

(2) Rear Window Lockout Switch Connector (11) C209 (Left)
(3) Power Window Switch (12) C208 (Left)/C214 (Right)
(4) Courtesy Light Connector (13) C207 (Left)/C213 (Right)
(5) Door Lock Switch Connector (14) Crossbody Hamess
(6) Power Window Switch Connector (15) P600 (Right Front)/P500 (Left)
(7) Power Mirror Switch Connector (16) Door Hamess
(8) Speaker Connector (17) C601 (Right)/C501 (Left)
0) Power Window Motor Connector (18) Door Lock Connector (Keyless Entry)
 277129

Legend

(1) Power Door Lock Motor Connector (7) Crossbody Harness

(2) Courtesy Lamp, Door Connector (8) C497 (Right)/C499 (Left)
(3) Speaker, Rear Door (9) Door Wiring Harness
(4) Speaker Connector (10) P800 (Right)/P700 (Left)
(5) Power Window Motor Connector (11) Power Window Switch Connector
(6) C496 (Right)/C498 (Left)
Center High Mounted Stop and Cargo Lamp Wiring, C410, C411 (except Suburban/Utility)

277211
 Rear Body Harness

372228

Legend

(1) CHMSL Connector (10) C406 (Cargo Doors)

(2) C402 (11) Door Lock Switch Connector, Rear
(3) C303 (12) Door Lock Actuator Connector, Rear
(4) Speaker Connector, LR (13) G400
(5) Front to Rear Body Hamess (14) Auxiliary Power Connector, Rear
(6) C314 (Liftgate) (15) Door Jamb Switch Connector, Rear (Liftgate)
(7) C405 (Cargo Doors) (16) C406 (Cargo Doors)
(8) C406 (Liftgate) (17) Door Jamb Switch Connector,
(9) Speaker Connector, RR RR (Cargo Doors)
 Auxiliary A/C W iring

277976

Legend
(1) Auxiliary HVAC Blower Relays; (5) Auxiliary Blower Resistor
Low/Meduim/High (6) Auxiliary Temperature Door Motor
(2) C401 (7) Auxiliary Mode Door Motor
(3) C400
(4) Auxiliary Blower Motor
 375553

(1) C408 (2) Endgate Marker Lamps

 Tail and Stoplamp Harness Connectors

7 1 2

375538

Legend
(1) Tail/Stop Lamp Extension Harness (5) License Plate Lamps
(2) Tail/Stop Lamp Harness (6) C409
(3) Tail/Stop Lamp Connector, RH (7) C407
(4) License Plate Lamp Harness
Legend
(1) C406 (5) C450
(2) C404 (6) P409
(3) Liftgate Release Motor (7) C314
(4) P410 (8) C402
 Underhood Fuse Block and Wiring (Police Package) 1 of 2

Legend
(1) Forward Lamp Harness (5) Convenience Center
(2) Underhood Fuse Block (6) C110
(3) Emergency Roof Lamp Wiring (7) C108 (Police Package Only)
(4) C101 (Auxiliary Fan Only) (8) C102
 Underhood Fuse Block Wiring (Police Package) 2 of 2

465201

Legend
(1) Positive Battery Cable (5) Underhood Fuse Block
(2) Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) (6) Emergency Beacon Relay
(3) C109 (7) Battery, LH (Auxiliary/Diesel Only)
(4) P100
 IP Wiring Harness, Emergency Rooflamp Switch (Police Package)

375610

Legend

(1) Convenience Center (6) Emergency Roof Lamp Switch

(2) C238 (7) Headlamp and Panel Dimmer Switch
(3) Emergency Roof Lamp Harness (8) Headlamp and Panel Dimmer Switch,
(4) Crossbody Harness Connector
(5) Emergency Roof Lamp Switch, Connector (9) IP Harness
 375516

Legend
(1) C271 (5) C232
(2) Grossbody Harness (6) Convenience Center
(3) C231 (7) IP Wiring Harness
(4) C272 (8) Spotlamp Wiring Harness
 IP Wiring Harness, Radio (Police Package)

Legend
(1) Radio (7) Speaker and Flasher Wiring Harness
(2) Rear Wiper Switch (8) C245
(3) Liftgate Release Switch (9) Horn Wiring Harness
(4) DRL/Radio Override Switch (10) C242
(5) C235 (11) C244
(6) Auxiliary Power Harness
Instrument Panel, Gauges and Console
Specifications
Fastener Tightening Specifications
Specification
Application Metric English
Floor Console Bolts 6 N-m 53 lb in
IP Bracket Bolts 20 N-m 151b ft
IP Compartment Assembly Nuts 10 N-m 89 lb m
IP Cupholder Screws 2 N-m 18 lb in
IP to Dash Screws 2 N-m 18 lb in
IP Pivot Bracket Bolts 20 N-m 15 lb ft
Knee Bolster Screws 2 N-m 18 1b in
Knee Bolster Deflector Bolts 3 N-m 27 lb in
Knee Bolster Reinforcement Bolts 7 N-m 62 lb in

GM SPO Group Numbers

Application QM SPO Group Number
Ashtray 16.120
Auxiliary A/C Blower Switch 3.275
Auxiliary Heater Switch a
Auxiliary Switch Opening Cover 16.081
Auxiliary Wiper/Washer Switch ^8 0
Cigar Lighter 3.709
Compass — Console Upper Electrical 8.873
Instrument Cluster Trim Plate 9.743
Instrument Panel Air Outlet Ducts 3.262
Instrument Panel Assist Handle ' G - 50
Instrument Panel Carrier 16 085
Instrument Panel Carrier Support 16.085
Instrument Panel Cup Holder 16.100
Instrument Panel Extension 6.:80
Instrument Panel Extension Compartment Latch S 00
Instrument Panel Storage Compartment v6 090
Knee Bolster 16.090
Knee Bolster Bracket 16.090
Knee Bolster Deflector ■ 6 090
Sensor - Console Upper Amber Air Temp Gauge 9.770
Side Window Defogger Grille 9.780
Windshield Defroster Grille 9.779
Schematic and Routing Diagrams
Instrument Cluster Schematic References
! Reference on Schematic Section Number - Subsection Name
Anti-Lock Brake Systems Cell - 44 5 - ABS Traction Control
Audible Warning Cell - 76 8 - Instrument Panel Gauges and Console
Daytime Running Lamps Cell - 102 8 - Lighting Systems
Engine Controls Cell - 21 6 - Engine Controls
Exterior Lamps Cell - 110 8 - Lighting Systems
Ground Distribution Cell - 14 8 - Wiring Systems
HVAC Blower Controls Cell - 63 1 - HVAC Systems with A/C Manual
Instrument Panel Dimming Cell -117 8 - Lighting Systems
Power Distribution Cell - 10 8 - Wiring Systems
PRNDL Cell - 81 8 - Instrument Panel Gauges and Console
Start and Charge Cell - 30 6 - Engine Controls

Instrument Cluster Schematic Icons

Scon Icon Definition
Refer to Handling ESD Sensitive Parts Notice in Cautions and Notices.

A
19384
 8-492
! Hot in RUN And START 1

instrument Panel, Gauges and Console_________________________________________________

1 H8 i j GAUGES 1 FUS6
Fuse 4 B locl,

0.5 PNK
Low Coolant
|^ > Level
Indicator
Module
0

Instrument
Cluster

k — — — J
 Body and Accessories________________________________________________________________________
Instrument Daytime
Panel Audible Exterior Running
Dimming Warning Lamps Lamps
Cell 117 Cell 76 Cell 110 Cell 102
w ir v w
1
0.35 0.8 YEL 234 LTGRN 11
GRY
1 DK BLU 15
LTBLU 14
0
29 30 32
0
Instrument
4 e > Tell Tale Cluster
^ Lights
Illumination Lamps
(Diesel Only) A
TTTTl
$©©©©$> ©£*©&, © r ©rm© s s©Bi3© DRL © Brake® « ® 2sr ©gr
II I I 11 J
V V V \S V V/ v* V \/ \/ ‘ ' w
Soon

is >

31 1 17 28 27 23 20. 26
0.5 BLK/WHT 451 0.5
0.5 BLK/WHT 451 0.8 BRN 358 0.8 LT GRN/BLK 592
Ground LTGRN 867 0.35 YEL 749-
Distribution
(Gas) Cell 14
____________* S215
Ground (Gas) F , I
Distribution C20G SIR Daytime Running “ASS' Theft
(Diesel) K Cell 47 Lamps Controls Deterrent
(Diesel) Cell 14
Cell 102 Cell 44 Cell 133
>P101

Headlamps Engine Engine

(Base) Controls Controls
1 BLK/WHT 451 1 BLK/WHT 451 Cell 100 (5.0L/5.7L) (5.0L/5.7L)
Ground Ground Engine Engine
Distribution S103 Distribution ► S103 0.5 TAN/WHT 33 Controls Controls
Cell 14
7
1 BLK/WHT 451
Cell 14
(6.5L) (7.4L)

1 BLK/WHT 451 Park Engine

1 0.8 Brake Controls
BLK/WHT 451 Cell 46 (7.4L)
TAN/WHT 551
L G103 # G104 16104

491399
8-494 Instrument Panel, Gauges and Console_________________________________________________
0
0
I Hot In RUN And START |
Instrument Cluster: Analog Schematics (Fuel Gauge Sender (Single Tank, Gas))

Body and Accessories__________________________________________________________________

Instrument
Cluster
Underhood
Fuse
Block

491401
 8-498
” " “ “ " 1 Underhood Instrument
Cluster
Fuse r “ 7 ^ " ~ " " 1 Underhood
Block V

Instrument Panel, Gauges and Console______________________________________________________

, Distribution k ih n f . F use
Block
C2 ,C100

0i8 PPL 30
Power
Distribution Cl
Co!M0 _
Fuel Vehicle
1 GRY 120 Level CONN ID Control
B; Output C1 = BLU
C2 = RED
Module
Fuel Fuel Tank
Level C3 = CLEAR Pressure Sensor
(VCM)
Input 5V C4=BLK Signal Ground
1 GRY 120
a a
S318 (Except 7.4L) 13 C3 25 C2 19 G3
------- m.— ,
0.5 PNK 639 (7.4L) 18 C1 Engine
Controls
0.5 (5.0 U
1 GRY 120 5.7 L)
Fuel PPL/WHT 1589 0.5
B D Pump BLK 470
Engine
Engine Controls
Fuel Balance
0.5 BLK 900
0 Pump
And
Sender
0.8 LT GRN
Relay

0.5 PPL/WHT 1589 S232

Controls
(7.4 L)

t
(5.0 U
5.7 L)

Engine
Controls
G I Federal I (7.4 L)
1058
[Oatifomten
0.5 LTGRN 0.5
DK S106
1 BLK 150 0.5 S325
DK BLU/WHT 970' GRN 890
.C Cl B
0.8 Primary Fuel Pump Ignition Output Fuel
LTGRN 1058 Tank Balance..'' To: .■ Pump 0.5 GRY 474
Fuel Relay ; Gauge Balance
S324 i Level Control
; Secondary
0.8 BLK 900 Signal
Tank Fuel Module
Ground Level Signal 5V ■■■ > B C130
D y,C103
0.5
BLK 900 EJ' B C1 Y 0.5
0.8 BLK 900 0.5 LT BLU 975 0.5 GRY DK
0.5 BLK 900 474 GRN 890
12 C4 1 BLK 150 Secondary A D C130
Vehicle Fuel Secondary 0.5
Control Pump Fuel BLK 470
Module f -$ t$ r ;Gauge A
(VCM) 1 BLK 150 Sender Fuel
a S319 Tank
j ^ 1BLK 150 Pressure
A G404 Sensor
 Body and Accessories_________________________________________________________________________
P100
Underhood
Fuse
Block 0.5 PPL 30
B, C104

0.8 PNK 639 0.8 PNK 639

0.8 PPL 30 0
1 GRY 120
1r
Power
Distribution
w/Dual
Fuel Tanks
w/o Dual
Fuel Tanks
0
B. Cell 10 C C103 ■
0.8 PNK 639
1 GRY 120
S3151
S318 1 GRY 120 0.8 PNK 639 0.5 PNK 639 0.5 PPL 30
1 GRY 120 85 1 30
Fuel Fuel
Gauge Pump 0.8 PPL 30
B.
Sender h Balance\
Relay
iGRY 120 -a' 1 1 "' B,
B 86 87
Fuel' 0.8 PPL 30

0 Pump
0.8 DK BLU/WHT 970
0.8 LT GRN 497
0,8 LT GRN 1058 Fuel
Pump
And
0.8 BLK 150 C D
Fuel B Sender
Primary Tank Fuel Pump Ignition Output
A 0.8 BLK/WHT 481 Fuel Level Balance Relay Pump
Signal Control
Secondary Tank q° 0.8 BLK/WHT 451
Fuel Level Balance A
Signal Module LT 1058
Ground
0.8 BLK/WHT 451
B Secondary
0.8 BLK/WHT 451 ifk Fuel
0.8 BLK 150 $317 1 0.5 LT BLU 975 0 Pump
C103
0.8 BLK/WHT 451 0.8 BLK/WHT 451
D Cl 03 0.5 BLK/WHT 451
A 0.8 BLK 150
0.5 BLK/WHT 451 Secondary A
Ground
r Fuel Gauge 1 BLK' 451 Distribution 1S103
S103 Sender Cell 14

1 1 BLK/WHT 451 0.8 BLK 150 0.5 BLK 1 BLK/WHT 451

f S319
Ground 0.8 TAN/BLK 150
Distribution 1 BLK 451 0.8 TAN/BLK
Cell t4 551 . G104 »G404 551 4.G104

491403
 8-498
I"Ignition-#— Jr -------- ->|p
D2 JL tra n s 'Fuse

Instrument Panel, Gauges and C o nsole_____________________________________________________

I Buss

i ei ^ !Bl0Ck
i i
Power
Distribution
0.35 PNK L -----------/
Instrument Cell 10 Instrument
Panel Dimming 1020 0.35 PNK 1020 Panel Dimming
Cell 117 0.8 PPL/WHT 1382 0.35 GRY 8 * Cell 117
a l _____________________ 7, 29
-------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------- -i|
0
1 _ _______ i,
pr n d l * Cluster
LED Dimming Ignition

Ground PRNDL Parity PRNDL C PRNDL B PRNDLA

J iH

9
0.5 BLK/WHT m
772

C200 (Diesel)
G (Gas)

0.5
772 BLK/WHT 771
A C2
^ Transmission
1Range
1Switch
S(Fart Of Park/
/ j Neutral Position
Switch)

1 BLK/WHT 451 0.8 BLK 150 0.8 BLK 150

Ground
1 BLK/WHT 451 Distribution »S162 S1071b —
Ground Ground Cell 14
1 BLK 150 1
Distribution S103 S103 < Distribution 1 BLK 150 Ground
Cell 14 Cell 14 Ground Distribution
Distribution >6147 S147«
Cell 14
1 BLK/WHT 451 Cell 14
1 BLK/WHT 461 3 BLK 150 3 BLK 150 5
0.8 TAN/WHT 551
1 BLK/WHT 451 5 BLK BLK 150
. G103 j L G104 lG105
150 .SG105
Compo nent Locator
Instrument Cluster Components
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Audio Alarm Module In the convenience center Component Views Connector End Views
in Wiring Systems in Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Under the left side of the IP, on the
Convenience Center Component Views in Connector End Views
bulkhead
Wiring Systems in Wiring Systems
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Daytime Running Under the left side of the IP, taped to the
Component Views in Connector End Views
Lamps (DRL) Module IP harness
Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Electronic Brake Antilock Brakes System Antilock Brakes System
Near Brake Master Cylinder, at LF
Control Module Component Views in Connector End Views in
Wheelhousing
(EBCM) ABS/Traction Control ABS/Traction Control
Electronic Variable Theft Deterrent System Theft Deterrent System
Orifice (EVO)/Passloek Under the center of the IP Component Views in Connector End Views in
Module Theft Deterrent Theft Deterrent
Engine Coolant Cooling System Cooling System
Temperature LH Cylinder Head, near #1 Spark Plug Component Views Connector End Views
Sender (Gas) in Engine Cooling in Engine Cooling
Engine Controls Engine Controls
Fuel Pump (Diesel) Inside LH Frame Rail, below LF Door Component Views Connector End Views
in Engine Controls in Engine Controls
• 4.3L Engine Controls
• 4.3L Engine Controls Connector
Component Views End Views
• 5.0/5.7L Engine • 5.0/5.7L Engine
Fuel Pump and Sender In Fuel Tank Controls Controls Connector
Component Views End Views
• 7.4L Engine Controls • 7.4L Engine Controls
Component Views Connector
End Views
Fuel Purnp Inside LH Frame Rail, near Transmission Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster
Balance Module Crossmember Component Views Connector End Views
On Fuel Pump Balance Module, inside LH
Fuel Pump Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster
Frame Rail, near Transmission
Balance Relay Component Views Connector End Views
Crossmember
» 4.3L Engine Controls
• 4.3L Engine Controls Connector
Component Views End Views
In Underhood Fuse-Relay Center, LR of • 5.0/5.7L Engine • 5.0/5.7L Engine
Fuel Pump Relay Controls Controls Connector
Engine Compartment, on Fender
Component Views End Views
• 7.4L Engine Controls 9 7.4L Engine Controls
Component Views Connector
End Views
• 4.3L Engine Controls
• 4.3L Engine Controls Connector
Component Views End Views
Fuel Tank • 5.0/5.7L Engine • 5.0/5.7L Engine
In Fuel Tank Controls Controls Connector
Pressure Sensor
Component Views End Views
• 7.4L Engine Controls • 7.4L Engine Controls
Component Views Connector
End Views
 Instrument Cluster Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
E n g in e E le c tric a l E n g in e E le c tric a l
Generator LH Front of Engine C o m p o n e n t V ie w s in C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Engine Electrical in Engine Electrical
• 4.3L E n g in e C o n tro ls
• 4.3L E n g in e C o n tro ls C o n n e c to r
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s E n d V ie w s
• 5.0/5.7L E n g in e • 5.0/5.7L E n g in e
Ignition Coil RR of Engine C o n tro ls C o n tro ls C o n n e c to r
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s E n d V ie w s
• 7.4L E n g in e C o n tro ls • 7.4L E n g in e C o n tro ls
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r
E n d V ie w s
Inflatable Restraint S IR C o m p o n e n t V ie w s
S IR C o n n e c to r E n d
Sensing and Diagnostic Under Carpet Beneath Drivers Seat in SIR
V ie w s (S w itc h a n d
Module (SDM) S e n s o r V ie w s) in SIR
On the upper left end of the IP, above the In s tru m e n t C lu s te r In s tru m e n t C lu s te r
Instrument Cluster steering column C o m p o n e n t V iew s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g
To the left of the IP, near the left front C o m p o n e n t V ie w s in C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s in
IP Fuse Block door jamb switch
Wiring Systems Wiring Systems
• 4.3L E n g in e C o n tro ls
• 4.3L E n g in e C o n tro ls C o n n e c to r
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s E n d V iew s
Low Coolant Level • 5.0/5.7L E n g in e • 5.0/5.7L E n g in e
Indicator Module Under center of IP C o n tro ls C o n tro ls C o n n e c to r
(Diesel) C o m p o n e n t V ie w s E n d V iew s
• 7.4L E n g in e C o n tro ls • 7.4L E n g in e C o n tro ls
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r
E n d V iew s

• 4.3L E n g in e C o n tro ls
• 4.3L E n g in e C o n tro ls C o n n e c to r
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s E n d V iew s

Low Coolant Level In Coolant Reservoir, RH of Engine • 5.0/5.7L E n g in e • 5.0/5.7L E n g in e

C o n tro ls C o n tro ls C o n n e c to r
Sensor (Diesel) Compartment
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s E n d V ie w s
• 7.4L E n g in e C o n tro ls • 7.4L E n g in e C o n tro ls
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r
E n d V ie w s

• 4.3L E n g in e C o n tro ls
C o m p o n e n t V iew s

Powertrain Control Under RH end of IP, above Blower Motor, • 5.0/5.7L E n g in e P C M C o n n e c to r E n d

C o n tro ls V ie w s in Engine Controls
Module (PCM) (Diesel) behind IP Compartment Box
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s
• 7.4L E n g in e C o n tro ls
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s
P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g
In the left rear side of the engine C o m p o n e n t V ie w s in C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s in
Underhood Fuse Block compartment, on the fender
Wiring Systems Wiring Systems
• 4.3L E n g in e C o n tro ls • 4.3L V C M C o n n e c to r
C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V iew s

Vehicle Control Module Engine Compartment, near EBCM • 5.0/5.7L E n g in e • 5.0/5.7L VCM
C o n tro ls C o n n e c to r
(VCM) (Gas)
C o m p o n e n t V iew s E n d V iew s
• 7.4L E n g in e C o n tro ls • 7.4L V C M C o n n e c to r
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s E n d V iew s
 Instrument Cluster Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Water-in-Fuel Sensor E n g in e C o n tro ls E n g in e C o n tro ls
Top near of Engine
(Diesel) C o m p o n e n t V ie w s C o n n e c to r E n d V ie w s
Part of the engine harness to IP harness, In lin e H a r n e s s C o n n e c to r
H a r n e s s R o u tin g V ie w s in
C100 in the left rear side of the engine E n d V ie w s in Wiring
Wiring Systems
compartment, at the bulkhead Systems
Part of the engine harness to fuel pump
In lin e H a r n e s s C o n n e c to r
motor, in the left rear side of the engine H a r n e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C103 E n d V ie w s in Wiring
compartment, under the brake master in Wiring Systems
Systems
cylinder
Part of the IP harness to front to rear
In lin e H a r n e s s C o n n e c to r
harness, in the left rear side of the engine H a r n e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C104 E n d V ie w s in Wiring
compartment, under the brake master in Wiring Systems
Systems
cylinder
In lin e H a r n e s s C o n n e c to r
C112 Part of the engine harness to engine H a r n e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
E n d V ie w s in Wiring
(Diesel) sensors, center rear of the engine in Wiring Systems
Systems
In lin e H a r n e s s C o n n e c to r
In-line connector, from the Engine harness H a r n e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C115 E n d V ie w s in Wiring
to the Alternator Jumper harness in Wiring Systems
Systems
In lin e H a r n e s s C o n n e c to r
Engine harness, Inline to the Tail and Stop H a r n e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C130 E n d V ie w s in Wiring
Lamp Extension harness in Wiring Systems
Systems
In lin e H a r n e s s C o n n e c to r
Behind the right side of the IP, near the H a r n e s s R o u tin g V ie w s E n d V ie w s in Wiring
C200
heater motor, in foam wrap in Wiring Systems
Systems
In lin e H a r n e s s C o n n e c to r
H a r n e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C215 Inside the lower right side A pillar E n d V ie w s in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
Systems
In lin e H a r n e s s C o n n e c to r
H a r n e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C223 At the convenience center E n d V ie w s in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
Systems
In lin e H a r n e s s C o n n e c to r
Part of the IP harness to SIR harness, H a r n e s s R o u tin g V ie w s
C232 E n d V ie w s in Wiring
behind the right side of the IP in Wiring Systems
Systems
P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g
G103 On the right front side of the engine, near
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s —
(Gas) the thermostat housing
in Wiring Systems
P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g
G104
Backside of the right cylinder head C o m p o n e n t V ie w s —
(4.3L, 5.0L/5.7L)
in Wiring Systems
P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g
G104
Top rear of the right cylinder head C o m p o n e n t V ie w s — . .
(6.5L)
in Wiring Systems
P o w e r a n d G r o u n d in g
G104 Backside of the engine block, below the
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s —
(7.4L) right cylinder head
in Wiring Systems
P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g
G105
On the right front side of the engine block C o m p o n e n t V ie w s —
(Gas)
in Wiring Systems
P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g
G105 Right Rear of the cylinder head,
cylinder #7 intake bolt
C o m p o n e n t V ie w s —
(Diesel)
in Wiring Systems
P o w e r a n d G ro u n d in g
Behind the left side of the IP, below the
G200 C o m p o n e n t V ie w s ~~
fuse block, on the tie bar
in Wiring Systems
 Instrument Cluster Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Power and Grounding
Inside the left side frame rail, near the rear
G404 crossmember Component Views —
in Wiring Systems
In the left rear side of the engine
Harness Routing Views
P100 compartment, at the bulkhead, —
in Wiring Systems
above C100
In the right rear side of the engine Harness Routing Views
P101 compartment, at the bulkhead in Wiring Systems —
S100 Engine harness, approx. 23 cm (9 in) from
EBCM breakout, toward taillamp harness — —
(7.4L)
S100 Engine harness, approx. 17 cm (7 in) from
(4.3L, 5.0L, 5.7L) EBCM breakout, toward taillamp harness — —
Engine harness, approx. 31 cm (12 in)
o f,
o

from taillamp harness breakout — —

CD

Engine harness, approx. 37 cm (14.5 in)

S100 from EBCM breakout, toward taillamp
(6.5L - M/T) — —
harness
Engine harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S103 EGR valve breakout, toward taillamp — — '
(4.3L, 5.0L, 5.7L) harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 12 cm (4.7 in)
S103 from starter solenoid breakout, towards the — —
(6.51) Underhood Lamp harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S103 the EGR Valve harness breakout, towards
(7.4L - A/T)
" ' '— ■ ' ' '' ■ —
the Ignition Coil harness breakout
Engine Harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in)
S103 from the Fuel Injector harness breakout, —
(7.4L - M/T)
—
towards the Taillamp harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 17 cm (6.5 in)
S106 from EGR valve breakout, toward fuel — __
(4.3L, 5.0L, 5.7L) injector breakout
Engine harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in) from
S106 EGR valve breakout, toward fuel injector — —
(7.41) breakout
Engine harness, approx. 20 cm (8 in) from
S107 EGR valve breakout, toward taillamp
(4.3L, 5.0L, 5.7L) — —
harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 40 cm (15 in)
S107 from EBCM breakout, toward Transmission
(6.5L, HD "— —
harness breakout
Engine harness, approx. 18 cm (7 in) from
S107 EBCM breakout, toward the EGR harness
(7.4L) — ' ' —
breakout
Engine harness, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in)
S108 from ignition coil breakout, toward starter —
(Gas) —
solenoid
Engine harness, approx. 6 cm (2.5 in) from
S108 Transmission harness breakout, towards
(Diesel) — — .

the PCM
S115 Engine jumper harness, approx. 5 cm
(2 in) from oil pressure sensor breakout — —
(6.5L)
Engine harness, approx. 22 cm (8.5 in)
S146 into the Underhood Fuse Relay Center
(7.4L)
harness
 Instrument Cluster Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
engine harness, approx. 5 cm (2 in) from
S147 EGR valve breakout, toward taillamp —
—
(Gas) harness breakout
S147 Engine harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
starter motor solenoid breakout — —
(Diesel)
Engine harness, approx. 17 cm (6.5 in)
S162 from starter solenoid breakout, toward LH — —
(4..3L, 5.0L, 5.7L) oxygen sensor breakout
Engine harness, approx. 15 cm (6 in) from
S162 RH bank oxygen sensor breakout, toward — —
(7.4L) starter solenoid breakout
S211 IP harness, approx. 16 cm (6 in) into
instrument cluster breakout — —
(Diesel)
S211 IP harness approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from —-
—
(Gas) engine harness breakout
IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
S213 steering column harness breakout, towards — —
the DLC
IP harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in) from
S215 instrument cluster breakout, toward radio — —
connectors breakout
IP harness, approx. 16 cm (6 in) from
S217 instrument cluster harness breakout, — —
toward radio connectors breakout
S232 Engine harness, approx. 10 cm (4 in) from
EGR valve breakout — —
(5.0L - HD, 5.7L - HD)
S232 Engine harness, approx. 27 cm (10.5 in)
from EGR valve breakout —
(5.0L - LD, 5.7L - LD)
S232 Engine harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) into —-
EGR valve breakout —
(7.4L)
IP harness, approx. 24 cm (9.5 in) from
S298 instrument cluster breakout, toward radio — —
breakout
Taillamp extension harness, approx. 40 cm
S315 (15 in) from fuel pump balance module ■
breakout, toward engine harness
Taillamp extension harness, approx. 10 cm
S317 (4 in) from fuel pump and sender breakout, — —
toward engine harness
Taillamp extension harness, approx. 10 cm
S318 (4 in) from fuel pump balance module — —
breakout, toward engine harness
Taillamp extension harness, approx. 7 cm
S319 (2.5 in) from fuel pump and sender
— --
(Gas) breakout, toward balance fuel pump
balance module breakout
Taillamp extension harness, approx. 10 cm
S324 (4 in) from G404 breakout, toward engine — __
harness
Taillamp extension harness, approx. 6 cm
S430 (2.5 in) from fuel pump harness breakout, — —
toward C409
Instrument Cluster Component Views
Instrument Cluster

405355

(1) Instrument Cluster (2) Dash Panel Assembly

 Instrument Panel Wiring, Left Side, Rear View

Legend
(1) Headlam p and Panel Dimmer Switch (3) Instrument Cluster Connector
Connector
(2) IP Fuse Block
 Convenience Center

278144

Legend
(1) Convenience C enter (4) DRL Relay
(2) Audio Alarm Module (5) Fog Lamp Relay
(3) Turn/H azard Flasher (6) Park Brake W arning Switch
 Connectors: C200, C204, C230, C299 (IP Wiring Right Side, Diesel)

276797

Legend
(1) IP Harness (7) Courtesy Lamp, RF
(2) Low Level Coolant Level Module (8) Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer (VSSB )
(3) C 200 (9) Powertrain Control Module (P C M )
(4) IP Com partment Box Light Connector (10) C 299
(5) C 20 4 (11) Door Jamb Switch and Connector, RF
(6) C 230
 Coolant Reservoir (Diesel)

Legend
(1) Coolant Reservoir (6) Engine Harness
(2) A/C Compressor Cycling Switch (7) P101
(3) G 108 (8) Low Coolant Level Sensor connector
(4) Underhood Lamp connector (9) Low Coolant Level Sensor
(5) Underhood Ground Strap (10) Manifold Air Flow Harness
 Fuel Pump Balance Module and Relay

372191

Legend
(1) Fuel Pump Balance Relay (5) Fuel Tank Harness
(2) Fuel Pump and Sender connector (Diesel) (6) G404
(3) Fuel Pump Balance Module (7) R ear Lamp Extension Harness
(4) Fuel Pump Balance Moduel connector
 Fuel Pump and Sender (Single Tank)

Legend
(1) G 404 (5) G 404
(2) Fuel Tank (6) Fuel Pump and Sender connector (Diesel)
(3) Fuel Tank Sender connector (7) R ear Lamp Extension Harness
(4) Fuel Pump connector (8) Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly
 Fuel Pump and Sender (Utility)

Legend
(1) R ear Lamp Extension Harness (4) Fuel Pump and Sender
(2) Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor connector (5) Fuel Pump and Sender connector
(3) G 404 (6) Fuel Tank
 Auxliary Fuel Tank (under 15,000 GVW)

Legend
(1) Fuel Tank, R ear (5) R ear Lamp Extension Harness
(2) Fuel Pump connector (6) Fuel Tank Harness
(3) Fuel Pump (7) Fuel Tank Sender connector
(4) Fuel Tank Sender
 Auxliary Fuel Tank (over 15,000 GVW)

Legend
(1) Tail Lamp, LH (4) Fuel Pump and Sender
(2) R ear Lamp Extension Harness (5) Fuel Pump and Sender connector
(3) Fuel Filter (6) Fuel Tank, R ear
Visual Identification
Instrument Cluster Connector End Views Auxiliary Fuel Pump And Sender
Connector (Gas)
Fuel Pump Motor and Sender
Connector (Gas)

0 A|

m
v -------- 'A

Connector Part 12102188

258300 Information 4F M/P 150.2P25 (BLK)
Connector Part • 12160482 Circuit
Information Wire Color
JF M/P 150 (E^ ‘ Pin No. Function
Circuit Engine Control Module
Wire Color BLK/WHT 900
Pin No. Function Ground
A PPL 1589 Fuel Gauge Sensor Signal B-C Not Used
B GRY 120 Fuel Pump Motor Feed Auxiliary Fuel Pump
LT BLU 975 Motor Feed
C BLK 150 Ground
D BLK 470 Sensor Return
Auxiliary Fuel Pump And Sender
Connector (Diesel)
Fuel Pump Motor and Sender
Connector (Diesel)

H
B A

Connector Part 12162188

information 4F M/P 150.2P25 (BLK)
Connector Part • 12010973
information Circuit
* 2M W/P 5HD (BLK) Wire Color
Pin No. Function
Circuit
Wire Color Engine Control Module
Pin No, Function BLK/WHT 451 Ground
Engine Control Module
BLK/WHT 451 B-C Not Used
Ground
Auxiliary Fuel Pump
PPL 30 Fuel Gauge Sensor Signal D LT BLU 975 Motor Feed
 Fuel Pump Motor Connector Fuel Pump Connector (Diesel)

A J A J
B A B A

258174 258174

Connector Part • 12010973 Connector Part • 12010973

Information *• 2M M/P WIP SHD SLD (BLK) I Information • 2M W/P SHD SLD (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Wire Color Wire Color
Pin No. Function Pin No, Function
A BLK 150 Ground A BLK 150 Ground
Fuel Pump Motor Feed B GRY 120 Fuel Pump Motor Feed
B LTGRN 1058
Secondary
Fuel Pump And Sender Connector
Fuel Gauge Sender Connector (Gas, Dual Tank)
(Diesel, Dual Tank)

@>(5
■

[Ih Ih j
H a ll
A 1 55=3? l
<
B A
W M
258300
1
258174
« 12160482
Connector Part
Connector Part • 12010973 • 4-Way F Metri-Pack 150
Information
Information • 2M W/P SHD SLD (BLK) Series (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Wire Color Wire Color
Pin No. Function Pin No. Function

BLK/WHT 451
Engine Control Module DK BLU/ Fuel Level Signal to Fuel
970
A Ground A WHT Pump Balance Module
DK BLU/ B GRY 120 Fuel Pump Motor Feed
B 970 Fuel Pump Motor Feed
WHT
C BLK 150 Ground
D BLK 900 Sensor Return
 Engine Temperature Switch Connector Fuel Pump Balance Module Connector, C1
(Gas, Dual Tank)

287962
Connector Part • 12089499
information ® 1F M/P 150 (BLU) Connector Part V 12162826
Information • 5F M/P 150.2 (BLK)
Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Circuit
Coolant Temperature Pin Wire Color No. Function
DK GRN 35
Indicator Lamp Output Fuse Output - Ignition 1
PNK 639
Not Used - Type III Fuse
Secondary Fuel Sender
LT BLU 975
Signal
Fuel Pump Balance Module Relay
DK BLU/ Primary Fuel Sender
970
WHT Signal
Fuel Pump Balance
LTGRN 497 Relay Output - Coll -
Secondary
VCM Sender Return
BLK 900
Signal ___

Fuel Pump Balance Module Connector, C2

(Gas, Dual Tank)

Connector Part » 12129716

Information • 4F M/P 280 (GRY)
Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function
Fuse Output Ignition - 1
30 PNK 639
Type ill Fuse
85 GRY 120 Fuel Pump Motor Feed
Fuel Pump Relay
68719
86 LTGRN 497 Output - Coil -
Secondary Connector Part 12162193
Fuel Pump Motor Feed • Information 2F M/P 150.2 (BLK)
87 LTGRN 1058
Secondary
Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function
Reference Voltage Feed
A GRY 474
- 5 volt reference
Fuel Gauge Sensor
PPL 1589
Signal
 Fuel Pump Balance Module Low Engine Coolant Level Indicator
Connector (Diesel) Module Connector (Diesel)

f . Li 21 )

/
/ -.. .. X™

A B ■ C D E F- .
F 0 E 0 d 0 c 0 b 0 a :d
f
v — --- ------------------
, L.................. .... .............- ........ .. : . . =1 y
-----------------------------------------

j 73212

Connector Part • 12059573 Connector Part • 12004706

Information • 6F M/P 280 (BLK) Information • P/C Edgeboard (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No, Function Pin
Wire Color No. Function
Fuse Output Ignition - 1 Fuse Output - Ignition 1
A PNK 639 PNK 39
Type III Fuse Type III Fuse
Auxiliary Fuel Pump
B LT BLU 975 Motor Feed Not Used
DK BLU/ BLK 150 Ground
C WHT 970 Fuel Pump Motor Feed
Not Used
Fuel Pump Relay Low Coolant Level
D LT GRN 497 Output - Coil - YEL/BLK 68
Indicator Lamp Output
Secondary
Low Coolant Sensor
Engine Control Module LT GRN 1478
E BLK/WHT 451 Signal
Ground
F PPL Fuel Gauge Sensor
30 Low Engine Coolant Level Indicator
Signal
Sensor Connector (Diesel)
Engine Oil Pressure Sender Connector

68719

39663
Connector Part
12052641
Information 2-Way F Metri-pack 150
• 12065299
Connector Part Series (BLK)
Information • 4-Way F Metri-pack 150
Series (GRY) Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function
Circuit
Pin Wire Color No. Function Low Coolant Sensor
LTGRN 1478 Signal
A TAN 31 Oil Pressure Indicator
Lamp Output BLK 150 Ground
B-D — — Not Used
Park/Neutral Position Switch, C1 Connector Park/Neutral Position Switch, C2 Connector

J
^ ---------- v

11— ®
□
□ __ E

I
^ _______ *

40412
12129840
Connector Part
7-Way F Metri-pack • 12191757
Information Connector Part
Mixed (GRY) Information • 4-Way F Metri-pack 150
Circuit Series (NAT)
Pin Wire Color No- Function Circuit
T ransmission-mounted Pin Wire Color No. Function
YEL 1737 Neutral Safety Switch
A Transmission Position
Output
BLK/WHT 771
Switch Signal (Bit 1)
T ransmission-mounted Transmission Position
B GRY 773
LTGRN 275 Neutral Safety Switch Switch Signal (Bit 3)
Output - Park
Transmission Position
Fuse Output - Ignition 1
C WHT 776
Switch Signal (Parity)
PNK 139
- Type III Fuse Transmission Position
D YEL 772
BLK 150 Ground Switch Signal (Bit 2)
Fuse Output - Crank
PPL 806 Type III Fuse
LTGRN 24 Backup Lamp Feed
Starter Relay
PPL/WHT 1035 Feed - Coil
 instrument Cluster Connector Instrument Cluster Connector (cont’d)

Connector Part 12146397 Connector Part • 12146397

Information 32 Way P/C BOW P2S (BLK) Information • 32 Way P/C BOW P2S (BLK)
Circuit Circuit
Pin Wire Color No* Function Pin Wire Color No. Function
SIR Indicator Lamp Water In Fuel Indicator
BRN 358 18 YEL/BLK 508
Output Lamp Output (Diesel)
Fuse Output - Battery ■ 19 BRN 25 Battery Lamp
ORN 1140 Type III Fuse (Z56) Shift Indicator Lamp
20 TAN/BLK 456
Turn Signal Lamp Feed Output (Gas)
LT BLU 14 (Left Turn) Glow Plug Indicator
20 DK BLU 507
BLK/WHT 451 Ground Lamp Signal (Diesel)
LTGRN 11 Hi Beam Service Throttle Soon
WHT 121 Tachometer 21 WHT/BLK 176 Indicator Lamp Output
(Diesel)
PNK 39 Ignition 1
22 PNK 39 Ignition 1
PNK 1020 Ignition O-PRNDL
Check Engine Indicator
PPL/WHT 1382 Oil Pressure 23 BRN/WHT 419 Lamp Output
BLK/WHT 771 PRNDL A LT BLU/ Service 4WD/AWD
24 1567
10 GRY 773 PRNDL C BLK Indicator Lamp Output
11 YEL 772 PRNDL B Low Coolant Level
25 YEL/BLK 68 Indicator Lamp Output
12 WHT 776 PRNDL/Parity (Diesel)
13 DK GRN 35 Coolant Temperature 26 YEL 749 Security Lamp Input
14 DK GRN 389 Speedometer 27 LTGRN 867 ABS Lamp
Vehicle Speed Signal Brake Warning Indicator
14 DK GRN/ 28 TAN/WHT 33
WHT 817 4000 Pulses Per Mile Lamp Output
(Diesel)
29 GRY l/P Dimming
Oli Pressure Indicator
15 TAN 31 30 YEL 234 Seat Belt Lamp
Lamp Output
Fuel Gauge Sensor 31 BLK/WHT 451 Ground
16 PPL 30 Signal Turn Signal Lamp Feed
32 DK BLU 15 (Right Front)______
17 LT GRNI 592 Daytime Running Lamp
BLK Relay Output - Coil
Diagno stic information and Procedures
Instrument Cluster System Check
Instrument Cluster System Check
Step Action
1. Close all of the vehicle’s doors.
2. Leave the safety belt
unbuckled.
3. Verify the gear selector is in
the PARK position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
ON position.
* 1
1. Buckle the driver’s safety belt.
2 Always On.
2. Observe the fasten safety belt
indicator.
Apply the park brake.
3 Hydraulic Park Brake Diagnostic.
Operate the left turn signal. Operate
the right turn signal.
4 •
Turn the park lights on. Disengage
the Parking Brake. Apply the
5 indicator turns off when the Park
park brake.
Turn the headlights on.
6 and dims to the setting on the
Adjust the instrument panel dimmer
7 control.
Normal Result(s)
The vehicle performs a bulb check on
the indicators. The following
indicators illuminate briefly: ABS
Air Bag Fasten Belts Battery Charge
Check Gauges Park Brake Security
Service Engine Soon For Diesels the
following indicators also illuminate
briefly:
- Low Coolant Level
- Water In Fuel
The fasten safety belt indicator is off.
The park brake indicator illuminates.
Each turn signal indicator flashes.
The DRL indicator illuminates with The DRL indicator does not
the Park Brake disengaged. The DRL illuminate or turn off with the Park
Brake applied.DRL System Check
Brake is applied.
The l/P Cluster illumination turns on
dimmer control.
The l/P Cluster illumination varies
based on the dimmer control
adjustment.
Abnormal Result(s)*
• ABS Indicator does not light.
ABS Diagnostic System Check.
® Air Bag Indicator does not light.
SIR Diagnostic System Check.
• Fasten Safety Belt Indicator
Inoperative.
• Battery Indicator does not light.
Charging System Check.
• Park Brake Indicator does not
light. Hydraulic Park Brake
Diagnostic.
• Security Indicator does not light.
A Diagnostic System Check -
Theft Deterrent.
• Service Engine Soon (MIL)
indicator does not light.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Circuit Check /Malfunction
Indicator Lamp Circuit Check /No
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
• Water-ln-Fuel Indicator does not
light or is always on.
Water-in-Fuel Lamp Circuit
Diagnosis.
• Low Engine Coolant Indicator
Always On. Low Engine
Coolant Indicator Always On
(Diesel Only).
• Low Engine Coolant Indicator
Inoperative. Low Engine
Coolant Indicator Inoperative
(Diesel Only).
Fasten Safety Belt Indicator
Park Brake Indicator Inoperative.
• Left Turn Indicator Is inoperative
• Right Turn Indicator Inoperative
Left Turn Indicator Always On
• Right Turn Indicator Always On
Exterior Lights System Check.
l/P Cluster illumination lamps do not
turn on or dim. Interior Lights
Dimming System Check.
l/P Cluster Illumination Does Not
Vary. Interior Lights Dimming
System Check.
 Instrument Cluster System Check (cont’d)
Step Action Normal Result(s) Abnormal Result(s)*
Turn the high beam headlamps on. The high beam indicator illuminates. • High Beam Indicator Inoperative
• High Beam Indicator Is
8
Always On
leadlight System Check.
Observe the Service Engine Soon Service Engine Soon indicator is off. Service Engine Soon Indicator is
indicator. always on.Malfunction Indicator
9 Lamp Circuit Check /Malfunction
Indicator Lamp Circuit Check /No
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
Observe the battery charge The battery charge indicator is off. Battery Charge Indicator Always On.
10
indicator. Charging System Check.
Observe the Air Bag indicator. The Air Bag indicator is off. Air Bag Indicator On. SIR Diagnostic
11
System Check.
Observe the ABS indicator. The ABS indicator is off. ABS Indicator On. ABS A Diagnostic
12
System Check.
Observe the SECURITY indicator. The SECURITY indicator is off. Security Indicator On. A Diagnostic
13
System Check - Theft Deterrent
Cycle the gear selector lever The PRNDL displays the correct gear • PRNDL Display Inaccurate or
through all of the gear positions. positions. Inoperative (PRNDL Inoperative).
14
• PRNDL Display Inaccurate or
Inoperative (PRNDL Inaccurate).
Turn the hazard flashers on. Both turn indicators flash. Hazard flashers inoperative. Exterior
15
Lights System Check.
* Refer to the appropriate symptom diagnostic table for the applicable abnormal result.

Instrument Cluster System Check

Step Action Normal Result(s) Abnormal'Result(s)*
1. Start the engine. Engine oil pressure should read • Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
within the normal range. Always High (Diesel).
2. Observe the engine oil gauge.
• Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Always High (Diesel).
• Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Always Low (Diesel).
1 • Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Always Low (Diesel).
• Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Inaccurate or Inoperative
(Diesel).
• Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Always High (Diesel).
Observe the fuel gauge. The fuel gauge indicates the correct • Fuel Gauge Always Indicates
fuel level. Empty (Gas).
• Fuel Gauge Always Indicates
Empty (Single Tank, Diesel).
• Fuel Gauge Always Indicates
Empty (Dual Tank, Diesel).
2
• Fuel Gauge Always Indicates
Full (Single Tank, Diesel).
• Fuel Gauge Always Indicates
Full (Gas).
• Fuel Gauge Always Indicates
Full (Dual Tank Diesel).
 Instrument Cluster System Check (cont’d)
Step Action Normal Result(s) Abnormal Result(s)*
1. Ensure the engine is at The engine temperature gauge • Engine Coolant Temperature
operating temperature. indicates the correct engine Gauge Always Cold.
temperature.
3 2. Observe the engine • Engine Coolant Temperature
temperature gauge. Gauge Always Hot
• Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge Inaccurate or Inoperative.

4 Observe the voltmeter. Voltmeter indicates a charge of Volt Gauge Inaccurate or

13-14.5 volts. Inoperative.
Observe the tachometer. The tachometer indicates the correct • Tachometer Inaccurate.
5 engine speed.
• Tachometer Inoperative (Gas).
• Tachometer Inoperative (Diesel).
Drive vehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h) The speedometer and the odometer * Speedometer Inaccurate
over a known distance. operate properly. (J 38522 Unavailable).
6
• Speedometer and/or Odometer
Inoperative.
* Refer to the appropriate symptom diagnostic table for the applicable abnormal result.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Always Cold

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Disconnect the connector at the Engine Coolant

Temperature Sender.

2 2. Connect a fused jumper wire from Engine Coolant —

Temperature Sender connector cavity A to ground.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
Does the temperature gauge indicate HOT? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the Engine Coolant Temperature Sender. Refer to
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement in Go to Instrument
3 Engine Cooling. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Remove the l/P Cluster.

2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between pin 13
4 of the l/P Cluster connector and cavity A of the —
Engine Coolant Temperature Sender.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Locate and repair the open in CKT 35 (DK GRN) between
the Engine Coolant Temperature Sender and the l/P Go to Instrument
5 Cluster. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement. Go to Instrument
6 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Always Hot
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System C het1

1. Disconnect the connector at the Engine Coolant

Temperature Sender.
2 2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. —
Does the temperature gauge indicate cold, or below 100°F
for gasoline engines and 160°F for diesel engines? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the Engine Coolant Temperature Sender. Refer to
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement in Go to Instrument
3 Engine Cooling. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Remove the l/P Cluster.

4 2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between pin 13 —
of the l/P Cluster connector and ground.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Locate and repair the short to ground in GKT 35 (DK GRN)
between the Engine Coolant Temperature Sender and the Go to Instrument
5 l/P Cluster. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement. Go to Instrument
6 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Inaccurate or Inoperative

Step Action Vaiue(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Disconnect the connector at the Engine Coolant

Temperature Sender.
2. Connect one red lead of the J 33431-B to connector 13050 Cold,
cavity A of the Engine Coolant Temperature Sender approx. 100°F
connector. (Gas)/160°F
2 3. Connect the other lead of the J 33431-B to ground. (Diesel). 49.50
4. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. Hot, approx.
260° F.
5. Adjust the resistance dial to 1305 ohms and
then to 49.5 ohms.
Does the temperature gauge match the values given? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor. Refer to
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement in Go to Instrument
3 Engine Cooling. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Remove the l/P Cluster.

2. Connect a B+, 10 amp fused jumper wire to cavity 22
of the l/P Cluster assembly. 13050 Cold,
approx. 100°F
3. Connect one red lead of the J 33431-B to cavity 13 of (Gas)/160°F
4 the l/P Cluster assembly. (Diesel). 49.50
4. Connect the other lead of the J 33431-B to ground. Hot, approx.
5. Adjust the resistance dial to 1305 ohms and 260°F.
then to 49.5 ohms.
Does the temperature gauge match the values given? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Inaccurate or Ino perative (confd)
Step ctlon Value(s) Yes Mo
Locate and repair the cause of resistance in
CKT 35 (DK GRN) between the l/P Cluster and the Engine
5 Coolant Temperature Sender. Refer to Wiring Repairs in — Go to Instrument —
Wiring Systems. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
6 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Always High (Diesel)

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 —■ Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. With the engine in operation, measure the actual

engine oil pressure.
2. Compare the actual engine oil pressure with the
2 specified value. — Go to Oil
Is the difference between the actual engine oil Pressure
pressure and the specified engine oil pressure less Diagnosis and
than 68.95 kPa (10 psi)? Go to Step 3 Testing

1. Disconnect the Oil Pressure Sender.

3 2. Connect a fused jumper wire between the Oil —
Pressure Sender connector, cavity A and ground.
Does the oil pressure gauge indicate any pressure? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Replace the Oil Pressure Sender. Refer to Engine Oil
Pressure Sensor/Switch Replacement in Engine Go to Instrument
4 Mechanical. — — '
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Remove the l/P Cluster.

2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between the
5 cavity 15 of the l/P Cluster connector, cavity A of the —
Oil Pressure Sender connector.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
6 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 31 (TAN) between the l/P Cluster
and the Oil Pressure Sender. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Go to Instrument
7 Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Always High (Gas)

Step Action Vaiue(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Disconnect connector at the Oil Pressure Sender.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
2 3. Connect a fused jumper wire from the Oil Pressure —
Sender connector cavity A to ground.
Does the oil gauge indicate low pressure? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Always High (Gas (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Replace the Oil Pressure Sender. Refer to Engine Oil
Pressure Sensor/Switch Replacement (5.0L/5.7L);
3 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch Replacement (7.4L) in — Go to Instrument —
Engine Controls. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Remove the l/P Cluster.

2. Connect a J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM (continuity) between pin 15
4 of the l/P Cluster connector and cavity A of the Oil
Pressure Sender.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Locate and repair the open in CKT 31 (TAN) between the
Oil Pressure Sender and the l/P Cluster. Refer to Wiring Go to Instrument
5 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement. Go to Instrument
6 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Always Low (Diesel)

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. With the engine in operation, measure the actual

engine oil pressure.
2. Compare the actual engine oil pressure with the 68.95 kPa
2 specified value. Go to Oil
(10 psi)
Is the difference between the actual engine oil Pressure
pressure and the specified engine oil pressure less Diagnosis and
than 68.95 kPa (10 psi)? Go to Step 3 Testing

1. Disconnect the Oil Pressure Sender.

2. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
3. Connect one red lead of a J 33431-B at the Oil
Pressure Sender connector, cavity A. 211.60 kPa
3
4. Connect the other lead to ground. (80 psi)
5. Adjust the tester to 88 ohms.
Does the oil pressure gauge indicate pressure less than
the specified value? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4
Replace the Oil Pressure Sender. Refer to Engine Oil
Pressure Sensor/Switch Replacement in Engine Go to Instrument
4 Mechanical. — ~
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Remove the l/P Cluster.

5 2. Connect a J 3 9 2 0 0 DMM (continuity) between —
cavity 15 of the l/P Cluster and ground.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6
Locate repair the short to ground in CKT 31 (TAN)
between the l/P Cluster and the Oil Pressure Sender. Go to Instrument
6 Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement. Go to Instrument
7 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Always Low (Gas)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Disconnect connect at the Oil Pressure Sender.

2 2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
Does the oil gauge indicate high pressure
(approx. 80 psi or higher)? Go to Step 3 iio to Siep A
Replace the Oil Pressure Sender. Refer to Engine Oil
Pressure Sensor/Switch Replacement (5.0U5.7L);Engine
3 Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch Replacement {7AL) in Engine — Go to Instrument
Mechanical. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1, Remove the l/P Cluster.

4 2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between pin 15 —
of the l/P Cluster connector and ground.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Locate and repair the short to ground in CKT 31 (TAN)
between the Oil Pressure Sender and the l/P Cluster. Go to Instrument
5 Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Is the repair Cluster
—
complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
6 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Inaccurate or Inoperative (Diesel)

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. With the engine in operation, measure the actual

engine oil pressure.
2. Compare the actual engine oil pressure with the 68.95 kPa
2 specified value. Go to Oil
(10 psi)
Is the difference between the actual engine oil pressure Pressure
and the specified engine oil pressure less than the Diagnosis and
specified value? Go to Step 3 Testing

1. Disconnect the connector at the Oil Pressure Sender.

2. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
3. Connect one red lead of a J 33431-B at the Oil
Pressure Sender, cavity A. 0 kPa (0 psi)
3 4. Connect the other lead to ground. 551.6 kPa
5. Adjust the tester to 0 ohms. (80 psi)
6. Adjust the tester to 88 ohms.
Does the oil pressure gauge indicate the specified values
after each adjustment of the tester? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Replace the Oil Pressure Sender. Refer to Engine Oil
Pressure Sensor/Switch Replacement in Engine Go to Instrument
4 Mechanical. —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Inaccurate or Inoperative (Diesel) (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
1. Remove the l/P Cluster.
2. Connect a fused jumper wire between B+, 10 amp
fused jumper wire to cavity 22 of the l/P Cluster
assembly.
3. Connect one red lead of a J 3 3 4 3 1 - B to cavity 15 of 0 kPa (0 psi)
5 the l/P Cluster assembly. 551.6 kPa
4. Connect the other lead to ground. (80 psi)
5. Adjust the tester to 0 ohms.
6. Adjust the tester to 88 ohms.
Does the oil pressure gauge indicate the specified values
after each adjustment of the tester? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
Repair the open in CKT 31 (TAN) between the l/P Cluster
and the Oil Pressure Sender. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Go to Instrument
6 Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
7 Is the repair complete? — Cluster
System Check

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Inaccurate or Inoperative (Gas)

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 ' — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Disconnect connector at the Oil Pressure Sender.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
3. Connect one red lead of the J 33431-B to Oil
Pressure Sender connector cavity A. Low approx.
2 00/ High
4. Connect the other lead of the J 33431-B to ground. approx. 80.
5. Adjust the resistance dial to 0 ohms and then
to 90 ohms.
Does the oil gauge match the values given? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the Oil Pressure Sender. Refer to Engine Oil
Pressure Sensor/Switch Replacement (5.0L/5.7L); Engine
3 Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch Replacement (7.4L) in Engine — Go to Instrument —
Mechanical. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Remove the l/P Cluster.

2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between pin 15
4 of the l/P Cluster connector and cavity A of the Oil —
Pressure Sender connector.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Locate and repair the open in CKT 31 (TAN) between the
Oil Pressure Sender and the l/P Cluster. Refer to Wiring Go to Instrument
5 Repairs in Wiring Systems. --
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
6 Is the repair complete? Cluster —
System Check
 Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Empty (Dual Tank, Diesel)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Balance Module

connector.
2 —
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
Does the Fuel Gauge read Full? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 3
1. Remove the l/P Cluster.
2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between
3 cavity 16 of the l/P Cluster connector and cavity F of —
the Fuel Pump Balance Module connector.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement. Go to Instrument
4 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check .
Locate and repair the open in CKT 30 (PPL) between the
l/P Cluster and the Fuel Pump Balance Module. Refer to Go to Instrument
5 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (ohms) between
cavities E and B, and cavities E and C of the 00 Empty/
6 Fuel Pump Balance Module connector. 900 Full
Does the resistance equal the value given? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 7
1. Disconnect the Fuel Pump and Sender(s) that has
the faulty circuit(s).
00 Empty/
7 2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (ohms) between the pins of 900 Full
the, presumed faulty, Fuel Pump and Sender(s).
Does the resistance equal the value given? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
Locate and repair the open circuit(s) between the Fuel
Pump Balance Module and the Fuel Sender(s). Refer to Go to Instrument
8 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the Fuel Pump and Sender(s). Refer to Fuel Go to Instrument
9 Sender Assembly Replacement in Engine Controls. — Cluster —
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between cavity A of
10 the two Fuel Gauge Sender connectors and ground. —
Is continuity present in both circuits to ground? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 12
Replace the Fuel Pump Balance Module. Go to Instrument
11 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
Locate and repair the open in CKT 451 (BLK/WHT)
between the Fuel Sender and G104. Refer to Wiring Go to Instrument
12 Repairs in Wiring Systems. ■ — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
 Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Empty (Gas)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Important: Before performing the diagnostics below, perform a diagnostic circuit check and repair DTC’s P0461, P0462, or
P0463 pertaining to the fuel tank senders.
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Remove the IP Cluster.

2. Disconnect Vehicle Control Module (VCM)
connector C1.
2 —
3. Connect a DMM (continuity) between cavity 9 of VCM
connector C1 and ground.
Is contintuity present? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Locate and repair the short to ground in CKT 30 (PPL)
between VCM connector C1 and the IP Cluster. Refer to Go to Instrument
3 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the I/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
4 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check

Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Empty (Single Tank, Diesel)

Step Action Value(s) Yes No ;
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Disconnect the Fuel Tank Sender connector at the

left side frame rail.
2 —
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
Does the fuel gauge read Full or higher? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 3
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between
cavities A & B of the fuel pump and sender connector. 0 O Empty/
3 9 0 0 Full
Does the resistance read according to fuel level? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6
1. Connect the Fuel Tank Sender and Pump connector.
2. Remove the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster
Replacement 0 O Empty/
4
3. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between pin 16 90 O Full
of the l/P Cluster connector and ground.
Does the resistance read according to fuel level? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
5 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
Replace the Fuel Pump and Sender. Refer to Fuel Sender Go to Instrument
6 Assembly Replacement in Engine Controls. — ■ Cluster . .. .

Is the repair complete? System Check

Locate and repair the open in CKT 30 (PPL) between the
l/P Cluster and Fuel Pump and Sender. Refer to Wiring Go to Instrument
7 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
 Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Full (Gas)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Important: Before performing the diagnostics below, perform a diagnostic circuit check and repair DTC’s P0461, P0462, or
P0463 pertaining to the fuel tank senders.
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Remove the IP Cluster.

2. Disconnect the Vehicle Control Module (VCM)
connector C1.
2 0.50
3. Connect a DMM (ohms) between cavity 9 of VCM
connector C1 and cavity 16 of the IP Cluster.
Is the resistance greater than the value given? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Locate and repair the open or cause of resistance in
CKT 30 (PPL) between VCM connector C1 and the IP Go to Instrument
3 Cluster. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
4 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check

Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Full (Dual Tank Diesel)

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Disconnect the Fuel Pump and Balance Module

connector.
2. Connect a jumper wire between cavity F of the Fuel
2 Pump and Balance Module connector and ground. —
3. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
Does the fuel gauge go to Empty? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 3
1. Disconnect the l/P Cluster.
2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between
3 cavity F of the Fuel Pump and Balance Module —
connector and pin 16 of the I/P Cluster.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
4 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
Locate and repair the open in CKT 30 (PPL) between the
Fuel Pump Balance Module and the l/P Cluster. Refer to Go to Instrument
5 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between cavity E of
the Fuel Pump and Balance Module connector and
6 ground. —
Is continuity present? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 13
Connect a J 39200 DMM (ohms) between cavities B and E
7 of the Fuel Pump and Balance Module connector. 00 Empty/
900 Full
Does the reading indicate the value given? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 8
 Fuel Gauge Always Indicates Full (Dual Tank Diesel) (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
1. Disconnect the Secondary Fuel Gauge Sender.
2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (ohms) between the OO Empty/
8
senders two pins. 900 Full
Does the reading indicate the value given? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9
Replace the Secondary Fuel Gauge Sender. Go to Instrument
9 Is the repair complete? —■ Cluster —
System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between cavity E of
the Fuel Pump and Balance Module connector and
10 cavity A of the Secondary Fuel Gauge Sender. —
Is continuity present? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 12
Locate and repair the open in CKT 975 (LT BLU) between
the Fuel Pump and Balance Module and the Secondary
11 Fuel Gauge Sender. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring — Go to Instrument
Systems. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Locate and repair the open in CKT 451 (BLK/WHT)
between the Secondary Fuel Gauge Sender and G104. Go to Instrument
12 Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —'
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Locate and repair the open in CKT 451 (BLK/WHT)
between the Fuel Pump and Balance Module and G104. Go to Instrument
13 Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (ohms) between cavities C and E
14 of the Fuel Pump and Balance Module connector. OO Empty/
900 Full
Does the reading indicate the value given? Go to Step 20 Go to Step 15
1. Disconnect the Primary Fuel Gauge Sender.
2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (ohms) between the OO Empty/
15
senders two pins. 900 "Full"
Does the reading indicate the value given? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 19
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between cavity E of
the Fuel Pump and Balance Module connector and
16 cavity A of the Primary Fuel Gauge Sender. ■— ■
Is continuity present? Go to Step 17 Go to Step 18
Locate and repair the open in CKT 970 (DK BLU/WHT)
between the Fuel Pump and Balance Module and the
17 Primary Fuel Gauge Sender. Refer to Wiring Repairs in — Go to Instrument —
Wiring Systems. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Locate and repair the open in CKT 451 (BLK/WHT)
between the Primary Fuel Gauge Sender and G104. Go to Instrument
18 Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the Primary Fuel Gauge Sender. Refer to Fuel Go to Instrument
19 Sender Assembly Replacement in Engine Controls. — Cluster —
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the Fuel Pump and Balance Module. Go to Instrument
20 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
 Fuel Gauge Always indicates Full (Single Tank, Diesel)
’ Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the Fuel Pump and Sender connect at the
left side frame rail.
2. Connect a jumper wire on CKT 30 (PPL) between
2 pin B of the Fuel Pump and Sender connector and —
ground.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
Does the fuel gauge read empty? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 3
Connect a J 39200 DMM (ohms) between cavities A & B
of the Fuel Pump and Sender. 0 Q Empty/
3
90 Q Full
Does the resistance read according to the fuel level? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6
1. Connect the Fuel Pump and Sender connector.
2. Remove the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster
4 Replacement 0 Q Empty/
3. Connect a J 39200 DMM between pin 16 of the l/P 90 Q Full
Cluster connector and ground.
Does the resistance read according to fuel level? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
5 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
Replace the Fuel Pump and Sender. Refer to Fuel Sender Go to Instrument
6 Assembly Replacement in Engine Controls. — Cluster . . __
Is the repair complete? System Check
Locate and repair the open in CKT 30 (PPL) between the
l/P Cluster and Fuel Pump and Sender. Refer to Wiring Go to Instrument
7 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

Volt Gauge Inaccurate or Inoperative

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Start the engine.

2. Connect a voltmeter between the positive and the
2 negative battery terminals. — Go to Instrument
Is the measured voltage the same as the vehicle voltage Cluster
indication? System Check Go to Step 3
Replace the I/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
3 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
 Fasten Safety Belt Indicator Always On
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Remove the audio alarm module from the

convenience center.
2 —
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
Does the fasten safety belt indicator lamp go out? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the audio alarm module. Go to Instrument
3 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check

1. Inspect for a short to voltage in CKT 234 (YEL)

between the instrument cluster and the convenience
center. Refer to Wiring Repairs in wiring.
4 — —
2. If there is no short to voltage, replace the instrument Go to Instrument
cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

Fasten Safety Belt Indicator Inoperative

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Remove the audio alarm module from the

convenience center.
2 2. Connect a fused jumper from terminal K3 of the audio —
alarm module to B+.
Did the fasten safety belt indicator lamp light? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the audio alarm module. Go to Instrument
3 Is the repair complete? — Cluster ... —
System Check

1. Remove the instrument cluster.

2. Connect a fused jumper from cavity K3 of the
4 convenience center to ground.
—
3. Connect a test lamp from cavity 30 of the instrument
cluster connector to ground.
Did the test lamp light? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Locate and repair the open in CKT 234 (YEL) between the
convenience center and the instrument cluster. Refer to Go to Instrument
5 Wiring Repairs in wiring. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a test lamp from the instrument cluster
6 connector to B+. —
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7
Locate and repair open in CKT 451 (BLK/WHT) between
the instrument cluster connector and G103 or G104. Refer Go to Instrument
7 to Wiring Repairs in wiring. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Inspect instrument cluster printed circuity board for

damage.
8 2. Repair or replace the instrument cluster. Refer to IP — Go to Instrument —
Cluster Replacement Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
 Low Engine Coolant Indicator Always On (Diesel Only)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Ensure the coolant level is filled above the sensor.
2. Disconnect the connector at the Low Coolant Level
Sensor.
2 —
3. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between
pins A and B.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Replace the Low Coolant Level Sensor. Refer to Surge Go to Instrument
3 Tank (Diesel) Replacement in Engine Cooling. — Cluster —
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between the Low
4 Coolant Level Sensor connector cavity B and ground.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the
Low Coolant Level Sensor and G105. Refer to Wiring Go to Instrument
5 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
1. Disconnect the connector at the Low Coolant Level
Indicator Module.
2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between
6 cavity F of the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module —
and cavity A of the Low Coolant Level Sensor
connector.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7
Locate and repair the open in CKT 1478 (LT GRN)
between the Low Coolant Level Indicator and the Low
7 Coolant Level Sensor. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring — Go to Instrument —
Systems. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (volts) between cavity A of the
8 Low Coolant Level Indicator Module and ground. —
Is battery voltage present? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9
Locate and repair the open in CKT 39 (PNK) between the
IP fuse Block and the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module. Go to Instrument
9 Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between cavity C of
10 the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module and ground. —
Is continuity present? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 11
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the
Low Coolant Level Indicator Module and G200. Refer to Go to Instrument
11 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Remove the l/P Cluster.

2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between the
12 cavity E of the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module —
and pin 25 of the l/P Cluster.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 13
 Low Engine Coolant Indicator Always On (Diesel Only) (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Locate and repair the open in CKT 68 (YEL/BLK) between
the l/P Cluster and the Low Coolant Level Indicator Go to Instrument
13 Module. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between cavities 22
14 and 25 of the l/P Cluster. —
Is continuity present? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 15
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
15 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
Replace the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module. Refer to Go to Instrument
16 Coolant Level Module Replacement in Engine Cooling. — Cluster —
Is the repair complete? System Check

Low Engine Coolant Indicator Inoperative (Diesel Only)

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Ensure that the coolant level is below the coolant

sensor.
2. Disconnect the connector at the Low Coolant Level
2 Sensor.
3. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) at the Low
Coolant Level Sensor pins A and B.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Replace the Low Coolant Level Sensor. Refer to Surge Go to Instrument
3 Tank (Diesel) Replacement in Engine Cooling. — Cluster —
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Disconnect the connector at the Low Coolant Level

Indicator Module.
2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between
4 cavity F of the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module — '
connector and cavity A of the Low Coolant Level
Sensor.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Locate and repair the short to ground in the CKT 1478
(LT GRN) wire between the Low Coolant Level Indicator
5 Module and the Low Coolant Level Sensor. Refer to — Go to Instrument —
Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Disconnect the connector at the l/P Cluster.

2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between the l/P
6 Cluster connector cavity 25 and the Low Coolant —
Level Indicator Module connector cavity E.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7
Locate and repair the open in the CKT 68 (YEL/BLK) wire
between the l/P Custer and the Low Coolant Level
7 Indicator Module. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring — Go to Instrument —
Systems. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
 Low Engine Coolant Indicator Inoperative (Diesel Only) (cont’d)
. Step Action Value(s) Yes No
1. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between
cavity C of the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module
connector and ground.
8 2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between —
cavity B of the Low Coolant Level Sensor connector
and ground.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between
either the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module and ground
9 or the Low Coolant Level Sensor and ground, which ever — Go to Instrument —
applies. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Connect a J 39200 DMM (volts) between cavity A of

the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module connector
10 and ground. —
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
Is battery voltage present? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 11
Locate and repair the open in CKT 39 (PNK) between the
IP Fuse Block and the Low Coolant Level Indicator Go to Instrument
11. : Module. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Re-install the l/P Cluster.

2. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
12 3. Connect a fused jumper wire between the Low — .
Coolant Level Indicator Module connector cavity E
and ground.
Does the low coolant indicator light? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14
Replace the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module. Refer to Go to Instrument
13 Coolant Level Module Replacement in Engine Cooling. — Cluster —
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
14 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check

PRNDL Display Inaccurate or Inoperative (PRNDL Inoperative)

■ Step/. Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 ■ — ' Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Disconnect the TR Switch connector C1.

" 2 '' 2, Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between —
cavity D of the TR Switch connector C1 and ground.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the
TR Switch and G105. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Go to Instrument
3. Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Remove the l/P Cluster.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
4 3. Connect a J 39200 DMM (volts) between pin 7 of the —
l/P Cluster connector to ground.
Is battery voltage present? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
 PRNDL Display Inaccurate or Inoperative (PRNDL Ino perative) (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Locate and repair the open in CKT 1020 (PNK) between
the IP Fuse Block and the l/P Cluster. Refer to Wiring Go to Instrument
5 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between pin 4 of the
6 I/P Cluster connector to ground. —
Is continuity present? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7
Locate and repair the open in CKT 451 (BLK/WHT)
between the l/P Cluster and ground. Refer to Wiring Go to Instrument
7 Repairs in Wiring Systems. ' ; — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
8 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check

PRNDL Display Inaccurate or Inoperative (PRNDL Inaccurate)

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check

1. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) Switch

connector C2.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
3. Conduct the PRNDL Logic Input Test by connecting
2 fused jumper wires between ground and the —
appointed cavities of the TR Switch connector. Refer
to PRNDL Logic Input Test PRNDL Logic Input Test.
4. Repeat for each transmission range.
Do all ranges illuminate? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Adjust the transmission range switch. Refer to
Park/Neutral Back Up Switch Adjustment in
Transmission/Transaxle.
3 —
Replace the PNP Switch. Refer to Park/Neutral Back Up Go to Instrument
Switch Replacement \n Transmission/Transaxle. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check

1. Remove the l/P Cluster.

2. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between the l/P
4 Cluster connector and connector C2 of the TR Switch —
to those circuit(s) that connected to the faulty PRNDL
indicators.
Is continuity present in the circuit(s) tested? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Locate and repair the open in the circuit(s) that are faulty
between the TR Switch and the l/P Cluster. Refer to Go to Instrument
5 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between the l/P
Cluster connector and ground to those circuit(s) that
6 connected to the faulty PRNDL indicators. —
Is continuity present in the circuit(s) tested? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
Locate and repair the short to ground in the circuit(s) that
are faulty between the TR Switch and the I/P Cluster. Go to Instrument
7 Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
8 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check
 PRNDL Logic Input Test
Trans Range Select
Cavity and
Wire/Input p R N D 3 2 1
C WHT (776)/
X — X — X — X
PARITY
B GRY (773)/C — — — X X X X
D YEL (772)/B — X X X X — —

A BLK/WHT (771 )/A X X — — X X —

Speedometer Inaccurate (J 38522 Unavailable)

Step Action Value(s) | Yes No
important: Perform a diagnostic system check and repair DTC(s) P0500, and P0501 before performing the following
diagnstic.
Did you perform the OBD II System Check? Go to A
Powertrain On
Board Diagnostic
(OBD) System
Check (5.0L/5.7L);
A Powertrain On
1 — Board Diagnostic
(OBD) System
Check (6.5L);
A Powertrain On
Board Diagnostic
(OBD) System
Go to Step 2 Check (7.4L)
1. Remove the IP Cluster.
• (Gas) Disconnect the Vehicle Control
Module (VCM) connector C4.
• (Diesel) Disconnect the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) connector C2 and Vehicle Speed
2 Signal Buffer. 0.50
2. Disconnect the Overspeed Alarm on Export vehicles.
3. Connect a DMM (ohms) between pin 14 of the IP
Cluster connector and cavity 4 of VCM C4 (Gas) or
cavity 15 of the Vehicle Speed Signal Buffer (Diesel).
Does the resistance equal the value given? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
3 Is the repair complete? — Cluster .—
System Check
Locate and repair the cause of resistance in
CKT 389 (DK GRN) between the IP Cluster and the
4 VCM (Gas) or the Vehicle Speed Signal Buffer (Diesel). .— Go to Instrument —
Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
 Speedometer and/or Odometer Inoperative
Step Action Value(s) Yes ■

Important: Perform a diagnostic system check and repair DTG(s) P0500 or P0501 before performing the following
diagnostic.
Did you perform the OBD II System Check? Goto/, i
Powertrain On
Board Diagnostic
(OBD) System
Check (5.0L/5.7L);
A Powertrain On
1 — Board Diagnostic
(OBD) System
Check (6.5L);
A Powertrain On
Board Diagnostic
(OBD) System
Go to Step 2 Check (7.4L)
1. Remove the l/P Cluster.
• (Gas) Disconnect Vehicle Control Module (VCM)
connector C4.
* (Diesel) Disconnect Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) connector C2 and the Vehicle
2 —
Speed Signal Buffer (VSSB).
2. Disconnect the Overspeed Alarm on Export vehicles.
3. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between
cavity 14 of the l/P Cluster and ground.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Locate and repair the short to ground in
CKT 389 (DK GRN) between the VCM (Gas) or the Vehicle
Speed Signal Buffer and PCM (Diesel). If an Export
3 Module, be sure to check between C223, at the ---- —
Convenience Center and the Audio Alarm Module. Refer
to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems.
Is the repair complete? System OK
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between cavity 14 of
the l/P Cluster and VCM connector C4, cavity 4 (Gas), or
4 PCM connector C2, cavity A6 and VSSB cavity 15. —
Is continuity present? Go to Step 6 I Go to Step 5
Locate and repair the open in CKT 389 (DK GRN) between
the l/P Cluster and the VCM (Gas), or PCM and Go to Instrument
5 VSSB (Diesel). Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the instrument cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Go to Instrument
6 Replacement — Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
 Tachometer Inaccurate
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 — Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Connect a scan tool to the Data link
Connector (DLC).
2. Start the engine.
2 3. Read the engine RPM display and compare the —
display to the vehicle tachometer reading on the l/P
Cluster. Go to Instrument
Is the scan tool reading within 250 RPMs of the vehicle Cluster
tachometer? System Check Go to Step 3
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Go to Instrument
3 Is the repair complete? — Cluster —
System Check

Tachometer Inoperative (Gas)

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the OBD II System Check been Go to A
performed? Powertrain On
Board Diagnostic
(OBD) System
1 Check
, —
(5.0L/5.7L); 4
Powertrain On
Board Diagnostic
(OBD) System
Go to Step 2 Check (7.4L)
1. Remove the l/P Cluster.
2. Disconnect the Ignition Coil connector.
2 3. Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) between l/P —
Cluster connector cavity 6 and ground.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 3 Goto Step 4
Locate and repair the short to ground in CKT 121 (WHT) Refer to
between the Ignition Coil and the l/P cluster. Refer to Instrument
3 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Connect a J 39200 DMM (continuity) from l/P Cluster
4 cavity 6 to ignition coil connector cavity B. —■
Is continuity present? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Replace the l/P Cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement Refer to
5 Is the repair complete? — Instrument
Cluster —
System Check
Locate and repair the open in CKT 121 (WHT) between Refer to
the Ignition Coil and the l/P Cluster. Refer to Wiring Instrument
6 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
 Tachometer Inoperative (Diesel)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Did you perform the Instrument Cluster System Check? Go to Instrument
1 '— ' Cluster
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the connector at the instrument cluster.
2. Disconnect the connector at the generator.
2 3. Connect a test lamp between generator connector ■—
cavity A and ground.
Did the test lamp light? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Locate and repair the short to ground in CKT 121 (WHT)
between the generator and the instrument cluster. Refer to Go to Instrument
3 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check Go to Step 4
Connect a test lamp between instrument cluster connector
4 cavity 6 and generator connector cavity A. —
Did the test lamp light? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
1. Connect the connector at the generator.
2. Start the engine.
3. Connect a voltmeter or oscilloscope between
5 instrument cluster connector cavity 6 and ground. 14 V
4. Look for potentially pulsating voltage at or
below 14 volts.
Is there voltage present? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
Locate and repair the open in CKT 121 (WHT) between
the generator and the instrument cluster. Refer to Wiring Go to Instrument
6 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the instrument cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Go to Instrument
7 Replacement — Cluster —
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the generator. Refer to Generator Replacement
(Diesel Engines), Generator Replacement (CS 130D), or Go to Instrument
8 Generator Replacement - Auxiliary in Engine Electrical. — —
Cluster
Is the repair complete? System Check
Schematic and Routing Diagrams
Audible Warnings Schematic References
Reference on Schematic Section Number - Subsection Name
Exterior Lighting - Cell 47 8 - Wiring Systems
Ground Distribution - Cell 14 8 - Wiring Systems
Headlamps - Cell 101 8 - Wiring Systems
Power Distribution - Cell 10 8 - Wiring Systems
SIR Schematics - Cell 47 9 - Restraints
Theft Deterrent - Cell 133 8 - Theft Deterrent

Audible Warnings Schematic Icons

Icon Icon Definition
Refer to ESD Notice in Cautions and Notices.

19384
 Body and Accesso ries__________________________________________________________________
Hot With HEADLAMP
|Hot In RUN, BULB TEST And START| SWITCH In PARK Or HEAD

Power Power —< Power

Distribution Distribution ILLUM Distribution \ q I Fuse
STOP/HA2 1 Ft
Cell 10 Cell 10 E3 * Fuse 14 Cell 10 J Fuse 1 1B i<
Block
D4( 10 A C 7> 20 A |

10RN 140
0.8 PNK 39
Power Power
0.35 GRY 8
$299
Power
Distribution 0
Cell 10
S213 < Distribution Distribution 1S217
Cell 10 Cell 10
0.5 DK GRN 389
0.35 PNK 39
0.35 GRY 8 0.8 ORN 140 A C233
K4 jT J2 “* Convenience
Audio Alarm Center
Ignition On Lamps On Power Ves
Input Input Module
Input Input

Fasten Belts Safety Belt Key-In

Output Input Ground Warning

K3 K1 K2 J3

0.8 BLK 150 0.5 DRKGRN 389

0.8 YEL 234 0.8 BLK/WHT 238
0.8 BLK/WHT 238 D C298 0.8 LT GRN 80 0.5 DK GRN 389 14
30
B3. C266 ■ B5, C100 r ^ Instrument
^Safety l ] Instrument
in s tr i 0.8 BLK/WHT' 238 I Speed i d u s te r
Cluster
Belt ( f ) ClUS SIR | Input |
B C211 0.35 LTGRN 80 0.5 DK GRN 389
Controls
Ground 4V Key-In Warning i- — j
31 inA Cell 47
Distribution
0.5 BLK/WHT 451 Ground
0.8 BLK/WHT 238
B
Cell 14 )
Buzzer Switch
(Closed With Key
S2151, —---- « Distribution T In Ignition Switch)
Cell 14
Seat Belt
1 BLK/WHT 451 Switch, LF S298
j: C200 / (Opens With 0.35 TAN 159 4XG4
LF Safety B4< C266 r ~ -1Vehicle
Belt Buckled) 1 1Control
A
1 BLK/WHT 451 1 BLK 150 0.5 TAN 159 1 1Module
0.8 BLK 150 L, — J
£ P101 A_ C211 C
0.8 BLK 150 LF Door
SI 03 Jamb Switch
A Ground
Ground
Distribution
/
-L I
(Closed With
Door Open)
S259' Distribution Cell 14
Cell 14 V B
0.5 BLK 150
1 BLK/WHT 451 3 BLK 150 ► S204
1 BLK/WHT 451
3 BLK 150
6103 . G104 1^6200
MG202
Diagnostic Information and Procedures
A Diagnostic System Check - Audible Warnings
Step Action Normal Result(s) Abnormal Result(s)*
1. Place key in the ignition. Key in ignition audible chime • Key-in-lgnition Chime Inoperative
1 will sound.
2. Open the left front door. • Key-in-lgn Chime On with LF
Door Closed
1. Place headlamps in PARK Lights on audible chime will sound. Lights On Chime Inoperative
2 or HEAD.
2. Remove key from the ignition.
1. Place ignition in the RUN Safety belt audible chime will sound * Fasten Safety Belt Chime
position. for 8 seconds. Always On
3
2. Unbuckle left front safety belt. • Fasten Safety Belt Chime
3. Close left front door. Inoperative
* Refer to the appropriate symptom diagnostic table for the applicable abnormal result.

Fasten Safety Belt Chime Always On

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Tools Required
• J 39200 DMM
• J 34142-B Test Light
Was the Audible Warnings Diagnostic System Check Go to A
performed? Diagnostic
1 — System Check -
Audible
Go to Step 2 Warnings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position. Go to A
Diagnostic
2 2. Fasten the left front seat belt. — System Check -
Is the fasten safety belts warning alarm present? Audible
Go to Step 3 Warnings
Disconnect the left front seat belt connector C211.
3 —
Is the fasten safety belts warning alarm present? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
1. Locate and repair the short to ground in CKT 238
(BLK/WHT) between the convenience center and the
4 seat belt switch. Refer to Wiring Repairs in wiring. Go to A
Diagnostic —
2. If the wire is good, replace the audio alarm module. System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
Replace the LF seat. Refer to
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front
(Regular Cab With Bucket Seat)
® Seat Belt Replacement - Front
(Regular Cab With Bench Seat)
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front
(Suburban And Crew Cab)
5 • Seat Belt Replacement - Front (Utility Model) ; — —■
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front
(Extended Cab with Bucket Seat)
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front
(Extended Cab with Bench Seat)
Go to A
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front Diagnostic
(Extended Cab with 3rd Door) in restraints. System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
 Fasten Safety Belt Chime Inoperative
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Tools Required
• J 39200 DMM
• J 34142-B Test Light
Was the Audible Warnings Diagnostic System Check Go to A
performed? Diagnostic
1 — System Check -
Audible
Go to Step 2 Warnings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
2. Remove the audio alarm module.
2 3. Connect a test lamp from cavity K4 of the —
convenience center to ground.
Did the test lamp light? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
1. Unfasten the left front seat belt.
3 2. Connect a test lamp from cavity K1 of the - — .
convenience center to B+.
Did the test lamp light? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Locate and repair the open in CKT 39 (PNK) between the Go to A
convenience center and the IP fuse block. Refer to Wiring Diagnostic
4 Repairs in wiring. — —
System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
Replace the audio alarm module. Go to A
5 Is the repair complete? Diagnostic
— System Check - .—
Audible Warnings
1. Disconnect connector C211 of the seat belt switch.
6 2. Connect a test lamp between cavity A of the seat belt —
switch connector C211 and B+.
Did the test lamp light? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
1. Connect a jumper wire between cavity A and cavity B
of seat belt switch connector C211, harness side.
7 2. Connect a test lamp between cavity K1 of the audio —'"
alarm module cavity to B+.
Did the test lamp light? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the Go to A
seat belt switch connector and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagnostic
8 Repairs in wiring. — —
System Check-
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
 Fasten Safety Belt Chime Inoperative (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Replace the left front seat belt switch. Refer to
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front
(Regular Cab With Bucket Seat)
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front
(Regular Cab With Bench Seat)
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front
(Suburban And Crew Cab)
9 • Seat Belt Replacement - Front (Utility Model) — —
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front
(Extended Cab with Bucket Seat)
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front
(Extended Cab with Bench Seat)
Go to A
• Seat Belt Replacement - Front Diagnostic
(Extended Cab with 3rd Door) in Restraints. System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
Locate and repair the open in CKT 238 (BLK/WHT) Go to A
between the seat belt switch and the audio alarm module. Diagnostic
10 Refer to Wiring Repairs in wiring. — —
System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings

Key-in-lgnition Chime Inoperative

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Was the Audible Warnings Diagnostic System Check Go to A
performed? Diagnostic
1 — System Check -
Audible
Go to Step 2 Warnings
1. Remove the audio alarm module from the
convenience center.
2. Disconnect steering column harness connector C266.
2 3. Using a J 39200 DMM, test for continuity between —
cavity J3 of the convenience center to
connector C266 cavity B3.
Is there continuity? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
1. Place the key in the ignition switch.
3 2. Connect a J 39200 DMM between connector C266 —
cavity B3 and B4.
Is there continuity? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Locate and repair the open in CKT 80 (LT GRN) between Go to A
the convenience center and connector C266. Refer to Diagnostic
4 Wiring Repairs in wiring. — —
System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
1. Disconnect the connector at the left front door jamb
switch.
5 2. Connect a J 39200 DMM between connector C266 —
cavity B4 and the left front door jamb switch
connector cavity C.
Is there continuity? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
Replace the key-in warning buzzer switch. Refer to Ignition
and Key Alarm Sw Assembly - Disassemble - Off Vehicle Go to A
6 (Column Shift) or Ignition and Key Alarm Sw Assembly - — Diagnostic —
Disassemble - Off Vehicle (Floor Shift) in Steering. System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
 ...Key-ln-lgnltion Chime Inoperative (cont’d)
Step Action Vaiue(s) Yes Mo
1. Open the left front door.
7 2. Connect a J 39200 DMM between cavity C and B of — ■"
the left front door jamb switch.
Is there continuity? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
Locate and repair the open in CKT 159 (TAN) between Go to A
connector C266 and the left front door jamb switch. Refer Diagnostic
8 to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. —- —
System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
Connect a J 39200 DMM from the left front door jamb
9 switch connector cavity B and ground G200. —
Is there continuity? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 12
Replace the left front door jamb switch. Refer to Door Go to A
Jamb Switch Replacement (Door) in Doors. Diagnostic
10 System Check - —
Is the repair complete?
Audible Warnings
Replace the audio alarm module. Go to A
Is the repair complete? Diagnostic
11 — System Check- —
Audible Warnings
Locate and repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) between the Go to A
left front door jamb switch and ground G200. Refer to Diagnostic
12 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings

Key-in-lgn Chime On with LF Door Closed

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Was the Audible Warnings Diagnostic System Check Goto A
performed? Diagnostic
1 — System Check -
Audible
Go to Step 2 Warnings
1. Place the Ignition Switch in the OFF or LOCK
position.
2. Remove the key from the Ignition Switch.
3. Close the LF doors
2 4. Remove the Audio Alarm Module from the —
Convenience Center.
5. With a J 39200 test for continuity between
Convenience Center Terminal J3 and ground.
Is there continuity to ground? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 8
1. Disconnect connector C266.
2. Using a J 39200,check for continuity between the
3 IP Harness side of connector C266 cavity B3 and —
ground.
Is there continuity to ground? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Repair short to ground between connector C266 and the Go to A
4 convenience center. Refer to Wiring Repairs in wiring. Diagnostic
— ' System Check - —
Is the repair complete?
Audible Warnings
With connector C266 disconnected, using a J 39200,
check for continuity between IP harness side of
5 connector C266 cavity B4 and ground. —
Is there continuity to ground? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7
 Key-in-lgn Chime On with LF Door Closed (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Disconnect LF Door Jamb Switch and with a J 39200,
check for Short to ground between connector C266
6 cavity B4 and the LF jamb switch cavity C. —-
Is there continuity to ground? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10
Using a J 39200 DMM, inspect for continuity Go to A
between Steering Column side of connector C266 Diagnostic
7 cavity B3 and B4. ■— System Check -
Is continuity present? Audible
Go to Step 11 Warnings
Replace audio alarm module. Go to A
Is the repair complete? Diagnostic
8 — System Check -
Audible Warnings
Repair short to ground in CKT 159 between connector Go to A
C266 cavity B4 and LF Door Jamb Switch Cavity C. Diagnostic
9 Refer to Wiring Repairs in wiring. — —
System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
Replace the LF door jamb switch. Refer to Door Jamb Go to A
Switch Replacement (Door) in Doors. Diagnostic
10 — System Check - —
Is the repair complete?
Audible Warnings
Replace the key-in warning buzzer switch. Refer to Ignition
and Key Alarm Sw Assembly - Disassemble - Off Vehicle Go to A
11 (Column Shift) or Ignition and Key Alarm Sw Assembly - — Diagnostic
Disassemble - Off Vehicle (Floor Shift) in Steering. System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings

Overspeed Chime Inoperative

Step Action Value(s). Yes No
Was the Audible Warnings Diagnostic System Check Go to A
performed? Diagnostic
1 — System Check -
Audible
Go to Step 2 Warnings
1. Remove the audio alarm module from the
convenience center.
2. Disconnect connector C4 at the vehicle control
module (VCM). —
2
3. Connect a J 39200 DMM between cavity C9 of the
convenience center and the vehicle control module
connector C4 cavity 4.
Is there continuity? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the audio alarm module. Go to A
Is the repair complete? — Diagnostic
3 System Check - —
Audible Warnings
Locate and repair the open in CKT 389 (DK GRN) Go to A
between the audio alarm module and the vehicle control Diagnostic
4 module (VCM). Refer to Wiring Repairs in wiring. — —
System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
 Lights On Chime Inoperative
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Was the Audible Warnings Diagnostic System Check Go to A
performed? Diagnostic
1 — System Check -
Audible
Go to Step 2 Warnings
1. Remove the audio alarm module from the
convenience center.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position.
3. Place the headlamps switch in the HEAD or PARK
2 position. .—
4. Adjust the dimmer switch to maximum brightness.
5. Connect a J 39200 from cavity K4 of the convenience
center to ground.
Is battery voltage present? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Connect a J 39200 from cavity J1 of the convenience
3 center to ground. —
Is battery voltage present? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
Locate and repair the open in CKT 39 (PNK) between the Go to A
convenience center and the IP fuse block. Refer to Wiring Diagnostic
4 Repairs in wiring. — —
System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
Replace the audio alarm module. Go to A
5 Is the repair complete? Diagnostic
— System Check - —-
Audible Warnings
1. Locate and repair the short to voltage in CKT 8
(GRY) between the IP fuse block and the
convenience center. Refer to Wiring Repairs in wiring.
6 2. If a short to voltage is not found, refer to Interior — Go to A —
Lights Dimming Schematics in Lighting, in order to Diagnostic
locate the open circuit. System Check -
Is the repair complete? Audible Warnings
 Repair Instructions
Bezel Replacement - IP Cluster
Removal Procedure
Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in
Cautions and Notices.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. For vehicles equipped with tilt wheel, move the
steering column to the lowest position, if the
vehicle is not equipped with a tilt steering column,
you may have to lower the column.
3. Remove the four clips across the top edge, and
the four clips across the bottom edge that retain
the bezel to the IP by gently pulling toward
the inside of the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the
headlamp switch and the accessory switches.

277080

Installation Procedure
1. Connect the electrical connectors for the
headlamp switch and the accessory switches.
2. Press the bezel into the IP making sure that the
clips line up with the holes in the IP.
3. Connect the negative battery cable.

277080
IP Cluster Replacement
Removal Procedure
Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in
Cautions and Notices.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the instrument cluster bezel.
• Four clips across the top edge, and four clips
across the bottom edge, retain the bezel.
• For vehicles equipped with tilt wheel, move the
steering column to the lowest position,
• For vehicles without tilt wheel, you may have
to lower the column.
• Disconnect the electrical connectors from the
headlamp switch and the dimmer control
and accessory switches.

277080

3. Remove the four screws that retain the instrument

cluster.
4. Remove the instrument cluster from the vehicle.
Keep fingers and other foreign objects away from
the flexible circuit connections.

Installation Procedure
1. Press the instrument cluster into the
instrument panel.
2. Install the instrument cluster hold-down screws.
3. Connect the electrical connectors to the headlamp
switch and the dimmer control and accessory
switches.

277081
 4. Install the instrument cluster bezel.
5. Connect the negative battery cable.

277080

Instrument Cluster Lamp Replacement

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the instrument cluster. Refer to IP
Cluster Replacement.
2. Remove the bulb and the base assembly by
turning the bulb one-half turn to the left. Refer
to Bulb Usage in Lighting Systems for correct bulb
specifications.
Installation Procedure
1. Insert the bulbs into the cluster by inserting the
socket and bulb assembly and twisting the
assembly to the right.
2. Install the instrument cluster. Refer to IP Cluster
Replacement.

Ashtray Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2. Remove the ashtray retainer inserts from
underneath the instrument panel.
3. Remove the ashtray from the instrument panel.

277083
Installation Procedure
1. Install the ashtray into the instrument panel.
2. Install the ashtray retainer inserts.
3. Connect the electrical connectors.

Cupholder Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the ashtray. Refer to Ashtray
Replacement.
2. Slide the cupholder out.
3. Remove the knee bolster. Refer to Knee Bolster
Replacement.
4. Remove the cupholder retainer from underneath
the instrument panel by twisting the retainer to
the left.
5. Remove the cupholder.

277085

Installation Procedure
1. Slide the cupholder onto the metal track in the
instrument panel.
2. Install the cupholder retainer from underneath the
instrument panel by twisting the retainer to
the right.
3. Slide the cupholder into the instrument panel.
N o t i c e : Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions
and Notices.
4. Install the two rear screws to the cupholder
Tighten
Tighten the screws to 2 N-m (18 lb in), while
holding the cupholder face plate against
the cluster bezel opening to assure proper
alignment.
5. Install the ashtray. Refer to Ashtray Replacement.
6. Install the knee bolster. Refer to Knee Bolster
Replacement.
277085
12 Volt Power Supply Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the front cover.
2. Remove the power supply (3) from the
instrument panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1).

Installation Procedure
1. Connect the electrical connector (1).
2. Install the power supply (3) into the
instrument panel.
3. Install the front cover.

Accessory Switch Replacement

Removal Procedure
Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in
Cautions and Notices.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the instrument cluster bezel. Refer to IP
Cluster Replacement.
3. Disconnect the electrical connection.
4. Remove the switch from the bezel.

Installation Procedure
1. Install the switch into the bezel.

2. Connect the electrical connection.

3. Install the instrument cluster bezel. Refer to B ezel
R eplacem ent - IP Cluster.
4. Connect the negative battery cable.
 Knee Bolster Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the knee bolster screws.
2. Unsnap the knee bolster.
3. Twist the brake release cable in order to
disengage the knee bolster.
4. Rem ove the lap cooler hose.

Installation Procedure
1. Install the lap cooler hose.
2. Connect the brake release cable.
3. Snap the knee bolster into the instrument panel
assembly.
Notice: Refer to F astener Notice in Cautions and
Notices.
4. Install the knee bolster screws.
Tighten
Tighten the knee bolster screws to 2 N-m (18 lb in).

276465
Compartment Replacement - IP
Removal Procedure
Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in
Cautions and Notices.
1. Remove the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the IP storage compartment check strap.
3. Remove the IP storage compartment door.
4. Remove the IP storage compartment.
Squeeze the compartment in order for the
compartment to release.

277093

Installation Procedure
1. Install the IP storage compartment.
2. Install the IP storage compartment door.
3. Install the IP storage compartment check strap
4. Install the negative battery cable.

277093
 Console Storage Bin Replacement
Removal Procedure
Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in
Cautions and Notices.
1. Remove the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the console trim plate. Refer to Console
R eplacem ent - Front Floor.
3. Remove the console storage bin screws.
4. Remove the console storage bin from the console.

Installation Procedure
1. Install the console storage bin to the console.
Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions
and Notices.
2. Install the console storage bin screws.
Tighten
Tighten the screws to 2 N-m (18 lb in).
3. Install the console trim plate. Refer to Console
R eplacem ent - Front Floor.
4. Install negative battery cable.

318965
Console Replacement - Front Floor
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the front tray (4) from the compartment.
2. Remove the storage bin.
3. Remove the two bolts (2).
4. Remove the storage compartment (1).

Installation Procedure
1. Install the storage compartment (1).
Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and
Notices.
2. Install the two bolts (2).
Tighten
Tighten the storage compartment bolts to
6 N-m (53 lb in).
3. Install the storage bin.
4. Install the front tray (4).

276466
 Cupholder Replacement -
Front Floor Console
Removal Procedure
1. Open the cup holder by pulling down from the
rear of the floor console.

318959

2. Remove the tabs (1) that connect the cupholder

to the floor console by gently prying apart with a
flat bladed tool.
3. Remove the cup holder from the vehicle.

318963

Installation Procedure
1 1. Install the cup holder to the vehicle.
2. Install the cup holder to the floor console by
snapping tabs (1) to console back in place.

318963
3. Close the cup holder by pushing back up into the
rear of the floor console.

Compartment Replacement -
IP Forward Extension
Removal Procedure
1. Roll the instrument panel. Refer to IP Assem bly
Rotating.
2. Remove the four nuts that retain the instrument
panel compartment assembly to the carrier.
3. Remove the instrument panel compartment from
the instrument panel.
4. Remove the distorted clips from the IP.

Installation Procedure
1. Install the instrument panel compartment into the
instrument panel.
N o tice: Refer to Fastener Notice in Cautions and
Notices.
2. Install the four nuts that retain the instrument
panel compartment assembly to the carrier.
Tighten
Tighten the nuts to 10 N-m (89 lb in).
3. Roll the instrument panel back into place and
secure. Refer to IP Assem bly - Rotating.

277089
 IP Assembly - Rotating
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the knee bolster. Refer to K nee Bolster
Replacement,
2. Remove the knee bolster reinforcement.
3. Remove the knee deflector bracket.
4. Remove the tubular tie bar from under the
steering column.
5. Remove the steering column. Refer to Steering
Column R eplacem ent (All C /K Except C 3 5 00 H D )
in Steering.
6. Remove the IP storage compartment door.

7. Remove the 2 bolts from the PSIR bracket.

277090
 8. Remove the left and the right lower instrument
panel pivot bolts.

9. Remove the center support screw.

10. Pivot the instrument panel.
Installation Procedure
1. Pivot the instrument panel forward.
N o t i c e : Refer to F a s t e n e r N o t i c e in Cautions and
Notices.
2. Install the 3 upper IP to dash screws.
Tighten
Tighten the screws to 2 N-m (18 lb in).
3. Install the left and the right lower instrument panel
pivot bolts.
Tighten
Tighten the bolts to 20 N-m (15 lb ft).
4. Install the two PSIR bracket bolts through the IP
storage compartment opening.
Tighten
Tighten the bolts to 20 N-m (15 lb ft).

5. Install the center support screw.

6. Install the steering column. Refer to
S te e r in g C o lu m n R e p la c e m e n t
( A l l C / K E x c e p t C 3 5 0 0 H D ) in Steering.
7. Install the tubular tie bar under steering column.
8. Install the knee deflector bracket.
Tighten
Tighten the knee deflector bracket bolts to
3 N-m (27 lb in).
9. Install the knee bolster reinforcement.
Tighten
Tighten the bolts to 7 N-m (62 lb in).
10. Install the knee bolster. Refer to K n e e B o l s t e r
R e p la c e m e n t.
11. Install the IP storage compartment door.

277093

IP Carrier Replacement
Removal Procedure
Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in
Cautions and Notices.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable(s).
2. Disable the SIR system. Refer to D i s a b l i n g the
S I R S y s t e m in SIR.
3. Remove the three relay center bolts from the
underside of the wheel opening.
4. Remove the bulkhead connector.
5. Remove the following components from the
bulkhead connector:
• The screws from the convenience center to
the cowl
• The cruise control harness (if equipped)
• The forward lamp harness
• The SIR system harness
• The relay center
6. Remove the coolant reservoir. Refer C o o l a n t
R e c o v e r y R e s e r v o i r R e p l a c e m e n t in Engine
Cooling.
7. Disconnect the antenna lead-in and the grommet.
8. Remove the knee bolster. Refer to K n e e
B o ls te r R e p la c e m e n t.
 9, Remove the steering shaft pinch bolt.
10 , Remove the left and the right siil plate front screw.
11 , Remove the left and the right hinge pillar trim
panels. Refer to Trim Panel Replacement -
Hinge Pillar in Interior Trim.
12 . Remove the brake release handle from the cable.
The clip releases the handle from the cable.
13, Remove the reaction plate assembly.
14, Remove the tie bar.
15, Remove the knee deflector bracket.
16, Disconnect the 8-way column connector.
17, Disconnect the 48-way connector retainer in order
to access the two lower column nuts.
18, Disconnect the shift cable
(Automatic transmission).
19, Remove the steering column from the vehicle.
20 , Remove the shift levers.
• Remove the transfer case knob by pulling the
knob straight up. S4WD models must be in
the 4-LO range.
• Remove the manual transmission shift lever
(if equipped).
21 Remove the front floor console, if necessary.
Remove the left and the right lower IP pivot bolts.

277086
23. Remove the IP storage compartment door.
24. Remove the IP storage compartment.
Squeeze the compartment in order to release the
compartment.
25. Remove the two IP attaching bolts through the
storage compartment door.

277093

26. Remove the center support screw.

27. Remove the three IP upper support screws.
28. Remove the IP from the front of the dash.
29. Disconnect the park brake lever. Refer to P a r k
B r a k e L e v e r R e p l a c e m e n t in Parking Brake.
30. Disconnect the following electrical connectors as
necessary:
• The sensing and diagnostic module (SDM)
• The Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
module (HVACM)
• The 22-way engine harness
• The stoplamp switch
• The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) calibrator
module
• The clutch or brake release switches
• The electronic accelerator (Diesel)
• The HVAC control cables (if equipped)
31. Remove the IP from the vehicle.
 To this point, the IP removal is complete. If the IP is
being replaced or refinished.
1. Remove the accessory switch(es) as necessary.
2. Remove the instrument cluster bezel. Refer to
Bezel Replacement ■- IP Cluster.
3. Remove the headlamp switch.
4. Remove the HVAC control assembly.
4.1. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4.2. Disconnect the cables (if equipped).
5. Remove the instrument cluster screws and the
cluster. Refer to IP Cluster Replacement

277106

6. Remove the IP auxiliary storage compartment

(if equipped).
7. Remove the IP cupholder. Refer to Cupholder
Replacement.
8. Remove the ashtray assembly. Refer to Ashtray
Replacement
9. Remove the radio from the carrier. Refer to Radio
Replacement in Entertainment.
10. Remove the two air distribution duct screws.
11. Remove the air distributor duct from the IP.
Squeeze the clips from the front of the IP in order
to release the duct.
12. Disconnect the antenna lead-in.
13. Remove the retaining clips from the inflatable
restraint IP module or the IP compartment
assembly.
14. Remove the inflatable restraint IP module. Refer
to Inflatable Restraint Instrument Panel Module
277092
Replacement
15. Remove the four nuts that retain the IP
compartment assembly to the carrier
(vehicles over 8,600 GVWR).
16. Remove the rosebud retainers on the right side of
the IP forward harness.

277089
17. Remove the IP storage compartment.
Squeeze the compartment in order to release the
compartment.
18. Remove the IP storage compartment lamp.
Slide the compartment in order to release the
compartment.
19. Remove the low coolant module (Diesel only).
20. Remove the data link connector (DLC).
20.1. Remove the one screw.
20.2. Slide the DLC out.
21. Remove the harness retainer to accessory
switches.
22. Remove the fuse panel and the courtesy lamp
switch.
23. Remove the ground screw.
24. Remove the harness from the IP.
25. Remove the jumper harness to the remote
playback device (if equipped).
26. Remove the courtesy lamp switches.
27. Remove the side window defogger outlets.
28. Remove the park brake cable clips.
29. Remove both of the air outlet deflectors.

30. Remove the inflatable restraint IP module

mounting bracket.
31. Remove the IP storage compartment door
check strap.
32. Remove the IP storage compartment door striker.

277090
 Installation Procedure
1. Install the IP storage compartment door striker.
2. Install the IP storage compartment door check
strap to the tubular steel tie bar..
Notice: Refer to F a s t e n e r N o t i c e in Cautions and
Notices.
3. Install the inflatable restraint IP module mounting
bracket.
Tighten
Tighten the bolts to 20 N-m (15 lb ft).
4. Install both of the air outlet deflectors.
5. Connect the parking brake lever. Refer to P a r k
B r a k e L e v e r R e p l a c e m e n t in Parking Brake.
6. Install the side window defogger outlets.
7. Install the courtesy lamp switch.
Connect the electrical connector.
8. Install the jumper harness to the remote playback
277090
device (if equipped).
9. Install the harness to the IP.
10. Install the ground screw.
11. Install the fuse panel and the courtesy lamp
switch.
12. Install the harness retainer to accessory switches.
13. Install the data link connector (DLC).
13.1. Slide the DLC in.
13.2. Install the one screw.
14. Install the low coolant module (Diesel only).
15. Install the IP storage compartment lamp.
16. Install the rosebud retainers for the harness on
the right side of the IP.
17. Install the retaining clips to the inflatable restraint
IP module or the IP compartment assembly.
18. Install the inflatable restraint IP module
(vehicles with 8,600 GVWR).
19. Connect the antenna lead-in.
20. Install the air distributor duct to the IP.
21. Install the two air distributor duct screws.
22. Install the radio into the carrier. Refer to R a d i o
R e p l a c e m e n t in Entertainment.
23. Install the ashtray assembly. Refer to A s h t r a y
R e p la c e m e n t.
24. Install the IP cupholder. Refer to C u p h o l d e r
R e p la c e m e n t.

277089
25. Install the IP auxiliary storage compartment
(if equipped).
26. Install the instrument cluster with the four screws.
Refer to I P C l u s t e r R e p l a c e m e n t .
27. Install the HVAC control assembly.
28. Install the headlamp switch.
29. Install the instrument cluster bezel. Refer to B e z e l
R e p la c e m e n t - IP C lu ste r.

277092

30. Install the accessory switch(es) as necessary.

31. Install the IP to the vehicle.
Rest the IP on the lower pivot studs.
32. Connect the electrical connectors as necessary.
33. Connect the park brake release cable. Refer
to P a r k B r a k e L e v e r R e p l a c e m e n t in
Parking Brake.
34. Install the IP to the cowl.
35. Install the three IP upper support screws.

36. Install the center support screw.

37. Install the IP attaching bolts through the storage
compartment door.
38. Install the IP storage compartment. Refer to
C o m p a r tm e n t R e p la c e m e n t - IP .

277087
39. Install the left and the right IP pivot bolts.
40. Install the shift levers (if equipped).
• Manual transmission
• Transfer case
41. Install the steering column to the vehicle.
Refer to S t e e r i n g C o l u m n R e p l a c e m e n t
( A l l C / K E x c e p t C 3 5 0 0 H D ) in Steering.
42. Connect the shift cable (Automatic transmission).
Refer to S h i f t C a b l e R e p l a c e m e n t in Transmission.
43. Install the 48-way connector and screw built into
the steering column.
44. Install the 8-way column connector.
45. Install the tie bar and the four nuts.
46. Install the knee deflector bracket.
47. Install the reaction plate assembly.
48. Connect the brake release handle to the cable.
49. Install the left and the right hinge pillar trim panels.
Refer to T r i m P a n e l R e p l a c e m e n t - H i n g e P i l l a r in
Interior Trim.
50. Install the left and the right sill plate front screws.
51. Install the steering shaft and the bolt.
52. Install the knee bolster. Refer to K n e e B o l s t e r
R e p la c e m e n t.
53. Install the coolant reservoir tank. Refer C o o l a n t
Recovery R e s e r v o i r Replacement in Engine
Cooling.
54. Install the bulkhead connector.
55. Install the three relay center bolts to the underside
of the wheel opening.
56. Enable the SIR system. Refer to E n a b l i n g t h e S I R
S y s t e m in Restraints.
57. Connect the negative battery cable.

Fuse Block Replacement (Fuse Block)

Removal Procedure
Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in
Cautions and Notices.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the fuse block cover. The cover is on the
left end of the instrument panel.
3. Remove the fuse block.
3.1. Remove the screw at the bottom of the
fuse block.
3.2. Push the fuse block in at the bottom. The
fuse block will pivot clear of two mounting
tabs at the top of the fuse block.
3.3. Push the fuse block back and away from
the instrument panel.
3.4. Mark the fuse block and the wire locations
for reassembly.
4. Remove the wires from the fuse block.
5. Remove the fuse block from the vehicle.
6. Remove the fuses from the block.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the fuses into the block.
2. Install the fuse block into the vehicle.
3. Install the wires to the fuse block in the original
locations.
4. Install the fuse block into the instrument panel.
4.1. Place the two tabs at the at the top of the
fuse block onto the tabs of the
instrument panel.
4.2. Push the bottom of the fuse block into
place from behind the block. Align the
screw hole and attach the retaining screw.
5. Install the fuse block cover to the
instrument panel.
6. Connect the negative battery cable.

Fuse Block Replacement

(Convenience Center)
Removal Procedure
Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution in
Cautions and Notices.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the wiring connectors at the front of
the convenience center.
Label the wires for reassembly.
3. Disconnect the convenience center from the
bulkhead connector.
3.1. Disengage the tabs at the upper left and
lower right posts.
3.2. The tabs clip into the bulkhead connector
and these tabs separate the bulkhead
connector from the convenience center.
4. Disconnect the wiring connectors from the rear of
the convenience center.
Label the connectors for reassembly.
5. Remove the convenience center from the vehicle.
 Installation Procedure
1. Install the convenience center into the vehicle.
2. Connect the wiring connectors to the rear of
the convenience center in the original locations.
3. Connect the convenience center to the bulkhead
connector.
Engage the post tabs of the convenience center
to the bulkhead connector.
4. Connect the wiring connectors to the front of the
convenience center in the original locations.
5. Connect the negative battery cable.

277079
Description and Operation
Instrument Panel Description
Instrument Cluster with Tachometer (Gasoline Engines)

276131

Instrument Cluster with Tachometer (Diesel Engines)

277058
 Instrument Cluster with Tachometer (Police Package)

W
lfcUK. SECURITY

!T & *> o »^4B"ff *n o k dtei B

Q
ft 1 1 I ^
\n 60 70 D(f %
100 SO V ^
*
UNLEADED
BRW
<£
FUELONLY
UNLEADED FUELONLY
i®
\\ I® 0 ^ 40 80 '20 go <
V 4 6 / ^ 30 60 ~
SO 140! 00^.
140 100 f ' \

o
fl
^ C a * "P M /1000 - ^ 2 0 4°
m 20
V
/- s
?l110ct“
^1 1 1 0 ^
180 03
-■31 „
o
^
° °^
11°0 20°
0
O 121
2nn120= - ■ -
* 2001 3 0
%
% I
40
#
#
80
%
10*
1
m
1 f
#
260

>. o -H ra Q M tRt * A 1V W

-O *0
i O f
l l l M o ]T R IP ; 1 0 0 0 Q 0Q 1Q I |r APPLY
r r r r TBRAKE
H r r rTO
r r rSHIFT
T n TFROM
^ ^ PARK |

277061

The instrument panel’s design permits the removal of Coolant Temperature Gauge
all control switches from the drivers side. The
Coolant Temperature and Oil Pressure
standard instrument cluster is equipped with gauges.
Senders (4.3L Engine)
Gauge Description
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge is an electrical instrument that
measures an electrical current from a variable resistor
in the fuel tank. A float controls the variable
resistance.
When the fuel tank is full, the resistance is high. Then,
the fuel gauge moves to the maximum position
(Full) on the gauge face. For diagnostic information,
refer to Instrument Cluster System Check.
Fuel Gauge Sender
The fuel gauge sender attaches to the top of the fuel
tank. A cam lock ring retains the sender. The tank
and the sender uses a seal between them.
The sender has two or three pipes attached to hoses.
One pipe is for the fuel feed line. The second pipe
277098
connects to the vapor canister. The third pipe is a fuel
return line to the fuel tank. Legend
Some senders use a short pigtail connector lead. On (1) Fitting
other senders, the connector attaches directly to (2) Oil Pressure Sender
the sender. For diagnostic information, refer to (3) Shield
Instrument Cluster System Check (4) Oil Pressure Sensor
(5) Fitting
(6) Coolant Temperature Sensor
 Coolant Temperature and Oil Pressure Coolant Temperature Sender (6.5L Engine)
Senders (5.0 and 5.7L Engines)

277103

L egend
Legend (1) Coolant Temperature Sender
(1) Fitting
(2) Oil Pressure Sender The coolant temperature gauge is an electrical gauge
that measures current from a water temperature
(3) Shield
sender in the cylinder head. The sender is in the
(4) Oil Pressure Sensor middle of the cylinder head on the driver’s side
(5) Fitting (4.3L, 5.0L, 5.7L and 7.4L Engines). The 6.5L diesel
(6) Coolant Temperature Sensor engine has the coolant temperature sender on the front
of the cylinder head. For diagnostic information,
Coolant Temperature Sender (7.4L Engine) refer to Instrument Cluster System Check.

Legend
(1) Coolant Temperature Sender
Oil Pressure Gauge Coolant Temperature and Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature and Oil Pressure Senders (5.0 and 5.7L Engines)
Senders (4.3L Engine)

277099

277098 Legend
Legend (1) Fitting
(1) Fitting (2) Oil Pressure Sender
(2) Oil Pressure Sender (3) Shield
(3) Shield (4) Oil Pressure Sensor
(4) Oil Pressure Sensor (5) Fitting
(5) Fitting (6) Coolant Temperature Sensor
(6) Coolant Temperature Sensor
Oil Pressure Sender (7.4L Engine)

Legend
(1) Oil Pressure Sender
 Oil Pressure Sender (6.5L Engine)
277102
Legend
(1) Oil Pressure Sender
The oil pressure gauge is an electrical gauge that
measures current from an oil pressure sender in the
engine block. The oil pressure sender is at the rear of
the engine block on the driver’s side (4.3L, 5.0L,
5.7L and 7.4L Engines). The 6.5L engine has the oil
pressure sender in the middle of the intake manifold.
For diagnostic information, refer to Instrument
Cluster System Check
Voltmeter
The voltmeter measures the voltage level of the
electrical system. The voltmeter uses an internal shunt.
For diagnostic information, refer to Engine Controls
and Transmission/Transaxle.
Indicator Description
Check Gauges Lamp
This indicator lamp is standard on all vehicles. This
lamp comes on when the engine coolant temperature
is too high or the engine oil pressure is too low. If
this lamp comes on, check the gauges and refer to >4
Powertrain On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System
Check in Engine Controls.
Low Coolant Lamp .
This indicator lamp comes on when a low coolant
condition exists. The low coolant module controls the
warning lamp. For diagnostic information, refer to
Instrument Cluster System Check in Engine Controls.
Charging System Warning System
The charging system warning system has an indicator
lamp. One side of the bulb connects to the generator
and the other side connects to the ignition. Refer
to Starting System Check in Engine Electrical.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), or the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON lamp, is part of the computerized
engine control system. Refer to A Powertrain On Board
Diagnostic (OBD) System Check in Engine Controls.
Brake Warning System
The brake warning system has a differential switch
mounted on the brake combination valve. The indicator
lamp is mounted in the instrument cluster.
Electronic PRNDL
Vehicles with automatic transmissions have an
electronic PRNDL. This system uses signals from the
neutral safety back up switch on the side of the
transmission. Signals from this switch determine which
light emitting diodes (LED) in the electronic PRNDL
will illuminate.
Because the system is entirely electronic, no
adjustment is necessary. For diagnostic information,
refer to Instrument Cluster System Check in Engine
Controls.
Instrument Cluster Description
Instrument Cluster
The instrument cluster contains a high-torque type
electric speedometer. The electro-mechanical gauges
plug individually into socket-type metal connectors
in the cluster case.
Electric Speedometer
The electric speedometer drive replaces the
mechanical drive for all C/K applications. Integrated
circuits control the air core speedometer and stepper
motor odometer.
The speedometer and the odometer receive a signal
from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) calibrator
module. This signal is generated from the vehicle
speed sensor (VSS).
Instrument Cluster Operation
Fuel Gauge
Magnetic fields of two. coils moves the pointer of the
fuel gauge. The coils are at right angles to each other.
Battery voltage is applied to the E-coil (empty) and
the circuit divides at the opposite end of the coil. One
path continues to ground through the F-eoil (full).
Another path goes to ground through the variable
resistance of the level sensor in the fuel pump
and sender (Gasoline) or the fuel gauge sender
(Diesel) with single fuel tank vehicles.
The fuel pump balance module averages the
resistance for vehicles with two fuel tanks. When the
tank is low, the resistance of the level sensor is
low. A large current flow passes through the E-coil
and the pointer moves toward E on the fuel gauge.
When the tank is full, the level sensor resistance
is high, and less current passes through the E-coil,
and the pointer moves toward F on the scale. With two
coils operating the pointer, the fuel gauge is not
affected by changes in the system’s battery voltage.
For single fuel tank vehicles, the fuel gauge includes
the following functions:
• The level sensor in the fuel gauge sender
produces a resistance of about 4 ohms when the
tank is empty. The resistance is about 90 ohms
when the tank is full.
• A short to ground in the sender or the wiring
provides a fully empty indication.
• An open in the circuit provides completely full
indication.
For dual fuel tank vehicles, the fuel pump balance
module does the following functions:
• Measures the resistance for both of the fuel
senders.
• Averages the resistance and produces an
equivalent resistance that reflects the average
level of both fuel tanks.
• Power to the module, and a change in the input
resistance, produces a change in the output
resistance to the fuel gauge.
• The fuel pump balance module responds to a very
low resistance (short to ground) in one or both
fuel sender circuits by considering the affected
tank(s) to be empty.
• A very high resistance (open circuit) in either fuel
sender circuit causes the fuel pump balance
module to produce a zero output (both tanks
empty) signal to the fuel gauge.
• Equalizes the level in both of the fuel tanks. Fuel
is fed to the engine from the front (primary)
fuel tank,
• Energizes the fuel pump balance relay when the
level in the front tank decreases to about two
gallons less than the level in the rear (secondary)
fuel tank. This starts the secondary fuel pump
which transfers fuel from the rear tank to
the front tank.
When the level in the front tank increases to about
two gallons greater than the rear tank, the secondary
fuel pump stops. This then empties the rear
tank first.
Oil Pressure Gauge
The oil pressure gauge displays the engine oil
pressure. Current flow through two coils moves the
pointer of the gauge and is similar in operation to the
fuel gauge. The fuel pump oil pressure switch and
sender senses engine oil pressure.
The oil sender has a low resistance
(approximately 0 ohms) when the oil pressure is low
(0 psi), and a high resistance (approximately 90 ohms)
when the oil pressure is high (80 psi).
Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge displays the engine coolant
tem perature. C urrent flow through two. coils m oves the
pointer of the gauge and is similar in operation to
the fuel gauge. The engine coolant temperature sender
has a low resistance at higher temperatures. The
sender has a resistance of approximately 49.5 ohms
at 123°C (260°F).
The sender resistance increases at lower temperatures
and is approximately 1305 ohms at 47°C (100°F).
This causes the current through the sensor to increase
as the coolant temperature increases and the
temperature gauge pointer then moves toward the hot
end of the gauge.
Voltmeter
The voltmeter measures the electrical system’s
voltage when the ignition switch is in the RUN or
START position. The voltmeter measures battery
voltage when supplied to the instrument cluster.
With the engine running, the normal reading is
between 12-16 volts. The indication may decrease to
9.5 volts in cold weather with the engine stopped..
Low Engine Coolant Level Indicator
The low coolant level indicator only illuminates to warn
the operator when the radiator has a low coolant
level. Battery voltage is applied to the low coolant level
indicator module when the ignition switch is in the
RUN or START positions. The low coolant level
indicator module monitors, the resistance of the low
coolant level sensor. The level sensor has a high
resistance of 50,000 ohms or more when the coolant
level is low. This is the setpoint at which the low
coolant level indicator module grounds CKT 68
(YEL/BLK) in order to illuminate the low coolant lamp.
An increasing coolant level can reduce this resistance
to less than 10,000 ohms. The lamp turns off below
approximately 50,000 ohms.
Speedometer and Odometer
The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) produces voltage
pulses of frequency in proportion to vehicle speed. The
vehicle speed sensor (VSS) buffer (Diesel) or the
vehicle control module (VCM) (Gasoline) processes
this signal in order to produce a voltage pulse signal to
the speedometer and the odometer.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM). Voltage pulses are
taken from the ignition control module (ICM) (Gasoline)
or the generator (Diesel) and sent to the tachometer.
Solid state circuits convert the pulse frequency in
order to move the pointer of the tachometer.
PRNDL Indicator
The PRNDL indicator shows the gear selection for an
automatic transmission (AT). The PRNDL indicator
receives coded input through four wires from the
transmission range (TR) selector (part of the
park/neutral position (PNP) switch).
A gear selection light emitting diode (LED), for
example Reverse (Rev), illuminates depending on
which combination of the four wires to the PRNDL
indicator are grounded.
The indications are separate from the transmission’s
inputs to the vehicle control module (VCM) (Gasoline)
or the powertrain control module (PCM) (Diesel).
Check Gauges Lamp
The check gauges lamp illuminates when the engine
oil pressure is low or the engine coolant temperature
is high.
The instrument cluster’s check gauges lamp driver
solid state logic monitors the input signals to the
oil pressure gauge and the temperature gauge.
When the ignition switch is turned to the RUN or the
START position, the check gauges lamp driver
grounds the check gauges lamp when either of the
input signals exceed the setpoint. this cause the lamp
to illuminate. The lamp is normally illuminated when
the ignition switch is turned to the RUN position.
The lamp turns off when the engine is started and the
oil pressure increases above the setpoint.
Instrument Cluster Circuit Description
Cluster Assembly
The Instrument Panel (l/P) Cluster Assembly receives
power from either one or two IP Fuse Block sources.
If Automatic Transmission, power runs from the
TRANS fuse 20, through CKT 1020 (PNK) to pin 7 of
the IP Cluster connector. If Manual Transmission,
power runs from the GAUGES fuse 4, through
CKT 39 (PNK) to pin 7 of the l/P Cluster connector. In
both cases, the GAUGES fuse 4 supplies power to
pin 22 of the l/P Cluster connector.
Power coming in through pin 7 of the l/P Cluster
supplies voltage to the Tachometer, Electric
Speedometer, PRNDL Indicator, and the Check
Gauges Lamp Driver. Pin 22 of the l/P Cluster carries
power to the remaining components within the l/P
Cluster Assembly.
Ground for the l/P Cluster Assembly goes through
two pins. One is pin 4, the other is pin 31. Both
run to splice S215 and onto ground G104 and
G103 (Gas Only).
Fuel Gauge
Magnetic fields of two coils moves the pointer of the
fuel gauge. The coils are at right angles to each other.
Battery voltage is applied to the E-coil (empty) and
the circuit divides at the opposite end of the coil.
One path continues to ground through the F-coil (full).
Another path goes through CKT 30 (PPL) to ground
on single tanks using the variable resistance of
the level sensor in the fuel pump and sender
(Gasoline) or the fuel gauge sender (Diesel). On dual
tank vehicles, CKT 30 (PPL) passes resistance
from either the Vehicle Control Module (VCM) (Gas) or
the Fuel Pump Balance Module (Diesel).
On gasoline vehicles with dual tanks, the VCM sends
a 5 volt reference through CKT 474 (GRY) to the
Fuel Pump Balance Module. The Fuel Pump Balance
Module sends out a fuel level signal to the senders
through either CKT 970 (DK BLU/WHT) for the Primary
Sender and CKT 975 (LT BLU) for the Secondary
Sender. Ground for both senders runs through
CKT 900 (BLK) to the VCM. The Fuel Pump Balance
Module will send the return voltage to the VCM
through CKT 1589 (PPL/WHT) and the VCM will send
the signal onto the Fuel Gauge through CKT 30 (PPL).
The fuel pump balance module averages the
resistance for vehicles with two fuel tanks. When the
tank is low, the resistance of the level sensor is
low. A large current flow passes through the E-coil
and the pointer moves toward E on the fuel gauge.
When the tank is full, the level sensor resistance
is high, and less current passes through the E-coil,
and the pointer moves toward F on the scale. With
two coils operating the pointer, the fuel gauge is
not affected by changes in the system’s battery
voltage.
On diesel vehicles with dual tanks, CKT 30 (PPL) runs
directly to the Fuel Pump Balance Module. Grounds
for the two fuel tank senders run directly to G104. The
remainder of the operation is the same as gasoline.
For single fuel tank vehicles, the fuel gauge includes
the following functions:
• The level sensor in the fuel gauge sender
produces a resistance of about 40 ohms
(Gas)/0 ohms (Diesel) empty and about
250 ohms (Gas)/90 ohms (Diesel) full,
• A short to ground in the sender or the wiring
provides a fully empty indication.
• An open in the circuit provides completely full
indication.
For dual fuel tank vehicles, the fuel pump balance
module does the following functions:
• Measures the resistance for both of the fuel
senders. Resistance is the same as
single tank units.
• Averages the resistance and produces an
equivalent resistance that reflects the average
level of both fuel tanks.
• Power to the module, and a change in the input
resistance, produces a change in the output
resistance to the fuel gauge.
• The fuel pump balance module responds to a very
low resistance (short to ground) in one or both
fuel sender circuits by considering the affected
tank(s) to be empty.
• A very high resistance (open circuit) in either fuel
sender c i rcuit causes the fuel pump balance
module to produce a zero output (both tanks
empty) signal to the fuel gauge.
• Equalizes the level in both of the fuel tanks.
Fuel is fed to the engine from the front (primary)
fuel tank.
• Energizes the fuel pump balance relay when
the level in the front tank decreases to about
two gallons less than the level in the rear
(secondary) fuel tank. This starts the secondary
fuel pump which transfers fuel from the rear
tank to the front tank.
When the level in the front tank increases to about
two gallons greater than the rear tank, the secondary
fuel pump stops. This then empties the rear
tank first.
Oil Pressure Gauge
The oil pressure gauge displays the engine oil
pressure. Current flow through two coils moves the
pointer of the gauge and is similar in operation to the
fuel gauge. The oil pressure sender senses engine
oil pressure sending resistance through CKT 31 (TAN)
to pin 15 of the l/P Cluster.
The oil sender has a low resistance
(approximately 0 ohms) when the oil pressure is low
(0 psi), and a high resistance (approximately 90 ohms)
when the oil pressure is high (80 psi).
Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge displays the engine coolant
temperature. Current flow through two coils moves the
pointer of the gauge and is similar in operation to
the fuel gauge. The engine coolant temperature sender
sends resistance through CKT 35 (DK GRN) to
pin 13 of the l/P Cluster.
The engine coolant temperature sender has low
resistance at higher temperatures. The sender has a
resistance of approximately 49.5 ohms at 123°C
(260°F). The sender resistance increases at lower
temperatures and is approximately 1305 ohms
at 47°C (100°F). This causes the current through the
sensor to increase as the coolant temperature
increases and the temperature gauge pointer then
moves toward the hot end of the gauge.
Voltmeter
The voltmeter measures the electrical system’s
voltage when the ignition switch is in the RUN or
START position. The voltmeter measures battery
voltage when supplied to the instrument cluster.
With the engine running, the normal reading is
between 12-16 volts. The indication may decrease
to 9.5 volts in cold weather with the engine stopped
and ignition in the RUN position.
Low Engine Coolant Level Indicator
(Diesel Only)
The Low Coolant Level Indicator only illuminates to
warn the operator when the surge tank has a low
coolant level. Battery voltage is applied to the
Low Coolant Level Indicator Module from pin 25 of the
l/P Cluster through CKT 68 (YEL/BLK) when the
ignition switch is in the RUN or START positions. The
Low Coolant Level Indicator Module monitors the
resistance of the Low Coolant Level Sensor. The level
sensor has a high resistance of 50,000 ohms or
more when the coolant level is low. This is the set
point at which the Low Coolant Level Indicator Module
grounds CKT 68 (YEL/BLK) in order to illuminate
the low coolant lamp.
Speedometer and Odometer
The Speedometer, grounded through the l/P Cluster
ground circuit, receives its speed signal from either the
VCM (Gas) or PCM (Diesel) through CKT 389
(DK GRN), which connects to the l/P Cluster at pin 14.
Tachometer
The tachometer, also utilizing the l/P Clusters
ground, displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM). Voltage pulses are taken from the
ignition control (Gasoline) or the generator (Diesel)
through CKT 121 (WHT) and sent to the tachometer
through pin 6 of the l/P Cluster. Solid state circuits
convert the pulse frequency in order to move
the pointer of the tachometer.
PRNDL Indicator
The PRNDL indicator shows the gear selection for an
automatic transmission (AT). Voltage for the PRNDL
indicator comes through pin 7 of the l/P Cluster.
The following four circuits pass coded input from
Transmission Range (TR) Switch (part of the
park/neutral position (PNP) switch) to the solid state
within the PRNDL indicator.
The illuminated gear selection depends on the
combination of circuits grounded. Refer to PRNDL
Logic Input Test for indicator combinations.
Check Gauges Lamp
The check gauges lamp illuminates when the engine
oil pressure is low or the engine coolant temperature
is high.
The instrument cluster’s check gauges lamp driver,
solid state logic, monitors the input signals to the
oil pressure gauge and the temperature gauge.
When the ignition switch is turned to the RUN or the
START position, the check gauges lamp driver
grounds the check gauges lamp when either of the
input signals exceed the set point, this causes
the lamp to illuminate. The lamp is normally illuminated
when the ignition switch is turned to the RUN
position. The lamp turns off when the engine is started
and the oil pressure increases above the set point.
All connections of the check gauges lamp driver
are within the l/P Cluster Assembly.
Water In Fuel Lamp (Diesel Only)
Power for the Water In Fuel Lamp is supplied by
pin 22 of the l/P Cluster. Ground for this lamp
is provided by the Water In Fuel Sensor, located on
the Fuel Filter housing. When water is detected by the
sensor, solid state internals within the sensor
provides ground through CKT 508 (YEL/BLK) and
pin 18 of the l/P Cluster Assembly.
Audible Warnings Description
Seat Belt Alarm
This system activates a warning lamp for about
75 seconds and a buzzer for about 8 seconds when
the ignition switch is turner to the RUN position,
and the driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
The warning lamp will be constant for the first
20 seconds, and then flash for the remaining
55 seconds. The buzzer only turns on, and will stay
on, when the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
during the 8 second period. The warning lamp and
buzzer has the following sequence of operation:
Driver’s Seat Belt Unfastened
When the ignition switch is turned to the RUN position,
the warning lamp illuminates constantly for
20 seconds, and then flashes for the remaining
55 seconds. The buzzer turns on and stays on for
8 seconds and then turns off. If the driver’s seat belt
buckle is fastened before the 8 seconds is over,
the buzzer turns on for the balance of the time delay.
Driver’s Seat Belt Fastened
When the ignition switch is turned to the RUN position,
the warning lamp turns on and the buzzer stays off.
At the end of 75 seconds, the warning lamp turns off. If
the driver’s seat belt buckle is unfastened prior to
8 seconds, the buzzer turns on for the balance of the
8 second delay.
Audible Warnings Circuit Description
The audible warning system is controlled by the audio
alarm module. On base models the chimed output
is produced by the audio alarm module. Power
is provided to the system from the GAUGES fuse
through CKT 39 (PNK). Ground is provided through
CKT 150 (BLK) to G200.
Fasten Safety Belts Warning
The fasten safety belts warning chime sounds and the
instrument cluster indicator lights when the ignition
switch is in the RUN, BULB TEST, or START position
with the left front safety belt not fastened. When
this condition occurs, the left front seat belt switch will
close and provide a ground to G202. The audio
alarm module also provides an output to the instrument
cluster safety belt lamp through CKT 234 (YEL).
The fasten safety belts chime will sound for 8 seconds
when ignition voltage is applied and the left front
seat belt is not fastened. The fasten safety belts
warning indicator will light constant for the first
15 seconds and then flash for another 60 seconds. If
the seat belt is fastened within the initial 8 seconds,
the chime will still cycle for the remainder of
the 8 seconds.
Key-ln Warning Alarm
The key-in warning alarm chime will sound if the key
is in the ignition and the left front door is opened.
When this condition occurs, the key-in warning buzzer
switch and the left front door jamb switch will be in
a closed position providing a ground path for either the
BCM or the audio alarm module to G200 through
CKT 150 (BLK). The key-in warning alarm chime will
stop sounding if one of the following conditions occur:
• Removing the key from the ignition.
• Closing the left front door.
Lights On Warning Alarm
The lights on warning alarm chime will sound when
the headlamp and panel dimmer switch is in the PARK
or HEAD position and the ignition switch is placed in
the off position. Voltage is supplied to the audio
alarm module lights on chime function through the
ILLUM fuse through CKT 8 (GRA). Module ground is
provided through CKT 150 (BLK) to G200. The
chime will sound until the ignition is placed in the RUN
position or the headlamp and panel dimmer switch
is placed in the off position.
Overspeed Warning Alarm
The overspeed warning alarm is only provided on
export vehicles. The overspeed alarm chime will sound
when the vehicle speed exceeds 75 mph (120 kmh).
This speed is not adjustable and is based on a
frequency provided from the vehicle control module
(VCM) through CKT 389 (DK GRN). The instrument
cluster also receives a signal input for
speedometer/odometer functions.
Special Too ls and Equipment
Illustration Tool Nymber/ Description ;

; • J 33431-B ;■-■■■;
Signal Generator and
Instrument Panel Tester

14424

J 35749
Oil Pressure Sending Unit
Socket

61200
Keyless Entry
Specifications
______ GM SPO Group Numbers
Application GM SPO Group Number
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver 16 263
Remote Control Door Lock Transmitter 16.263
Remote Control Door Lock Transmitter Battery 21.271

Schematic and Routing Diagrams

Keyless Entry Schematic References
Section Number - Subsection
Reference on Schematic Name
Ground Distribution Cell -14 8 - Wiring Systems
Interior Lights Cell - 114 8 - Lighting Systems
Liftgate Window Release Cell - 134 8 - Body Rear End
Power Distribution Cell - 10 8 - Wiring Systems

Keyless Entry Schematic Icons

.. Icon Icon Definition
Refer to ESD Notice in Caution and Notices.

330402
 8-586
„ ^ 1IP
Power Power <
( PWR-ACCY IIP
.Fuse * Circuit

Keyless Entry______________________________________________________________________________
Distribution .H8 ~ GAUGES
----------- Distribution Fuse
1 Cel! 10
J7j
. P Fuse 4
10 A r
B lo c k Cell 10
Breaker
A6 I 20 A
( (w/Regular/Extendad G ab)
Block
A7 3QA
(Except Regular/Extended Cab)
a
2 ORN 540
0.8 PNK 39 ” 1 Convenience Doorlock
Center Relay
i D3 i
S256 i A "1 Headlamp
V C210c 2 ORN 540 * And Panel
0.8 ORN 640 2 ORN 540 1Dimmer Switch r Data Link
J Interior :1 1Connector
2 ORN 540 S255 Lights i i
Power I* MB J
Distribution S213 Power
Cell 10 Distribution 8Y
Cell 10
w/ w/ Cargo 0.5 GRY 157 0.35 BLK/WHT 1455
0.35 PNK 39 Liftgate Doors

K, C299 2 ORN 540 J K 02m

0.8 ORN 640 <w/ Liftgate)
0.5 PNK 39 2 ORN 540 (w/ Cargo Doors) 0.5 GRY 157 0.35 BLK/WHT 1455
J F K L
Ignition Battery Battery T Program Remote
Dome Lamp Signal Control
B+ B+ B+ Defeat B+ Door Lock
Rear Door Driver
t Passenger
Anri R
And ear
Rear \ " Liftgate D oor\ I' - / Door
Lock
\
\
• Door
Unlock
Receiver
Door Unlock \ Unlock Lock \ / Horn
\T *
X y, Ground >J, I 0u|Pui j __________ j
Output
Signal

s N H G R c A
0.8 LT BLU 195 0.5 BLK 28
1 TAN 694
0.8 WHT 156 2 TAN 294 0.8 BLK 1576 (w/Liftgate) 0.8 WHT 194 F C210
Interior T Convenience
Lights 2 BLK/WHT 56 (w/ Cargo Doors)
1Center
Cell 114
0.8 BLK 150 w/ w/ Cargo
Utgate Doors
Ground
Distribution ^8251 Door
Cell 14
0.8 BLK 1576 Door Lock

Ground
2 BLK 150 / 2 BLK/WHT 56.
Distribution S259 V,A ■* Underhood
Cell 14
5 BLK V
S258
V
S265
V
RH Connector
V
$261
V
S257
I
1
r
1
Horn I Fuse Block
1Relay i
-§G202 Cargo Door l _ j
 Body and Accessories_________________________________________________________________________
I Hot At All Times]

CIG LTR iup

Fuse
Fuse 13 i Block
'J 20 A
I Interior

0
— _ JL— — J Lights
Pickup Cell 114
Suburban/ Extended Cab
Utility Crew Cab Only

io r n T
■.8 ORN 640
640
Power
Distribution
Cell 10
«#— — — oS264
1 ORN 640
0
1 ORN ■640 Door
Remote
Rear Lock
Door
Control Door 1 ORN 640 Lock Unlock Switch
Control
Lock Receiver r ■ ‘ "JConvenience Battery Signal Signal Signal Ground Module
A i
1D2'
Center %s
,Y c]
%/
D
V
F A
I i 1 ORN 640
0.8 ORN 640 i- « 0.5 GRN/BLK 1897
Power 1 WHT ■194
b' C210 r Distribution . 1 LT
Cell 10 0.8 BLK 150
1 ORN 649. _ _ j BLU 195
X ^ S 2 5 6 1 ORN C301 1 QRN II— .— .—
0.8 ORN 640 0.8 ORN 640 640 640 S434
A, €209 1 ORN 640 0.5
F, C213 BLK 150
1 ORN 640 io r n 640 Door
^P500 £ P600 B Jamb
(w/o PWR WDO) B (w/o PWR WDO) B
(w/PWRWDO) D (w/PWRWDO) D
C a rg o J" Lock 1" Unlock "! Switch
Door! j Cargo
Lock T unlock 1 LF Door 'L ock t Unlock 1 RF Door Lock
f 1 ; Lock Switch I | ! Lock Switch Switch
(Shown at rest) (Shown at rest) S*
S410
D HI
1 LT BLU 195
D H (w/o PWR WDO) H D (w/o PWR WDO)
C E C (w/PWR WDO) 1 WHT 194
E (w/PWRWDO) Ground
1 LT BLU 195 LT BLU 195 Distribution
S P500 £ P500 1 LT BLU Cell 14
c C209 S431 <
, C209 D 195
0.8 E; 1 WHT 194
LT BLU 1950.8W HT 194 0.8 LT BLU 1950.8WHT 194 0.8 LT BLU C302 1 LT BLU 195
— <4— S432
S261 195
S257 1 WHT C302 1 WHT
0.8 LT BLU 1195 — «—
194 194
A 0.8 LT BLU 195
0.8 WHT 194 0.8 WHT 1194
5 BLK 150
Remote
Control Door V
Door Lock Relay Door Lock Relay Remote Control Door
:G400
Lack Receiver Lock Receiver

493253
8-588 Keyless Entry______________________________________________________________________________
Body and Accessories________________________________________________________________________
0
0

Distribution
Gro und

Cell 14
C C302
Control Module

0.5 PPL 328

0.5 PPL 328

Door Lock

|4Door]
8-590 Keyless Entry_____________________________________________________________________________
493385
0
0
Remote Control Door
Lock Receiver

Window Release
Cell 134
Liftgate
Co mponent Locator
Keyless Entry Com ponenfs
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Cargo Poor Contactor, On the rear body opening and the door, on
Component Views Connector End Views
Right Side the upper right side
in Doors in Doors
Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
Under the left side of the IP, on the
Convenience Center Component Views \n Connector End Views
bulkhead
Wiring Systems in Wiring Systems
Data Link Data Link
Communications Communications
Data Link Under LH of IP, LH of Steering Column,
Component Views Connector End Views
Connector (DLC) mounted to bottom of Knee Bolster
in Data Link in Data Link
Communications Communications
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Door Jamb At the rear body opening, part of the right
Component Views Connector End Views
Switch, Cargo rear cargo door contactor
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Door Lock
Behind the LH C Pillar Component Views Connector End Views
Control Module
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Door Lock Motor, Inside the right rear door, at the lower right
Component Views Connector End Views
Cargo corner
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Door Lock Motor, Inside the left front door, part of the door Component Views Connector End Views
Left Front handle in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Door Lock Motor, Inside the left rear door, part of the door
Component Views Connector End Views
Left Rear handle
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Door Lock Motor, Inside the right front door, part of the door
Component Views Connector End Views
Right Front handle
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Door Lock Motor, Inside the right rear door, part of the door
Component Views Connector End Views
Right Rear handle
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Under the center of the IP, near the
Door Lock Relay Component Views Connector End Views
remote control door lock receiver
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Door Lock
On top of the right D pillar Component Views Connector End Views
Switch, Cargo
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Door Lock Switch, On the left front door trim panel, below the Component Views Connector End Views
Left Front inside door handle
in Doors in Doors
Power Door Systems Power Door Systems
Door Lock Switch, On the right front door trim panel, below Component Views Connector End Views
Right Front the inside door handle
in Doors in Doors
Lighting Systems Lighting Systems
Headlamp and Panel
Lower Left side of the IP Component Views Connector End Views
Dimmer Switch
in Lighting Systems in Lighting Systems
At the top of the steering column, under Horns Component Views Horns Connector End
Horn Switch
the steering wheel pad in Horns Views in Horns
Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
To the left of the IP, near the left front
IP Fuse Block Component Views Connector End Views
door jamb switch
in Wiring Systems in Wiring Systems
 Keyless Entry Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Automatic Transmission
AT Internal Connector
Park/Neutral Position Electronic Component
At LH center of Transmission End Views in Automatic
(PNP) Switch Views (Internal) in
Transmission
Automatic Transmission
Remote Control Door Under the IP, inside the right of the right Keyless Entry Keyless Entry Connector
Lock Receiver steering column support bracket Component Views End Views
Power and Grounding Power and Grounding
In the left rear side of the engine
Underhood Fuse Block Component Views in Connector End Views in
compartment, on the fender
Wiring Systems Wiring Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
C208 Inside the lower left side A pillar End Views in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
C209 Inside the lower left side A pillar End Views in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
€210 At the convenience center
in Wiring Systems
End Views in Wiring
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
C213 Inside the lower right side A pillar End Views in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
Systems
Part of the IP harness to steering column Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
C266 harness, to the left side of the steering End Views in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
column, near the bulkhead Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
C280. At the convenience center
in Wiring Systems
End Views in Wiring
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Behind the left side of the IP, near the Harness Routing Views
C298 End Views in Wiring
convenience center in Wiring Systems
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Behind RH of IP, above HVAC evaporator, Harness Routing Views
C299 End Views in Wiring
housing in Wiring Systems
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
C301 At the left front kick panel End Views in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
C302 At the LF kick panel End Views in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
C314 Harness Routing Views
On the left D-pijlar behind the trim cover End Views in Wiring
(Suburban/Utility) in Wiring Systems
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
C497 In the right side B pillar End Views in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
Systems
Inline Harness Connector
Harness Routing Views
C499 In the left side B pillar End Views in Wiring
in Wiring Systems
Systems
Power and Grounding
G105
On the right front side of the engine block Component Views in —
(Gas)
Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding
G105 Right Rear of the cylinder head,
Component Views in
(Diesel) cylinder #7 intake bolt
Wiring Systems
 Keyless Entry Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Power and Grounding
Behind the left side of the IP, below the Component Views in
G200 fuse block, on the tie bar —

Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding
On the right side of the instrument panel,
G202 mounted to the HVAC plenum bracket
Component Views in —

Wiring Systems
Power and Grounding
G400 On the right side B pillar, near the door Component Views —
(Utility/Suburban) striker in Wiring Systems
In the right rear side of the engine Harness Routing Views
P101 compartment, at the bulkhead in Wiring Systems . — .

Harness Routing Views

P500 At the left front door in Wiring Systems
Harness Routing Views
P600 At the right front door —
in Wiring Systems
Harness Routing Views
P700 At the left rear door in Wiring Systems
__

Harness Routing Views

P800 At the right rear door
in Wiring Systems
—

IP harness, approx. 10 cm (4 in) from

S204 C100, towards Data Link Connector (DLC) — — .

IP harness, approx. 6 cm (2.5 in) from IP

S208 compartment box lamp breakout
_ ■
■ —

IP harness, approx. 16 cm (6 in) from

S218 — - —
inflatable restraint switch breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 13 cm (5 in)
S251 from LF Door harness breakout, toward IP —
harness breakout
Crossbody Harness, approx. 20 cm (8 in)
S255 from C210 breakout, toward the LH Seat ■ ■ — '
harness breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in)
S256 — ■■
(Pickup/Extended Cab)
from C210 breakout, toward LH Seat —
harness breakout
crossbody harness, approx. 11 cm (4 in)
S256
(Utility/ Suburban)
from C210 breakout, toward the LH Seat — —
harness breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 1 cm (0.5 in)
S256 before door lock relay breakout, toward the —
(Crew Cab) LH Seat harness breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in)
S257 left of door lock relay breakout, toward IP — —
harness breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 5 cm (2 in)
S257 from C231 breakout, toward IP harness —
(Pickup/Extended Cab) breakout — .

Crossbody harness, approx. 5 cm (2 in)

S257 from C231 breakout, toward door lock
(Suburban/Utility) — — .

relay breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 7 cm (2.5 in)
S259 into seat belt switch harness, toward C212 — . _

Crossbody harness, approx. 12 cm (4.5 in)

S261 from seat belt switch breakout, toward RH — —
door harness breakout
 Keyless Entry Components (cont’d)
Name Location Locator View Connector End View
Crossbody harness, approx. 19 cm (7.5 in)
S262
from seat belt switch breakout, toward IP — —■
(Crew Cab)
harness breakout
Crossbody harness, approx. 25 cm (10 in)
S262
from seat belt switch breakout, toward IP
(Suburban/Utility)
harness breakout
: IP harness, approx. 4 cm (1.5 in) from
S264 instrument cluster breakout, toward radio —
connectors breakout
S265 Crossbody harness, approx. 8 cm (3 in)
(Suburban/Utility) from LF door breakout —. —
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 37 cm
S410 (14.5 in) from RR door jamb switch
(2-door Utility) breakout, toward RH door speaker .. — —
breakout
S410 Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 12 cm
(4-Door (4.5 in) from RR door speaker breakout, ■— —
Utility/Suburban) toward RR door jamb breakout
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 7 cm
■ S431
(2.5 in) from rear dome lamp harness
(2-Door Utility ' — —
breakout, toward rear window defogger
w/Cargo Doors)
breakout
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 7 cm
S431
(2.5 in) from rear window defogger
(4-Door Utility/Suburban —•
harness breakout, toward LR speaker
w/Rear Heat)
breakout
S431
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 32 cm
(4-Door Utility/Suburban _
(12.5 in) into crossbody harness breakout
w/o Rear Heat)
S431
Front-to-rear body harness, approx, 65 cm . ___
(4-Door Utility/Suburban —■
(24.5 in) into crossbody harness breakout
w/o C69)
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 7 cm
S432 (2-Door Utility
(2.5 in) from LH door speaker breakout, — —
w/Cargo doors)
toward rear dome lamp switch breakout
S432 Front-to-rear body harness, in crossbody
(4-Door Utility/ harness breakout, approx. 140 cm (55 in) —■ —
Suburban w/o C69) from C301 breakout
S432 Front-to-rear body harness, in crossbody
(4-Door Utility/Suburban harness breakout, approx. 13 cm (5 in) . — ■ —•
w/o Rear heat) from C232 breakout
S432 Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 7 cm
(4-Door Utility/ (2.5 in) from rear dome lamp harness — ’

Suburban) breakout, toward LR speaker

Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 7 cm
S434
(2.5 in) from front dome lamp breakout, —
(2-Door Utility)
toward crossbody harness breakout
Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 20 cm
S434
(4-Door Utility/
(8 in) before the Rear Dome Lamp
harness breakout, towards the HVAC — —
Suburban)
Module
S434. Front-to-rear body harness, approx. 25 cm
(4-Door Utility/ (10 in) into crossbody harness breakout, — - —
Suburban w/o C69) towards C301
Keyless Entry C o mponent Views
Remote Keyless Door Lock Receiver

375308

(1) Remote Keyless Transmitter (2) Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Keyless Entry Connector End Views Remote Control Door Lock
Receiver Connector (cont’d)
Remote Control Door Lock
Receiver Connector

C
j1 n n
□
n
i1 ..n ....... n n
E M I E iie ii°]|T][b][X|
c □
Lt 1c ( )□

CD
L______ I
O

-p-
0 0 [ T IIM IIN

>

m
0 S E II E II D
L ( □
C □
DO

m
U
0 0 E || M II N TJ o ~
C □
U U
283847

o 12129431
283847
Connector Part
Information • CONN 16F
• 12129431 M/P 280ACT (Black)
Connector Part
Information • CONN 16F Circuit
M/P 28.0ACT (Black) Pin Wire Color No. Function
Circuit G BLK 1576 Release Switch Output
Pin Wire Color No. Function Power Door Lock Feed-
H TAN 294
A TAN 694 Power Door Lock Feed Unlock
B WHT 194 Power Door Lock Feed J Fuse Output- IGN 1
PNK 39
Type III- Fuse
Horn Relay
C BLK 28 K GRY 157 Interior Lamp Feed
Output - Coil
D — — Not Used Keyless Entry Program
L BLK/WHT 1455 Enable Signal
Fuse Output- Battery
E ORN 540 M _ — Not Used
Type III- Fuse
Fuse Output-Battery N BLK 150 Ground
F ORN 540
Type III- Fuse P — Not Used
Fuse Output-Battery Power Door Lock
F ORN 640 R LT BLU 195
Type III- Fuse Feed- Lock
S WHT 156 Courtesy Lamp Output
Diagnostic Information and Procedures
Remote Keyless Entry System Check
Step Action j Normal Result(s) Abnormal Result(s)*
Important: Perform the following steps before beginning the system check:
1. Ensure that the power door lock system operates properly. Refer to Power Door Locks System Check in Doors.
2. Ensure that the Endgate Window Release system operates properly. Refer to Endgate Window Release System Check
in Body Rear End.
3. Perform the transmitter test. Refer to Transmitter Test.
If the power door lock system and the transmitter are operating properly, begin the Keyless Entry System Check.
Depress the UNLOCK button on the The the drivers door unlocks and the • Power Door Locks Inoperative
remote keyless entry courtesy lamps illuminate. (4 Door Utility/Suburban)
1 transmitter once.
• Courtesy Lamps Inoperative with
Transmitter
Depress the UNLOCK button on the All doors unlock (except cargo doors • Door Lock Inoperative with
remote keyless entry or liftgate) and the courtesy lamps Transmitter - All
2 transmitter twice. illuminate.
• Courtesy Lamps Inoperative with
Transmitter
Depress the REAR 2X button twice. The cargo doors unlock or the liftgate • Door Lock/Unlock Inop with
releases and the courtesy lamps Transmitter - Rear
3 illuminate.
• Liftgate Window Release
Inoperative w/Transmitter
Depress the LOCK button on the All doors lock including the cargo Door Lock Inoperative with
4 ", remote keyless entry doors (the liftgate must be manually Transmitter - All
transmitter once. latched).

Remote Keyless Entry System Inoperative

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
DEFINITION: This procedure should only be used if the door locks operate with the door lock switches and are inoperative
with the remote control door lock transmitter.
Has the Remote Keyless Entry System Check been Go to Remote
1 performed? — Keyless Entry
Go to Step 2 System Check
Resynchronize the transmitter. Refer to Transmitter Go to Remote
2 Synchronization. — Keyless Entry
Does the transmitter function properly? System Check Go to Step 3
Inspect the PWR-ACCY fuse 20 at the IP fuse block for
3 an open. —
Is the fuse open? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 4
1. Disconnect the remote control door lock receiver
connector.
4 2. Connect a J 39200 from the remote control door lock —
receiver cavity E and ground.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
1. Disconnect the remote control door lock receiver
connector (RCDLR).
5 2, Connect a J 39200 from the RCDLR connector —-
cavity H and ground G202.
Is continuity present? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8
Repair the open in CKT 540 (ORN) between the RCDLR
connector cavity E and the IP fuse block. Refer to Wiring Go to Remote
6 Repairs in Wiring Systems. —
Keyless Entry
Is the repair complete? System Check Go to Step 7
 Remote Keyless Entry System Inoperative (cont’d)
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Replace the remote control door lock receiver. Go to Remote
7 Is the repair complete? — Keyless Entry —
System Check
Repair the open in CKT 150 (BLK) wire between the
RCDLR connector cavity N and ground G202. Refer to Go to Remote
8 Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Keyless Entry
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the fuse. Go to Remote
9 Is the repair complete? — Keyless Entry —
System Check

RKE System Does Not Change Customization Modes

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
Will the remote control door lock receiver program but not Go to RKE
1 change operating modes? — System Does
Go to Step 2 Not Program
1. Disconnect remote control door lock receiver
connector.
2. Connect a J 39200 J 39200 DMM, set on volts,
2 between cavity J and ground. —
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
Is there battery voltage? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to Go to Transmitter
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Remote Programming
3 Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement. — Transmitter —
Is the repair complete? Programming
(Base)
Repair open in CKT 39 (PNK) between remote control Go to Transmitter
door lock receiver and the l/P fuse block. Refer to Wiring Programming
4 Repairs Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. ■— ■
Transmitter
Is the repair complete? Programming

RKE System Does Not Program

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
1. Disconnect the remote control door lock receiver
connector.
1 2. Connect a J 39200, set on ohms, between cavity L —
and the Data Link Connector (DLC) cavity 8.
Is there continuity? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3
Replace the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to
2 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement — Go to Transmitter —
Is the repair complete? Programming
Repair open in CKT 1455 (BLK/WHT) between the remote
control door lock receiver and the Data Link Connector
3 (DLC). Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. — —
Go to Transmitter
Is the repair complete? Programming
Transm itter Test
Test Description 4. If any or all of the buttons are inoperative after
The number below refers to the step number on the battery replacement, the transmitter is
diagnostic table. malfunctioning and must be replaced.
2. If any but not all of the buttons are inoperative the
transmitter is malfunctioning and must be
replaced. If all of the buttons are inoperative, the
transmitter battery may need to be replaced.
Transmitter Test
Step Action Yes No
Important: Inspect that the keyless entry transmitter is the correct
modei for the vehicle remote system. A wrong model transmitter may
pass this test, but will not activate the vehicle remote system.
1. Turn ON the J 43241
1
2. Place the transmitter on the J 43421 test pad.
3. Press each button of the transmitter one at a time.
Does a tone sound and the green light illuminate on the J 43421 after
each button is pressed? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 2
Do any of the buttons on the transmitter sound the tone and
"2
illuminate the green light when pressed? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 3
Replace the transmitter battery. Refer to Transmitter Battery
3 Replacement —
Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 4
1. Turn ON the J 43241
2. Place the transmitter on the J 43421 test pad.
4 3. Press each button of the transmitter one at a time.
Does a tone sound and the green light illuminate on the J 43421 after
each button is pressed? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
Replace the transmitter. Refer to Transmitter Replacement
5 _
Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 7
Perform the synchronization procedure. Refer to Transmitter Go to Remote
6 Synchronization Keyless Entry
Did you successfully complete the synchronization? System Check Go to Step 7
Perform the programming procedure. Refer to Transmitter
Programming.
Important: All transmitters which are to be recognized by the remote
keyless entry system must be programmed in a single programming
7
sequence. If the system is placed in program mode it will erase all
previously programmed transmitters upon the receipt of the Go to Remote
programming signal from the first transmitter. Keyless Entry Go to RKE System
Did you successfully complete the programming? System Check Does Not Program
 Door Lock Inoperative with Transmitter - All
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
DEFINITION: This procedure should only be used if the door lock/unlock operate with the door lock switches and are
inoperative with the remote control door lock transmitter.
Did you perform the Remote Keyless Entry Diagnostic Go to Remote
1 System Check? — Keyless Entry
Go to Step 2 System Check
Press the power door lock/unlock button twice on the Go to Remote
2 remote keyless entry transmitter. — Keyless Entry
Does the doors lock/unlock operate? System Check Go to Step 3
Inspect the function with a known good transmitter.
3 —"
Does the doors lock/unlock operate? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5
Reprogram the remote keyless transmitter. Go to Remote
4 Is the repair complete? Keyless Entry
System Check Go to Step 7
1. Disconnect the remote control door lock receiver
(RCDLR) connector.
5 2. Connect a J 39200 between the RCDLR connector —
Go to Remote
cavity H, CKT 294 (TAN) and ground. Keyless Entry
Is voltage present? System Check Go to Step 6
Repair the open in CKT 294 (TAN) wire between the
remote control door lock receiver connector cavity H and
6 connector C209. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Wiring — Go to Remote —
Systems. Keyless Entry
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the iem ule keyless entry transmitter. Go to Remote
7 Is the repair complete? — Keyless Entry —
System Check

Door Unlock Inoperative with Transmitter - A i l

Step Action .Value(s) Yes No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used if the power doors unlock with the power door lock switches
and are inoperative with a keyless entry transmission.
Did you perform the Remote Keyless Entry Go to Remote
1 System Check? Keyless Entry
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the remote control door lock receiver
connector.
2 2. Connect a test lamp between cavity B and ground. —
3. Press the LF door lock switch to the unlock position.
Does the test lamp light? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to Go to Remote
3 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement — Keyless Entry —
Is the repair complete? System Check
Repair the open in CKT 194 (WHT) between the remote
control door lock receiver and S257. Refer to Wiring Go to Remote
4 Repairs in Wiring Systems. — -----
Keyless Entry
Is the repair complete? System Check
 Liftgate Window Release Inoperative w/Transmitter
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used if the liftgate window release operates from the liftgate release
switch and is inoperative with the keyless entry transmitter.
Was the Keyless Entry System Check performed? Go to Remote
1 — Keyless Entry
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the remote control door lock receiver
connector.
2 2. Connect a J 39200 DMM, set on volts, between —
cavity F and ground.
Is battery voltage present? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 5
Connect a DMM, set on ohms, between cavity G and the
3 liftgate release switch cavity D. —
Is there continuity? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6
Replace the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to Go to Remote
4 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement. — . Keyless Entry —
Is the repair complete? System Check
Repair open in CKT 640 (ORN) between remote control
door lock receiver and l/P fuse block. Refer to Wiring Go to Remote
5 Repairs in Wiring Systems. :— —
Keyless Entry
Is the repair complete? System Check
Repair open in CKT 1576 (BLK) between remote control
door lock receiver and S165. Refer to Wiring Repairs in Go to Remote
6 Wiring Systems. —
Keyless Entry
Is the repair complete? System Check

Door Lock/Unlock Inoperative - LF

Step Action Value(s) Yes No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used if the cargo door unlocks with the door lock switches and is
inoperative with the keyless entry transmitter.
Was the Keyless Entry System Check performed? Go to Remote
Keyless Entry
System Check
1 —
Remote Keyless
Entry
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the remote control door lock receiver
connector.
2 2. Connect a J 39200 J 39200 DMM, set on volts, .. . —
between cavity F and ground.
Is there battery voltage? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to Go to Remote
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Remote Keyless En try
Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement (Base). System Check
3 — ' —
Is the repair complete? Remote Keyless
Entry
System Check
Repair open in CKT 540 (ORN) between the remote Go to Remote
control door lock receiver and S255. Refer to Wiring Keyless Entry
Repairs Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. System Check
4 — —
Is the repair complete? Remote Keyless
Entry
System Check
 Door Lock/Unlock Inop with Transmitter - Rear
Step Action Value(s) Yes No
DEFINITION: This diagnostic procedure should only be used if the cargo door unlocks with the door lock switches and is
inoperative with the keyless entry transmitter.
Was the Keyless Entry System Check performed? Go to Remote
Keyless Entry
System Check
1 — Remote Keyless
Entry
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the remote control door lock receiver
connector.
2 2. Connect a J 39200 J 39200 DMM, set on volts, —
between cavity F and ground.
Is there battery voltage? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4
Replace the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to Go to Remote
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Remote Keyless Entry
Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement (Base). System Check
3 — —
Is the repair complete? Remote Keyless
Entry
System Check
Repair open in CKT 540 (ORN) between the remote Go to Remote
control door lock receiver and S255. Refer to Wiring Keyless Entry
Repairs Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. System Check
4 '— Remote Keyless
—
Is the repair complete?
Entry
System Check

Courtesy Lamps Inoperative with Transmitter

Step Actioi Value(s) Yes rib
DEFINITION: This procedure should only be used if the door lock and unlock functions operate and the courtesy lamps
illuminate when a door is open or with the dome lamp switch but do not illuminate with the remote keyless entry transmittei
Did you perform the Remote Keyless Entry Go to Remote
1 System Check? — Keyless Entry
Go to Step 2 System Check
1. Disconnect the remote control door lock receiver
connector.
2 2. Close all vehicle doors.
—
3. Connect a J 39200 DMM between the remote control
door lock receiver connector cavity S and ground.
Is battery voltage present? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
Repair the open in CKT 156 (WHT) between the remote
control door lock receiver and S248. Refer to Wiring Go to Remote
3 Repairs in Wiring Systems. . — —
Keyless Entry
Is the repair complete? System Check
Replace the remote control door lock receiver. Refer to Go to Remote
4 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement — Keyless Entry —
Is the repair complete? System Check
Repair instructio ns
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the daytime running lights (DRL) module.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the remote control door lock
receiver retainer (3).
4. Remove the remote control door lock receiver (2).

Installation Procedure
1. Install the remote control door lock receiver (2).
2. Install the remote control door lock
receiver retainer (3).
3. Connect the electrical connector.
4. Install the DRL module.
5. Inspect the circuit operation of the DRL module,

264918

Transmitter Replacement
1. Check the transmitter number on the back side of
the case.
2. Assure the correct transmitter is being replaced. It
is possible to have up to four transmitters with the
same number.
3. Reprogram remote control door lock reciever.
Refer to Transmitter Programming.
4. Discard the old non-working transmitter.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
Removal Procedure
1. Insert a small coin between the two halves of the
transmitter case at the slot provided near the key
ring hole.
2. Twist the coin in order to open the case.
3. Open the transmitter case.

Notice: Refer to ESD Notice in Cautions and Notices.

4. Remove the battery (2).

Installation Procedure
1. Install the battery (2) with the positive (+)
side down.
Use one 3 V CR2032 battery (or the equivalent).
2. Close the transmitter case (6, 4).
3. Ensure that the seal is in position. Align the
two halves of the case and snap the two halves
together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
5. Replace the batteries when the range
of the transmitter decreases to less than
7 meters (23 feet).

Transm itter Synchronization

1. Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by the RKE system.
The transmitter does not send the same signal
twice to the receiver.
2 . The receiver will not respond to a signal which
has been previously sent. This prevents anyone
from recording and playing back the signal
from the transmitter.
3. Resynchronization will be necessary if any of the
following are true:
• You change the transmitter battery.
• You disconnect the vehicle battery.
• You push the transmitter button 256 times out
of the range of the receiver.
4. In order to resynchronize the transmitter with the
receiver, perform the following steps:
4.1. Stand close to the vehicle.
4.2. Simultaneously press and hold the LOCK
and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for
seven seconds.
The door locks should cycle to confirm
resynchronization.
Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry System Operation
If they key is in the ON position during the
programming procedure, the horn chirp will be
Unlocking the Doors
disabled, if the key is in the OFF position, the horn Important: There are two different transmitters.
chirp will be enabled. The horn will chirp when the lock Pick trucks use a transmitter the does not have the
button is pressed two times. Rear 2X push button on the face of the transmitter.
When reprogramming the remote control door lock
reciever, All transmitters must be programmed at this
time in order for the transmitters to operate the
vehicle. Transmitters not programed at this time will
not work and the procedure will have to be redone with
all the transmitters.
1. Ground pin 4 to pin 8 of the data link
connector (DLC).
The receiver will respond by locking and unlocking
the doors, and activating the liftgate window
release (if equipped) within 2 seconds.
2. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons
simultaneously on the first transmitter to be
programmed until the locks cycle
. (approximately 10 seconds).
3. Repeat step 2 for up to four total transmitters to
be programmed (if available).
The receiver will respond by locking and unlocking
the doors and activating the liftgate window
release (if equipped) within 2 seconds. 264910
4. Remove the ground applied to the DLC.
5. Lock and unlock the doors in order to verify the Press the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once in
transmitter operation. order to unlock the driver’s side door.
6. Activate the rear window release in order to verify Press the UNLOCK button a second time within five
the transmitter operation. seconds in order to unlock the remaining doors.
This includes the liftgate on utility vehicles which are
Description and Operation equipped with this feature.

Remote Keyless Entry System Description Locking the Doors

The keyless entry system operates by means of
remote control. Use the transmitter in order to lock
and unlock the vehicle doors. Use the transmitter
in order to release the endgate or the liftgate window
on the utility models.
The remote control door lock transmitters are supplied
in pairs with each vehicle. The remote control door
lock transmitters are hand-held and attached to a key
ring. The transmitter for pickup models has two
buttons in order to control the operation of the system .
The transmitter for utility models has three buttons
in order to control the operation of the system.
Whenever a button on the transmitter is pressed, the
transmitter sends a coded ultra-high frequency
(UHF) radio signal to the receiver.
The transmitter must be within approximately 9 meters
(30 feet) of the vehicle in order for the receiver to
detect the coded signal. The keyless entry system has
no effect on the normal operation of the power
doors locks. The keyless entry system has no effect 264907
on the endgate or the liftgate window release.
Each receiver is capable of recognizing four Press the LOCK button on the transmitter in order to
transmitters. Replacement transmitters may be lock all of the vehicle doors at once.
obtained, but must be matched to the specific receiver. Press the LOCK button a second time in order to
The transmitter is powered by a three-volt battery verify that the doors are locked. A horn will sound in
and is water resistant. order to verify that the doors are locked.
Endgate/Liftgate Window Release (Rear 2X)
264910
Press the REAR 2X button on the transmitter twice,
within five seconds, in order to unlatch the liftgate
window. Set the vehicle in park or neutral in order to
operate the remote control door lock transmitter.
Remote Keyless Entry System Circuit
Description
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
The remote control door lock receiver is supplied
battery voltge at all times from the PWR ACCY circuit
breaker in the l/P fuse block through CKT 540
(ORN) to cavity E and also cavity F if equipped with
cargo doors. If equipped with a liftgate, cavity F
is powered from the CIG LTR fuse 13 through
CKT 640 (ORN).
The remote control door lock receiver is supplied KEY
ON power from the GAUGES fuse 4 in the l/P fuse
block through CKT 39 (PNK) to cavity J
The remote control door lock receiver is supplied
ground from G202 through CKT 150 (BLK) to cavity N.
Driver Door Unlock
When the unlock button on the transmitter is
depressed once, the remote control door lock receiver
sends a voltage signal through CKT 694 (TAN) to
the LF door lock motor. Since CKT 295 (GRY) grounds
through the door lock relay to CKT 150 (BLK) to
G202, the drivers door unlocks.
Passenger and Cargo Door Unlock
When the unlock button on the transmitter is
depressed twice, the remote control door lock receiver
un locks the driver door as described above and
also sends a voltage signal through CKT 194 (WHT)
to the door lock relay. This energizes the door
unlock coil and voltage is sent through CKT 294 (TAN)
to the RF, RR and LR door lock motors and to the
remote control door lock receiver cavity H. The remote
control door lock receiver then sends a voltage
signal through CKT 56 (BLK/WHT) to the cargo door
lock motor. Since CKT 295 (GRY) grounds through
the door lock relay to CKT 150 (BLK) to G202,
the passenger and cargo door lock motors unlock.
Liftgate Unlock
When the rear unlock button is depressed twice, the
remote control door lock receiver sends a voltage
signal through CKT 1576 (BLK) to the liftgate release
motor. Since CKT 1737 (YEL) grounds through the
Park/Netural Position Switch to CKT 150 (BLK)
to G105, the liftgate is released. The vehicle must be
in Park or Netural for the liftgate to release.
Cargo Door Unlock
When the rear unlock button is depressed twice, the
remote control door lock receiver sends a voltage
signal through CKT 56 (BLK/WHT) to the cargo door
lock motor. Since CKT 295 (GRY) grounds through
the door lock relay to CKT 150 (BLK) to G202,
the cargo door lock motor unlocks.
Driver, Passenger and Cargo Doors Lock
When the lock button on the transmitter is depressed,
the remote control door lock receiver sends a
voltage signal through CKT 195 (LT BLU) to the door
lock relay. This energizes the door lock coil and
voltage is sent through CKT 295 (GRY) to the LF, RF,
RR, LR and the cargo door lock motors. Since
CKT 694 (TAN) internally grounds the LF door lock
motor in the remote control door lock
receiver, CKT 294(TAN) grounds the RF, RR and LR
door lock motors through the door lock relay to
CKT 150 (BLK) to G202 and CKT 56 (BLK/WHT)
grounds the cargo door lock motor through the remote
control door lock receiver back to CKT 294 (TAN),
all doors lock.
Door Lock Verification
When the door lock button is depressed, all doors will
lock as described above and also the remote
control door lock receiver will provide a ground signal
through CKT 28 (BLK) to the horn relay which will
sound the horn.
This feature can be turned ON or OFF when
programming the remote control door lock receiver.
Refer to Transmitter Programming.
Courtesy Lighting Data Link Input
When the door unlock button on the transmitter is The remote control door lock receiver is connected to
depressed, the remote control door lock receiver the DLC through CKT 1455 (BLK/WHT). When this
provides a ground on CKT 156 (WHT) to turn the circuit is grounded it allows the remote control
courtesy lamps on. This provides courtesy lighting for door lock receiver to be programmed. Refer to
approximately 30 seconds before timing out. Transmitter Programming
Courtesy lighting can also be cancelled by a KEY ON
ignition cycle. The dome lamp defeat switch has no
effect on the courtesy lighting that is activated by
a remote transmission from the transmitter. The remote
control door lock receiver acts in much the same
way as the interior lamp control module in that
it receives a switched ground signal on CKT 157
(GRY) through the dome lamp defeat switch
to CKT 328 (PPL) from the door jamb switches and in
turn grounds CKT 156 (WHT) to turn the courtesy
lamps on. However if the dome lamp defeat switch is
ON the remote control door lock receiver will not
see the switched ground signal from the door jamb
switches when a door is opened and no courtesy
lighting will be activated.